JP2010005142A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To restrain a feeling of advantageousness to players from becoming partial by carrying out an expectation performance for a jackpot by a new method. <P>SOLUTION: The game machine has a first start pocket 600 and a second start pocket 602. Prescribed information obtianed on the basis of entrance of game balls into the start pockets is stored by the start pockets which the game balls enter. A win/loss determination relating to a jackpot about the prescribed information stored by the start pockets is made based on the prescribed information obtained on the basis of winning in the start pockets in preference to the prescribed information obtained on the basis of winning in the other start pocket. The result of a win/loss determination relating to a jackpot is displayed on the basis of materialization of prescribed start conditions. Prior to materialization of the prescribed start conditions, a win/loss determination relating to a special performance is carried out. When a determination relating to the special performance results in a win, the possibility that a jackpot will come is suggested. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine called a digipachi has displayed a variation of a symbol based on the winning of a game ball at a starting port, and stopped and displayed the variation displayed symbol. When the symbol is in a specific display mode, a big hit game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a jackpot game is played, a specific display is given after a reach effect that enhances the player's expectation between the start of the symbol change and the stop of the symbol display. A mode is displayed. In addition, there is also a case in which an effect of notifying the degree of jackpot expectation is executed from time to time until the symbol is stopped and displayed after the variation of the symbol is started (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Also, in recent years, in order to increase the interest while suppressing the frequent occurrence of reach production, in spite of the fact that the reach production is not actually performed, even the reach production is performed, but the false production that seems to be a big hit is performed. There is also an amusement machine. As such a gaming machine, for example, there is known a game machine that does not develop into a reach production while making a suggestion that can be a big hit one or more times.

JP 2001-224775 A

  However, if the fake effects as described above occur frequently, there may be various adverse effects such as the player feeling disgusted. Therefore, a method of performing a definite effect instead of a false effect is also conceivable. However, this method is not preferable because there is a possibility that the profitability is biased toward the player.

  In view of the above, the present invention has an object to suppress a bias in the sense of profits to the player by performing an expected effect on the jackpot by a new method.

  In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first start opening capable of entering a game ball, and a second start opening capable of entering a game ball more difficult than the first start opening. And predetermined information is acquired based on a game ball entering either the first start port or the second start port, and the acquired predetermined information is stored separately from the input start port. One of the predetermined information stored separately for the entered starting port, a plurality of lost values, and a plurality of jackpot values based on the entry processing means and a predetermined starting condition being satisfied In comparing with the determination value, the predetermined information acquired based on the winning at one of the starting ports is prioritized over the predetermined information acquired based on the winning at the other starting port. By doing so, it is possible to perform a process of determining whether or not a big hit will occur. A display effect control means for performing a display effect in a predetermined display area on the basis of the fact that the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display effect control means for displaying the result of the determination process by the jackpot determination means in a predetermined display area; Prior to the establishment of the starting condition, predetermined information acquired based on a winning to the one starting port having a relatively high priority in the determination process of winning for the jackpot, and a part of the plurality of lost values And a special effect determination means that can perform a determination process of winning for the special effect by comparing the special effect determination value including a part of the plurality of jackpot values, and a determination process for the special effect. A chance arrival suggesting means capable of suggesting the possibility of the jackpot coming on the basis of the establishment of the start condition based on the determination that the jackpot has been determined. For the predetermined information acquired based on the winning to the other starting port, which has a relatively low priority in the determination process of winning winning, the suggestion by the opportunity arrival suggesting means is suppressed. .

  In the gaming machine of the above means, the winning determination process for the big hit is performed based on the fact that the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The winning determination process for the jackpot is performed by comparing predetermined information acquired based on the game ball having entered one of the first starting port and the second starting port with the jackpot determining value. In the determination process for the jackpot, the predetermined information acquired based on winning in one of the first starting port and the second starting port is acquired based on winning in the other starting port. In addition, the winning judgment for the jackpot is performed in preference to the predetermined information. The result of the winning determination relating to the jackpot is displayed in a predetermined display area on the basis that a predetermined start condition is established.

  In such a gaming machine, the above means is to perform an expected effect on the jackpot by a new method. Specifically, prior to the establishment of the predetermined start condition, a special effect is obtained using predetermined information acquired based on a game ball having entered one of the first start port and the second start port. Such determination processing is performed. In this determination process, the winning determination is performed by comparing the predetermined information with the special effect determination value. The special effect determination value includes a part of a plurality of lose values that are jackpot determination values and a part of a plurality of jackpot values that are also jackpot determination values.

  If the result of the determination process related to the special effect is a win, the possibility of a big hit is suggested prior to the establishment of the start condition. Here, the ratio of the jackpot value to the loss value included in the special effect determination value is preferably larger than the ratio of the jackpot value to the loss value included in the jackpot determination value. Thereby, when a special effect is performed, the expectation for the jackpot is enhanced during this period.

  As described above, the special effect determination value does not include all of the plurality of jackpot values, but includes only a part thereof. Accordingly, when the acquired predetermined information is a special effect determination value, the jackpot winning probability is felt high, and when the acquired predetermined information is not the special effect determination value, the jackpot winning probability is felt low. As a result, while the winning determination process for the jackpot is performed with one probability, the game can be performed as if the winning determination for the jackpot is performed with a plurality of lottery probabilities, with a single probability. It is possible to reduce the monotony of the game as in the case where the winning determination for the big hit is performed.

  In addition, in the above means, the chance that the big hit by the opportunity arrival suggesting means may arrive for the predetermined information acquired based on the winning to the other starting port, which has a relatively low priority in the determination process of winning for the jackpot I tried to suppress the suggestion. Thereby, the technical intervention by the player can be eliminated, and the bias of the sense of value to the player can be suppressed. This is because if the result of the winning judgment regarding the special effect on the predetermined information obtained based on the winning to the other starting port, the priority of the winning judgment process for the big hit is relatively low, Is retained based on the winning combination of one start-up port with a relatively high priority in the determination process of winning for the jackpot (that is, the winning determination process for the jackpot is not easily performed). This is because a situation in which the winning determination process for the information is performed can be caused by the intervention of the technique by the player.

  It should be noted that the suppression of the suggestion by the opportunity arrival suggesting means includes an aspect in which even the determination process related to the special effect by the special effect determination means is not performed, and the determination process related to the special effect by the special effect determination means is performed, but the opportunity arrival suggestion means is performed. In other words, the embodiment does not make any suggestion.

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a bias in the sense of profit for the player by performing the expected effect on the jackpot by a new method.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a perspective view seen from the front of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine.

  1 and 2, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and a pivotable and pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and a game panel 409 (described later). 11), and a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported by the main frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. The locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 are both performed by the locking device 60. The outer frame 2 according to this embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape having a lateral width of approximately 52 cm, a height of approximately 81 cm, and a depth width of approximately 7 cm.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) is formed with a game area 20 in which a game ball driven from a launching device 57 (see FIG. 4) described later can flow down, and the door frame 5 Includes a glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit through which the player can visually recognize the game area 20, and a dish unit 300 disposed below the glass unit 190. The dish unit 300 is configured to be able to store game balls to be supplied to the launching device 57, and game balls (so-called prize balls) as prizes that can be given to the player as a result of the game are also stored in the dish unit. To be paid out. Hereinafter, in this specification, the side on which the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 (left side in FIG. 16) is referred to as a pivotal support side. On the other hand, the side on which the main body frame 3 is opened, that is, the right side in FIG.

  A lower decorative plate 6 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 6a is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Although the details will be described later, the outer frame 2 is a connection for connecting upper and lower wooden upper and lower frame plates and left and right light alloy (aluminum) side frame plates at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with members. The upper support bracket 47 and the lower support bracket 8 provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative plate 6 on the upper side of the upper frame 7 and the lower support plate 8 provided on the upper side of the outer frame 2, respectively, By engaging the pivotal support 48, the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed.

  Further, the game effect unit 4 can be detachably mounted on the main body frame 3 as described above. In addition, as shown in FIG. A member (tank rail) 51, a ball passage unit 52, and a ball dispensing device (ball dispensing unit) 53 are attached, and a substrate unit 54 is attached to the lower part of the back surface thereof. The board unit 54 includes various control boards and power supply boards 395 for controlling electrical components provided on the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the launch device 57 and the game effect unit 4 (see FIG. 84). Etc. are provided together. Further, a rear opening 70 (see FIG. 16) is formed in the main body frame 3, and a back cover 58 that covers the rear opening 70 is detachably provided.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) is provided with a guide rail 482 that partitions the game area 20 and guides the game ball into the game area 20 on the left edge of the game area 20. ing. The guide rail 482 includes an outer rail 472 and an inner rail 462. Further, the upper end of the inner rail 462 has a backflow prevention member 463 that prevents the hit ball once shot and taken inside the game area 20 from flowing back to the outer rail 472 again. On the other hand, at the upper right edge of the game area 20 when viewed from the front, there is an impact portion 476 that repels the hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 472 to the inside of the game area 20 when it hits. is doing. The stopper 476 is made of an elastic body made of rubber or synthetic resin.

  Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle unit 318 in the above-described dish unit 300. Here, the number of the dish units 300 provided in the door frame 5 is one, and the handle unit 318 conventionally provided in the main body frame 3 is provided in the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side. Moreover, since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front.

[Outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. FIG. 8 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the outer frame. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 8A, a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A, a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 10A, and FIG. It is EE sectional drawing (D) of).

  6 and 7, the outer frame 2 connects the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 with connecting members 14 for connecting the respective end portions. By this, it is assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape. The “side frame plates 12 and 13” correspond to the “vertical frame (vertical plate)” of the present invention.

  Specifically, the connecting member 14 is formed in a podium shape having a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center portion is formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The engagement notches 10B and 11B are fitted. Then, the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14 that are lowered one step, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are disposed on one side of the left and right portions that are lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact. In this state, the insertion holes 10C and 11C formed on both sides of the engagement notch 10B of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 11B of the lower frame plate 11, respectively, A plurality (two in the case of illustration) of connecting holes 16 (shown in the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side in FIG. 7) formed in the planes of the left and right portions lowered. Are also present in other connecting members 14), and are fixed by a plurality (two in the illustrated case) of connecting screws 16 </ b> B from above or below.

  Furthermore, a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 12B, 13B drilled in the upper and lower end portions of the side frame plates 12, 13 and a plurality formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions lowered by one step. (In the illustrated case, three) connecting holes 15 (shown on the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the open side frame plate 13 in FIG. 7 but also on the other connecting members 14) Are fixed with a plurality (three in the illustrated case) of connecting screws 15B from the outside of the side, so that the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 Are firmly connected and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 15B, one connecting screw 15B does not connect the side frame plates 12, 13 and the connecting member 14, but the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the connecting member 14. Are directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 of the short side are made of the same wood as the conventional one, and the long side frame The plates 12 and 13 are made of an extruded plate of a light metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. That is, the outer frame 2 is composed of two wooden short plates and two light metal long plates. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is to make nails easier when placing the pachinko machine 1 on the island. More specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are nailed to the island. Therefore, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the past so that the nails can be easily nailed to the island.

  On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. When the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 is reduced, the left and right widths in the front view of the peripheral walls 290 to 293 (see FIG. 16) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 (that is, the pivot side) Left and right peripheral walls 290 to 293 and the open side peripheral walls 290 to 293 can be widened, and as a result, a large game effect unit 4 in the left and right direction can be mounted on the main body frame 3. It becomes. As a result, the game area 20 can be formed larger as a result, and the effect display device 115 can be enlarged while securing the area where the game ball flows down.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side (the side frame plate 13 on the open side is the side frame plate) in order to reduce the thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the wooden. 12 is a left and right side), and a space portion 12G (the space portion 13G of the side frame plate 13 on the open side is shown in FIG. 9) opened rearward by a rib is formed, and the thickness h2 of the rear portion is It is pultruded to be thick. Of course, the thickness h2 is the same as or slightly thinner than the conventional wooden thickness (that is, it is preferably 19 mm or less in relation to a game effect unit installation recess 30 described later). Further, by forming the space portion 12G in this way, the thickness h2 of the rear portion can be reduced compared to the case where the rib is simply bent from the rear portion of the side frame plates 12 and 13. it can. Note that such pultrusion molding cannot be performed with wood. Therefore, only by making the side frame plates 12 and 13 made of a metal that can be drawn and molded, the strength can be maintained as compared with the conventional wood while reducing the wall thickness. Further, if the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light metal such as an aluminum alloy, the weight of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 10B and 10D, one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14 lowered by one step is fitted in front of the space portion 12G of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side. A groove 12F (the groove 13F of the open side frame 13 is shown in FIG. 6) is formed. As shown in FIGS. 10B to 10D, the other part of the left and right parts whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step from the groove 12 </ b> F to the front end of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side is Although it is in the form of a flat plate that comes into contact, a shallow concave portion for material reduction is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 12F is formed, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 10B, a recess 12H (open side) into which the hanging piece portion 7E of the upper support fitting 7 is inserted. A recess 13H of the side frame plate 13 is formed in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above has a hanging piece of the upper support fitting 7 on the upper portion in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 14. A mounting hole 12 </ b> C for fixing the portion 7 </ b> E to the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side with a mounting screw 17 is formed. Further, a mounting hole 12D is formed in the lower part of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side so as to be fixed with the mounting screw 18 so as to coincide with the mounting hole 8C formed in the side bent portion of the lower support fitting 8. Has been. Further, an attachment for fixing the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side and the lower decorative plate 6 to the front portion of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side at the lower portion of the mounting hole 12D with the fastening screw 6E. A hole 12E is formed.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 14, the open side frame plate 13 is provided with an attachment hole 13 </ b> C for attaching the closing projection 22 with the attachment screw 22 </ b> B. In addition, an attachment hole 13C for attaching the closing projection 23 with the attachment screw 23B is formed in the lower portion of the side frame portion 13C. Furthermore, a mounting hole 13D for fastening the side frame plate 13 and the lower decorative plate 6 with the fastening screws 6E is formed at the lowermost part of the open side frame plate 13. The closing protrusions 22 and 23 are hook portions (details will be described later) of the locking device 60 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. To engage. Then, as will be described later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 868 of the locking device 60 and rotating it to one side, the hook portion of the locking device 60 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are disengaged, and the main body frame 3 is removed. The outer frame 2 can be opened.

  The lower decorative plate 6 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the lower decorative plate 6 are covered with a decorative cover plate 6a, but a fastening protrusion 6C (see FIG. 9) in which an elastic claw is formed at the rear end protrudes from the back surface of the decorative cover plate 6a. Has been established. And this decoration protrusion board 6a is attached to the lower decoration board 6 by making this fixation protrusion 6C penetrate the fixation hole 6D which penetrates the lower decoration board 6. FIG. A guide plate 6F for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer cover 2 on the decorative cover plate 6a.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, an upper support fitting 7 that also functions to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side, and an upper surface on one side of the lower decorative plate 6. A lower support fitting 8 attached along the main body frame 3 is provided.

  The upper support fitting 7 is formed with a support hole 19A formed by bending the support protrusion piece 19 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 19 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin (see FIG. 16) of the upper shaft support 47 of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange hole 19A.

  Further, the lower support fitting 8 is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support projection 21 is projected upward from the protruding portion, and the lower shaft support bracket of the main body frame 3 is projected on the support projection 21. A support hole formed in 48 (see FIG. 16) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, the support protrusion 21 of the lower support bracket 8 is engaged with the support hole formed in the lower shaft support bracket 48 of the main body frame 3, and then the main body frame 3. The shaft can be supported in a freely openable / closable manner by hooking the shaft support pin of the upper shaft support metal 47 into the support hole 19A.

[About the general structure of the game production unit]
Next, a schematic configuration of the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game effect unit. FIG. 12 is a front view of the game effect unit. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the game effect unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the game effect unit 4 is attached so as to surround the game area 20 on the front surface of the panel holder 540 and a substantially square panel holder 540 holding a transparent plate-like game panel 409. And a front component member (game area partition frame member) 680. On the surface of the game panel 409, various game devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 20. Then, after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided, the front component member 680 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 540. The front component member 680 is formed in a circular hollow shape so as to surround the game panel 409, and the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the panel holder 540.

  The front component member 680 has a circular arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side in the clockwise direction to the obliquely upward direction past the center of the upper side as an outer rail 472 and an impact provided at the end of the outer rail 472 A circular arc surface extending from the lower position of the portion 476 in the clockwise direction to the backflow preventing member 463 positioned substantially symmetrically with the stopper 476 is formed as the inner rail 462. The outer rail 472 has a connecting passage portion 477 that is connected to a rail connecting member 44 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 38 at the starting end thereof, and is formed in an oblique shape, and the foul mouth is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 477. 489 is formed. A metal rail is attached in close contact with the outer rail 472 from the upstream end of the foul port 489 to the stop 476. The stopper 476 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that the hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 472 collides with the inside of the game area 20 when the hit ball collides. It is. Further, the backflow prevention member 463 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 20, from flowing back to the outer rail 472 again.

  In the game effect unit 4, a launch guide path 29, which is a flow path of game balls communicating with the game area 20, is formed in the gap between the inner rail 462 and the outer rail 472 constituting the guide rail 482. In addition, the upper end of the launch guide path 29 is provided in the upper part of the game area 20 (where the backflow prevention member 463 is installed), and functions as a ball insertion port 28 for throwing a game ball into the game area 20. In the lower center along the inner rail 462 (that is, the most downstream side in the game area 20), the game balls that have not won any of the winning ports, such as the start ports 602, 604, the general winning port 614, etc. An outlet 471 for discharging from the game area 20 is provided. On the other hand, the game ball that has flowed back through the launch guide path 29 without reaching the game area 20 is taken into a foul port 489 described later and discharged to the dish unit 300 again. The game area 20 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 462.

  A security protrusion 465 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 472 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. This security projection 465 overlaps with the rear end projection piece 215 (see FIG. 39) of the security rear end projecting on the security cover 210 (see FIG. 39) in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, and is pivotally supported. This prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5.

  Further, a rail security groove 464 is formed on the inner rail 462 on the way from the outlet 471 to the stop 476. The rail security groove 464 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 214 (see FIG. 39) protruding from the security cover 210 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed enters. Then, by the uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 464 and the post-crime projection piece 214, the piano is overlapped in the vertical direction and inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the open side. Finally, the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as wires is prevented.

  In addition, the outer shape of the game effect unit 4 is formed with speaker cutouts 468 on the upper left and right sides of the game effect unit 4 so as to accept the rearward protruding portions of the speakers 144a and 144b provided on the back surface of the door frame 5. A passage cutout portion 478 into which a part of a later-described sphere supply passage 59 is inserted is formed obliquely below the side.

  A positioning recess 466 that fits into a unit positioning protrusion 37 formed on the main body frame 3 is formed on one side (shaft support side) of such a game effect unit 4, and the other side (open side) of the game effect unit 4. ) Is provided with a game effect unit stopper 467 inserted into a unit stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 3. When the game effect unit stopper 467 is pushed and fixed, its end is inserted into the unit stopper insertion hole. Thus, in order to fix the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3, after inserting the game effect unit 4 from an oblique direction so that the positioning recess 466 fits into the unit positioning protrusion 37 from the front side of the main body frame 3. Then, the entire game effect unit 4 is pushed into the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, and the game effect unit stop 467 which is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end is inserted into the unit stop. Insert it into the hole and fix it. Thereafter, the game effect unit fixing tool 46 that is rotatably provided on the upper front surface of the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game panel 409. As a result, the entire game effect unit 4 including the game panel 409 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game effect unit 4, the procedure may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure. However, in the illustrated embodiment, a fastening portion 469 is formed by cutting out a part of the lower end side on the lower side of the game effect unit 4, and the fastening portion 469 and the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3 are formed. By fastening the formed fastening hole 41 with a fastener (not shown), it is possible to prevent the game effect unit 4 from being removed from the main body frame 3 unless the fastener is cut.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the game effect unit 4, the balls won in various game devices (for example, a prize opening such as a big prize opening device or a general prize opening) provided in the game area 20 are aligned and guided downstream. A winning space forming cover body 491 is attached, and the display of the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 51, etc.) as a display device arranged on the back surface of the winning space forming cover body 491 is arranged almost at the center of the game area 20 is controlled. A display device control board box 119 in which a display device control board 816 (see FIG. 85) to be stored is housed is attached.

  Further, a substrate holder 505 is fixed on the back surface of the game effect unit 4 below the winning space forming cover body 491. The substrate holder 505 has a space portion (the width of the space portion in the front-rear direction is larger than the width of the winning space formation cover body 491 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the winning space formation cover body 491 in front of the substrate holder 505. Wide). Then, a drop port (not shown) formed on the bottom surface of the space portion joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 471 and communicates with an out ball passage 645 (see FIG. 28) of the substrate unit 54 described later.

  Further, the board holder 505 has a main control board box 25 for housing a main control board 710 (see FIG. 84) for controlling a gaming operation and a peripheral control board box for housing a peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 85) on the back surface thereof. 24 and a unit relay board 625 for connecting to a payout control board 720 (see FIG. 84), a power supply board 395 (see FIG. 84) and the like provided in a board unit 54 described later. Specifically, the substrate holder 505 is mounted with the peripheral control board box 24 in which the peripheral control board 810 is housed, and the main control board 710 is housed in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the peripheral control board box 24. A main control board box 25 is mounted.

  On the unit relay board 625, the unit side drawer connector 2000a that is automatically connected to the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b (see FIG. 28) provided on the board unit 54 only by mounting the game effect unit 4 on the main body frame 3. , 2002a. That is, the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a provided on the game effect unit 4 side and the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b provided on the main body frame 3 side attach the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3 from the front. In this case, they are arranged at positions where they can face each other. The unit relay board 625 is formed with a fitting protrusion 751 extending rearward at a substantially intermediate position between the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a. On the other hand, the board unit 54 is formed with a fitting hole 646 (see FIG. 28) extending in the back direction at a substantially intermediate position between the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b.

  With this structure, when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 from the front surface, the fitting protrusion 751 is fitted into the fitting hole 646 while being guided. At the same time, the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a on the game effect unit 4 side are positioned so as to face the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b on the main body frame 3 side, respectively. Therefore, the main drawer connector 2000 (2000a and 2000b) and the sub drawer connector 2002 (2002a and 2002b) are connected to each other simply by attaching the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to perform a typical connection work and work efficiency is improved.

[About the body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4, 5, and 14 to 18. 4 and 5 are as described above, and FIG. 14 is a front view of the main body frame to which the game effect unit is attached. FIG. 15 is a side view of the main body frame before attaching the components. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the main body frame to which the components are attached as viewed from the front side. FIG. 17 is a rear view of the main body frame to which components are attached. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back side.

  First, the structure of the main body frame 3 to which the game effect unit 4 is attached will be described. The main body frame 3 is integrally formed of synthetic resin. An upper shaft support bracket 47 and a lower shaft support bracket 48 are attached to the outer frame 2 to support the opening and closing shaft. By engaging the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 with the upper support bracket 7 and the lower support bracket 8 attached to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be pivotally supported. As described above, the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. However, when the main body frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 is also opened and closed along with the main body frame 3. .

  By the way, the main body frame 3 according to this embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape as shown in FIGS. 14 and 17, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is from the front to the rear. It has thin-walled (for example, 1 to 3.5 mm thick) peripheral walls (2 mm in this embodiment) 290 to 293 extending so as to stand upright. Moreover, it has the game production | presentation unit installation recessed part (large accommodation part, large accommodation space) 30 which is the space area | region formed by being enclosed by these surrounding surface walls 290-293. As will be described later, the peripheral walls 290 to 293 according to this embodiment are positioned 13 cm or more behind the front surface of the outer frame 2 beyond the rear surface (positions spaced 6 cm or more from the rear surface of the outer frame 2). 1st main body frame side wall provided to cover the game effect unit installation recess 30 from the side frame plate 13 side, and the game effect unit installation recess 30. And a second main body frame side wall provided so as to cover from the side frame plate 12 side, and a main body frame upper wall provided to cover the game effect unit installation recess 30 from above. .

Here, as shown in FIG. 16, various parameters that determine the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30 are as follows.
The maximum width of the front receiving opening 30a of the game production unit installation recess 30 (the distance between the front end portion (peripheral wall 290) of the first main body frame side wall and the front end portion (peripheral wall 290) of the second main body frame side wall) ) L1 is approximately 49cm.
The depth width (depth width on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293) L2 of the game rendering unit installation recess 30 is approximately 14 cm.
-From the inner wall of the part (the last end of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 13 side) of the first body frame side wall part, the part of the second body frame side wall part (the last end) The distance (maximum lateral width on the back side) L3 to the inner wall of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 12 side is approximately 44 cm.
The height (front height) L4 of the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 on the side frame plate 13 side is approximately 54 cm (equivalent to the inner wall side height of the peripheral wall 290 on the side frame plate 12 side).
The height (rear side height) L5 of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 13 side is approximately 46 cm (smaller than the height on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 12 side).

According to such a configuration, even if the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30 is estimated to be small,
Volume = “maximum width L1 of the front receiving port 30a” × “front side height L4” × “depth width of the peripheral wall 290” + “maximum side width L3” × “rear side height L5” × “around” Depth width of face walls 291-293 "
Based on such a calculation formula, “31259” cubic centimeters can be calculated. Of the depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293, the depth width of the peripheral wall 290 is approximately 4.2 cm, and the depth width of the peripheral walls 291 to 293 is approximately 9.3 cm.

  That is, conventionally, the main body frame is provided with a payout device for paying out game balls and a payout passage for guiding the game balls to the payout device, but the game board is designed so as not to interfere with the payout device and the payout passage. In general, this limited the space behind the game board. In this respect, according to such a configuration, the maximum lateral width L1 of the front receiving port 30a is approximately 49 cm, the depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is approximately 14 cm, and further, “31259” cubic centimeters are extremely large. Since the space (the game effect unit installation recess 30) is secured in advance, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom with respect to how the game area, the effect area, and the control area are designed. In addition, since such a game effect unit installation recess 30 is formed so as to be covered by the peripheral wall 290 to 293, members (game area, effect area, and control area) accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30 are formed. It is possible to suitably suppress fraudulent acts on (part).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a large game board member in which a game area 20 (see FIG. 1) is mainly formed with a maximum lateral width of about 49 cm, and mainly over the entire back surface side of the large game board member. A game effect control unit 99 (see FIG. 53) configured to have a large-scale back member in which an effect area and a control area are formed is designed as a member accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. Yes. That is, as will be described later, in this game effect control unit 99, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55,
A frame-shaped front component member (game region partition frame member) 680 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the game region 20 (see FIG. 1).
A transparent plate-like gaming panel 409 arranged to close the gaming area 20 (see FIG. 1) on the rear side of the front component 680.
A fitting step (holding step) 540a that covers the outer periphery of the gaming panel 409 and holds the gaming panel 409 detachably from the front side, and is formed inside the fitting step 540a and the gaming area 20 (FIG. A frame-shaped panel holder 540 that has a through-hole 540b that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a size that roughly corresponds to 1), and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 680.
For large game board members composed of parts such as
A back box 514 attached to the rear side of the panel holder 540 and having a predetermined depth with the front side open and having an opening on the rear wall, and a game on the outer periphery of the opening in the back box 514 A back unit 510 having at least a light emitting decorative body 1720 disposed including a portion overlapping with the game area 20 (see FIG. 1) when projected from the person side.
An effect display device 115 arranged so as to close the opening of the back unit 510 from the rear side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image.
An inner peripheral board that is attached to the back of the effect display device 115 and controls the effect display device 115, and an outer peripheral board that is attached to the back of the light emitting decoration body 1720 and controls the light emission decoration body 1720 And a control device (not shown) in which a plurality of control boards are arranged so as to be stacked in the depth direction.
A large-scale back member composed of parts and the like is attached with a depth width of approximately 8 to 13 cm over substantially the entire back side of the large game board member, and both the large game board member and the large-scale back member The game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 can be accommodated only from the front accommodation opening 30a.

  In such a game effect control unit 99, as will be described later, since a transparent plate-like game panel 409, a back unit 510 and the like are provided, a new effect different from the conventional effect can be performed. become. However, when the transparent panel-like game panel 409 and the back unit 510 are provided in this way, the game area and the effect area are completely separated in the depth direction. Moreover, in this embodiment, an effect display device 115 disposed so as to close the opening of the back unit 510 from the rear side, and a light emitting decorative body 1720 disposed on the outer periphery of the opening of the back unit 510 are provided. Therefore, a control device associated therewith is further provided over substantially the entire back surface of the back unit 510. For this reason, the game effect control unit 99 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape having a depth width of about 12 cm on the entire surface, but according to the game effect unit installation recess 30 described above, Even such a game effect control unit 99 can be stored, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  A plate portion 32 is formed below the game effect unit installation recess 30. In addition, on the front side surrounding the game effect unit installation recess 30, door hook holes 352 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the front right side that is the open side. The door hook hole 352 is provided to penetrate the door frame hook portion 973 provided in the locking device 60 (details will be described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 so as to jump forward. . Further, a unit positioning projection 37 for engaging with a positioning recess 466 formed in the game panel 409 is provided on the inner side surface of the left side portion of the front surface that is the pivot support side.

  By the way, conventionally, it was fundamentally impossible to form the game production unit installation recess 30 having the volume as described above. That is, in a general pachinko machine, the maximum width of the outer frame 2 is set to approximately 520 mm in consideration of island facilities installed in the hall. However, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the thickness of the outer frame is set to approximately 20 mm, the thickness of the vertical frame provided on the left and right (about 40 mm in total), and further, the main body frame with respect to the outer frame Considering the arrangement space such as a sliding rod that can be slid in the vertical direction so as to restrict the opening, it is impossible even to make the lateral width of the member in which the game area into which the game ball is to be formed be 480 mm or more. It was. With such a background, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the minimum lateral strength of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 is ensured, and the maximum lateral width L1 of the front receiving port 30a is approximately 49 cm. An extremely large accommodation space (game production unit installation recess 30) such as approximately 14 cm as a depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the face walls 290 to 293 and further “31259” cubic centimeters is secured in advance.

  Hereinafter, various new configurations capable of securing such a large accommodation space (game production unit installation recess 30) will be described in order.

  First, the board part 32 provided below the game effect unit installation recessed part 30 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. The plate portion 32 is configured on the front side of the main body frame 3.

  As shown in FIG. 14, a firing rail 38 is screwed to the plate portion 32 from the center portion of the front surface toward the open end portion. A rail connection member 44 projects from the front surface of the plate portion 32 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 38 (so-called M-shaped rail) on the shaft support side. The rail connection member 44 is adjacent to the connection passage portion 477 that is the downstream end of the outer rail 472 when the game effect unit 4 is installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30. An elliptical game effect for fixing the lower part of the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) to the side position on the shaft support side of the rail connection member 44 (position opposite to the launch rail 38). A unit fixture 46 is rotatably attached. The game effect unit fixing tool 46 rotates clockwise with the game effect unit 4 placed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, and presses the game effect unit fixing tool 46 against the front surface of the game panel 409. Thus, the entire game effect unit 4 including the game panel 409 is fixed to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when removing the game effect unit 4, the lower part of the game panel 409 can be easily released by turning the game effect unit fixture 46 counterclockwise.

  In the present embodiment, only one dish unit 300 is provided without providing a so-called lower dish as in the prior art. The reason why the lower plate is not provided is to increase the vertical length of the game effect unit 4 in order to enlarge the game area 20. In addition, a firing mechanism including a handle unit 318, a firing rail 38, a rail connection member 44, and the like is disposed on the plate portion 32. The plate portion 32 is located on the front side and below the game effect unit installation recess 30. Therefore, the game area 20 can be expanded in the vertical direction (the height direction seen from the player). Since there is no conventional lower plate, the plate portion 32 and thus the launching mechanism are located generally below the conventional gaming machine.

  By the way, in the position where the rail connecting member 44 protrudes, a so-called foul port is formed in the conventional pachinko machine. This foul mouth played a role of accepting a game ball (so-called foul ball) that flowed back without being driven into the game area 20 despite being launched, and returning the foul ball to the lower plate. The foul port was provided at this position because when the game effect unit is mounted on the main body frame, the rail provided on the game effect unit and the launch rail provided on the main body frame come into contact with each other. This is because there is a risk of damage. Therefore, by providing a gap between the rail on the game effect unit side and the launch rail on the main body frame side, the launch on the game effect unit side rail and the main body frame side that may occur when the game effect unit is mounted on the main body frame. It prevented contact with the rail.

  However, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not provided with a lower plate. Therefore, the foul port 489 (see FIG. 26) is connected to the front structural member 680 (more specifically, on the upstream side (shaft support side) of the connection passage portion 477 and the connection passage portion 477 and the guide rail 482 (outer rail). 472), the foul ball can be returned to the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300. Since the storage unit 361 is below the placement surface (the surface of the main body frame 3 on which the game effect unit 4 is placed) on which the game effect unit 4 is placed, the foul port 489 (see FIG. 26) is used as the game effect. By forming the unit 4 on the front component member 680 side, the foul ball can be returned to the storage portion 361.

  With the above configuration, the foul ball can be returned to the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300 while increasing the vertical length of the game effect unit 4 without providing a lower dish, and the main body frame 3 can be It is possible to prevent contact between the connection passage portion 477 on the game panel 409 side and the firing rail 38 on the main body frame 3 side that may occur when the production unit 4 is mounted.

  Further, a prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided on the side of the game effect unit fixing tool 46 on the side of the shaft support. This prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided in the middle of the prize ball path for paying out the prize balls paid out from the ball payout device 53 (see FIG. 17) to the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side. When the door is opened, the prize ball passage is automatically closed to prevent the balls from spilling out of the prize ball passage, while when the door frame 5 is closed, the prize ball passage automatically communicates with the ball. The prize balls paid out from the payout device 53 are paid out to the dish unit 300. A fastening hole 41 for fastening with a fastening part (not shown) and a fastening part 469 formed in the game effect unit 4 is formed in the plate part 32 above the launch position of the launch rail 38.

  In addition, a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 40 is formed on the lower portion of the open side of the plate portion 32 so as to bulge out toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). 57 is fixed to the launcher mounting portion 40 from the back surface of the main body frame 3. A handle connection window 40 a is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 40. A slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 (see FIG. 1) of the slide unit 230 attached to the back side of the door frame 5 is inserted into the handle connection window 40a. When the door frame 5 is closed, a slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 described later is inserted into the handle connection window 40a, and the handle unit 318 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device 57 are linked. In addition, the launching device 57 can adjust the resilience of the game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of turning operation of the handle unit 318, so that it is at the firing position of the launch rail 38. The game ball can be ejected and launched at a desired position in the game area 20.

  The front structure of the main body frame 3 is generally as described above. Next, the back side structure of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 4 and 17. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 17, a prize ball tank 50 for storing a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball or a rental ball is detachably attached to the upper back of the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the upper wall of the main body frame). It is attached to. A tank rail member 51 that guides the balls from the prize ball tank 50 in a laterally inclined manner is disposed below the prize ball tank 50, and further, a ball path from the lower end of the tank rail member 51 toward the lower side. A unit 52 and a ball dispensing device 53 are provided.

  That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the main body frame upper wall portion of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is inward from the rear end portion (peripheral wall 293) (in FIG. 4, the lower wall). A rear wall portion (second rear wall portion) extending in the direction), and the second main body frame side wall portion of the peripheral wall surfaces 290 to 293 is a rear end portion (peripheral wall surface 293). And a rear wall portion (third rear wall portion) extending inward (leftward in FIG. 4). Among these, the tank rail member 51 is attached to the rear wall portion of the main body frame upper wall portion, and the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53 are attached to the rear wall portion of the second main body frame side wall portion. In this way, the rear end portion of the peripheral wall 293 is purposely bent to provide the rear wall portion, thereby compressing the depth width of the game effect unit installation recess 30 in which the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated. The tank rail member 51, the ball passage unit 52, and the ball dispensing device 53 can be attached to the rear wall without any problem.

  Here, the tank rail member 51 attached to the outer surface of the rear wall portion of the main body frame upper wall portion allows the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 50 to be placed on the side of the first main body frame side wall portion (FIG. 4). A structure is adopted in which it is received from the middle and the left side and flows down to the side of the second main body frame side wall (right side in FIG. 4). Further, the tank rail member 51 includes two passages (not shown) through which game balls flow down in two rows. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure a large number of game balls in the tank rail member 51 itself, and the payout of game balls to the player becomes smooth. The prize ball tank 50 and the tank rail member 51 may be integrally formed. However, considering that the degree of freedom in designing these members is increased, it is practically desirable to provide them as separate members.

  On the other hand, the ball passage unit 52 attached to the outer surface of the rear wall portion of the second main body frame side wall portion is separated from the tank rail member 51 in order to secure a depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30. The game balls are provided with a single passage (not shown) through which the game balls flow down. However, in this case, the game balls that have flowed down in two rows in the tank rail member 51 collide with each other when they reach the ball path unit 52 and become one row, and the payout of the game balls may be delayed. There is a concern that game balls may be clogged.

  Therefore, the tank rail member 51 according to this embodiment includes an order supply device 51a that alternately supplies the game balls that have flowed down in two rows through the two passages to the ball passage unit 52. . Accordingly, it is possible to ensure the depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30 while preferably avoiding the slow payout of the game ball and the occurrence of the clogging of the game ball.

  In addition, as such an order supply device 51a, for example, a gear device provided with two gears that rotate while stocking one game ball between teeth protruding from the rotating body is adopted. Can do. That is, in such a gear device, the two gears are disposed separately from the two passages in a state in which the positions of the teeth of each other are formed so as to deviate from the radius of the game ball. Yes. A game ball that has passed through one of the two gears is supplied to a single passage of the ball passage unit 52. In such a configuration, the game balls flowing down in two rows by the two passages of the tank rail member 51 are sequentially supplied to the one passage one by one by the order supply device 51a. Become.

  Then, the game ball guided to the ball passage unit 52 from the order supply device 51 a falls down the one passage and is further guided to the ball payout device 53. A game ball guided to the ball payout device 53 is a predetermined number of prize balls according to a payout control program executed by a payout control board 720 (see FIG. 84) housed in a payout control board box 55 described later. Or, as a rental ball, it is paid out to the dish unit 300 provided on the front side of the door frame 5. As will be described later, the ball payout device 53 is provided with a payout motor and a rotary payout member that is rotationally driven by the payout motor and pays out the balls one by one.

  Further, a board unit 54 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 (a surface bent inward from a later-described fourth peripheral wall 293) so as to be positioned below the lower end of the game effect unit 4. ing. The substrate unit 54 is a unit in which a plurality of substrate boxes for storing various control substrates are integrated as a unit. The plurality of board boxes include a payout control board box 55, a terminal board box 56, a power board box 62, and the like. These various board boxes are stacked by disposing a payout control board box 55 and a terminal board box 56 behind the power supply board box 62. Note that the payout control board box 55, the terminal board box 56, the power board box 62, and the like do not need to be replaced when the game effect unit 4 is replaced. Therefore, these control board boxes are integrated as a board unit 54 separated from the game effect unit 4 and arranged on the back surface of the main body frame 3. Therefore, since the space in the depth direction of the game effect unit 4 is not obstructed by the plurality of board boxes, the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged in the depth direction. In addition to this, the game effect unit 4 and the board unit 54 can be efficiently arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the appearance is organized. If the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually troublesome, even if an unauthorized board such as a hanging board is attached, it becomes difficult for hall personnel to notice it. In this respect, if the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually arranged, it is easy to detect even if there is an illegal act as described above, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the illegal act.

  In addition, as will be described later, when the game effect unit 4 is stored and installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the main control board provided on the game effect unit 4 side and the board provided on the board unit 54, the main control board. Electrical connection with a board that needs to be connected to the board is automatically performed by the above-described drawer connectors 2000 and 2002. Thereby, after the game effect unit 4 is stored and installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, it is not necessary to perform an electrical connection work from behind the pachinko machine 1, and work efficiency is improved.

  A unitized launching device 57 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 40 (see FIG. 14) located below the substrate unit 54 described above. Further, a back cover 58 is provided at the rear opening 70 formed along the rear end of the aforementioned peripheral wall 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. The back cover (transparent cover body) 58 covers the game effect control unit 99 housed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 so as to be visible from the rear. The back cover 58 is attached to close the rear opening 70. In this state, as shown in FIG. 5, the vertical surface is substantially the same as the rear end portion of the tank rail member 51 that protrudes most rearward of the pachinko machine 1.

  That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the first main body frame side wall portion of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is inward from the rear end portion (circumferential wall 293) (in FIG. 4). And a rear wall (first rear wall) extending in the right direction. And the back cover support cylinder part 280 for pivotally supporting the said back cover 58 so that opening and closing is possible is provided in the outer surface of the rear wall part of a 1st main body frame side wall part. In this way, the rear end portion of the peripheral wall 293 is purposely bent to provide the rear wall portion, thereby pressing the depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30 in which the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated. Without this, the back cover 58 can be attached to the rear wall.

  A locking device 60 is fixed to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3. The locking device 60 is a so-called W lock that locks both the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of door frame hooks 973 and cylinder locks 868 (both see FIG. 1) are provided so as to protrude from the locking device 60 toward the front of the main body frame 3. The details will be described later.

  In summary, as shown in FIG. 18, the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has the following assembly structure as a whole. That is, a tank mounting groove 202 is formed on the back surface side of the main body frame 3 on a vertical surface connecting the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291, and the prize ball tank 50 is played by the tank mounting groove 202. It is attached above the production unit installation recess 30. A rail locking groove 203 is formed along the opening edge of the rear opening 70, and the tank rail member 51 is attached along the upper rear wall 295 by the rail locking groove 203. In addition, the ball passage unit 52 is attached to the lower side of the tank rail member 51 by a passage unit attachment boss 204 formed on the back side of the shaft support side rear wall 296. In addition, in a ball dispenser installation area 205 formed below the tank rail member 51, a ball dispenser 53 is installed adjacent to the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the ball supply passage 59 is attached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to the ball supply passage installation portion 206 corresponding to the pivot support side bottom wall of the game effect unit installation recess 30.

  Further, the launching device 57 is attached to the inside of the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 40 by the launching device mounting boss 208 projecting rearward at the lower part of the rear side of the open side of the main body frame 3. Further, the board unit 54 in which the payout control board box 55, the terminal board box 56, the power board box 62, the board tray 64, and the like are integrated into one unit is attached to the mounting holes 207 provided on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 32. And fastened from the back side. A back cover support cylinder 280 is formed on the back side of the open side rear wall 294, and the back cover 58 is pivotally supported by the back cover support cylinder 280 so that the rear opening 70 can be closed. .

  As shown in the figure, in the main body frame 3 having such a structure, the game effect unit installation recess 30 is formed as a large capacity space, and the bottom wall portion of the game effect unit installation recess 30 is substantially flush. Therefore, it is easy to install the game effect unit 4 having a box-like appearance with a large depth in the game effect unit installation recess 30 as will be described later. Furthermore, since the game effect unit 4 having a box-like appearance substantially the same as the space shape of the game effect unit installation recess 30 can be closely installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 with no gap, Wobble and fraud are appropriately prevented. Below, the various members assembled | attached to the main body frame 3 are demonstrated further in detail separately.

<Tank rail member>
The tank rail member 51 disposed below the prize ball tank 50 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank, tank rail member, ball path unit, ball payout device, and ball supply path, as viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 20 is a perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the prize ball tank, the tank rail member, the ball passage unit, the ball dispensing device, and the ball supply passage.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the tank rail member 51 is formed in the shape of an inclined bowl having an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 1404 of the prize ball tank 50, and the lower surface of the downstream end is described in detail later. It faces the ball passage unit 52 to be described. In addition, the tank rail member 51 has two passages 1412 through which the game balls flow down in two rows by a partition wall. Note that the bottom surface of the passage 1412 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll together with the game ball fall downward from the narrow groove.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 1413 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 51 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 1413 hangs down into the two passages 1412 of the tank rail member 51, and when the game balls flowing down the passages 1412 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction, the ball leveling member 1413 The rectification is as follows. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 51 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 1413 is covered with a ball pressing plate 1414. The ball holding plate 1414 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the game ball that has not been made one stage by the ball leveling member 1413 is forced to one stage.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 1416 (corresponding to the above-described order supply device 51a) are rotatably supported by shaft pins 1417 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 51 so as to face the respective passages 1412. The alignment gear 1416 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 1417 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 1416 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the game balls flowing down the passages 1412 of the tank rail member 51 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 1416, the game balls of the two rows of passages 1412 are alternately sent one by one. Will be. The alignment gear 1416 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 1415 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
A ball path unit 52 for guiding the game balls dropped from the tank rail member 51 in a line to the ball payout device 53 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a front sectional view of the ball passage unit.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the ball passage unit 52 is provided along the vertical direction (height direction) so as to bypass the accommodation space of the game effect unit 4 formed in the main body frame 3 on the back surface. In this spherical passage unit 52, a spherical drop passage (height direction passage) 1422 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 1421 bent on the back surface of the substantially rectangular plate material (the surface seen from the back surface is called the front surface). The ball drop passage 1422 has a front / rear bent passage portion 1422a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction as viewed from the back), and a left / right direction (left / right direction as viewed from the rear) communicating with the front / rear bent passage portion 1422a. The left and right bent passage portions 1422b are bent to the left and right and the right and left bent passage portions 1422b are connected to the right and left bent passage portions 1422b, and the vertical passage portions 1422c are substantially vertical. Further, a cutout portion 1423 is formed in one bent passage wall 1421 constituting the vertical passage portion 1422c, and a ball breakage detecting piece 1424 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 1425 is swingably attached to the cutout portion 1423. ing. A ball break switch 1426 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 1424, and an actuator 1427 of the ball break switch 1426 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 1424.

  Thus, when a game ball is present in the vertical passage portion 1422c, the ball break detection piece 1424 is pressed by the game ball present in the vertical passage portion 1422c, and the actuator 1427 is pushed to turn on the ball break switch 1426. On the other hand, when there is no game ball in the vertical passage portion 1422c due to clogging or lack of balls, the ball break detection piece 1424 swings into the vertical passage portion 1422c, and the actuator 1427 turns the ball break switch 1426 OFF. To do. When the ball cut switch 1426 is turned OFF, the rotation of a payout motor of a ball payout device 53, which will be described later, is stopped and the payout of the winning ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 1428 is formed at the lower end of the notch portion 1423 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detecting piece 1424 to the opposite side of the passage portion. A ball clogging insertion groove 1429 is formed in the vertical passage portion 1422 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 1424. In this ball clogging insertion groove 1429, when it is difficult to swing the ball breakage detecting piece 1424 due to ball clogging or the like, a pin is inserted from the rear side of the ball dispensing device 53 to block the ball breakage detecting piece 1424. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 1421 facing the broken piece detection piece 1424 is formed in a slightly bulging shape toward the broken piece detection piece 1424 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 1422c, the ball break detection piece 1424 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 1426.

<Ball delivery device>
Next, the ball payout device 53 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball passage unit 52 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the ball dispensing device. FIG. 23 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as the payout member.

  The ball dispensing device 53 includes a unit base body 1451 in which a bent passage 1453 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 1452, a unit sub plate 1475 that covers the rear surface of the unit base body 1451, and an upper surface of the unit sub plate 1475 ( A relay board 1480 attached to the rear surface side, and gear groups 1493, 1494, 1497 and a gear cover 1510 covering the detection disk 1500 provided in a substantially central surface region (rear surface side region) of the unit sub-plate 1475. . Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 1451 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 1475 side. A bent passage 1453 is formed by the wall 1452. The bent passage wall 1452 protrudes from the center of the upper portion of the unit base body 1451 to the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 1451 from the downstream end to the downstream end. Further, a portion where the middle bent passage wall 1452 is largely divided into left and right forms a sorting space 1455 in which a sprocket 1457 as a sorting member is disposed. A passage partition wall 1459 is formed to project from the lower portion of the distribution space 1455 to the left and right ends of the unit base body 1451 so as to form a pair of left and right bent passage walls 1452. That is, the right and left bent passage wall 1452 and the passage partition wall 1459 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 1455, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 1460, The other passage forms a ball passage 1461. The passage partition wall 1459 is also largely divided on the left and right sides, and a motor storage space 1464 for storing the payout motor 1465 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 1459.

  Further, in the distribution space 1455, a sprocket 1457 as a payout member in which a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits is formed is rotatably arranged. A bearing cylinder 1456 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotating shaft 1458 to which the 1457 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 1455. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 1459 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 1455 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 1457, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 1460 formed on one side thereof A payout ball detection sensor 1462 is detachably mounted. The payout ball detection sensor 1462 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes at the tip, and an attachment portion that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by a bent passage wall 1452. Thus, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 1462 is connected to a relay board 1480 described later.

  A circular motor storage space 1464 for storing the payout motor 1465 is formed below the unit base body 1451 and between the prize ball passage 1460 and the ball removal passage 1461. This motor storage space 1464 is formed. The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 1465 is accommodated inside. Then, in a state where the payout motor 1465 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 1491 of the unit sub-plate 1475, the motor shaft 1468 of the payout motor 1465 passes through the shaft insertion hole formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 1491 and passes through the first gear. 1493 is fixed. Further, the unit base body 1451 is provided with a guide protrusion 1469 for guiding the game ball, which has been extracted at the lowermost end of the ball extraction path 1461, to the back side of the ball dispensing device 53, and is guided to the guide protrusion 1469. The spheres thus guided are guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 415 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a recovery basket provided below the island platform).

  Further, the unit sub-plate 1475 has a payout motor 1465 attached to a synthetic resin plate covering the bent passage 1453 portion, the distribution space 1455 portion, and the prize ball passage 1460 portion of the unit base body 1451 and the ball passage 1461. It is comprised by attaching the aluminum heat sink 1491 which covers a downstream part. A relay board region 1476 for attaching the relay board 1480 is formed on the top side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 1475, and a plurality of gears 1493, 1494, 1497 and detection are formed below the relay board area 1476. A gear region 1490 to which the disk 1500 is attached is formed.

  Further, the relay board 1480 relays the wiring from the payout ball detection sensor 1462, the payout motor 1465, and the sensor 1505 described later, and the wiring from the payout control board 720 (see FIG. 84) described later. Therefore, the relay board 1480 is provided with a plurality of connectors 1481 and is covered with the board cover 1485.

  In addition, the substrate cover 1485 is formed in a box shape with a substantially square front side open, and a button opening 1488 and a connection opening 1489 are formed in the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 1485. In the state where the substrate cover 1485 is covered, the head of the detachable button 1472 slightly faces the outside from the button opening 1488. In addition, the wiring connected to the relay substrate 1480 is drawn out from the connection opening 1489 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 1493, 1494, 1497 provided in the gear region 1490 and the detection disk 1500 will be described. As described above, the first gear 1493 is fixed to the tip of the motor shaft 1468 of the dispensing motor 1465. Above the first gear 1493, a second gear 1494 that meshes with the first gear 1493 is rotatably provided on the shaft 1495. Above the second gear 1494, a third gear 1497 that meshes with the second gear 1494 is rotatably provided on the shaft 1498. Further, above the third gear 1497, a detection disk 1500 having a gear portion 1502 that meshes with the third gear 1497 is rotatably provided on a rotating shaft 1458 that supports the sprocket 1457. The sprocket 1457 and the detection disk 1500 are configured to rotate integrally around the rotation shaft 1458. Therefore, when the payout motor 1465 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 1457 via the first gear 1493, the second gear 1494, the third gear 1497, and the gear portion 1502 of the detection disk 1500.

  The outer circumference of the detection disk 1500 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 1502, and the outer circumferential portion protruding outward from the gear portion 1502 has the same number as the concave portions of the sprocket 1457 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 1501 are formed. This detection notch 1501 is detected by a light emitting / receiving sensor 1505 provided on a sensor substrate 1504 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 1507 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 1475. The sensor 1505 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 1457 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 1501 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 1505 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 1457), the sprocket 1457 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). It is. Note that the number of game balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 1462 provided in the prize ball passage 1460 and used for counting.

  Although the configuration of the ball payout device 53 has been described above, in the state where the unit base body 1451, the unit sub-plate 1475, the relay board 1480, the board cover 1485, and the gear cover 1510 are assembled, a game ball to be paid out is guided. A cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 1465 is positioned below the bent passage 1453 so as to be accommodated. In addition, the payout motor 1465 and the sprocket 1457 are coupled so as to be rotationally driven by a plurality of gears 1493, 1494, 1497, 1500 (1502) provided in the gear region 1490 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 1475. . Therefore, unlike the conventional one in which the depth width dimension from the upper side to the lower side of the ball payout device 53 is made substantially constant and the payout motor protrudes to the front side, rear surface side or side side of the ball payout device as in the prior art. It can be set as the structure where any part of 53 does not protrude toward back further.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, a seal 53 a is affixed to the back surface of the ball payout device 53 so as to conceal the screw fixing portion of the screw used for assembling the ball payout device 53. . In recent years, a gaming machine has a complicated back surface structure due to an increase in the size of a liquid crystal display or the like, and it is necessary to consider the maintainability of workers such as hall personnel. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, maintainability is improved by arranging a series of payout passages on the back of the gaming machine. However, when the maintainability is improved, troubles such as disassembling precision parts unintentionally by the operator are likely to occur. For this reason, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such troubles in the ball dispensing device 53, the balls used for assembling the ball dispensing device 53 are concealed by the seal 53a, and the ball dispensing device 53 is used unless the seal 53a is peeled off. Can not be disassembled. That is, by providing the seal 53a, the operator's intention to work is clearly confirmed, and unintentional removal and disassembly are preferably prevented. Further, by printing the characters “disassembly prohibited” on the seal 53a, the operator's attention can be urged and the intention of the operation can be confirmed more clearly. In addition, as long as it confirms the work intention, it is possible to provide not only the seal 53a but also a cover member that covers the screw. It is also effective to color the seal 53a with yellow and black, which are generally known as colors that call attention.

<Sphere supply passage>
The sphere supply passage (depth direction passage) 59 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball dispensing device 53 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing the flow of the game ball in the ball supply passage. FIG. 25 is a plan view for explaining the operation of the full tank rocking plate.

  The ball supply passage 59 includes a box main body 1521 that is formed in a box shape having an upper surface opened and extending in a substantially horizontal direction with a thickness of one game ball, and a lid body 1541 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 1521. The overall shape is flat. The ball supply passage 59 is provided along the bottom surface of the game effect unit 4 when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The box main body 1521 is configured such that a game ball flowing in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 1460 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the ball outlet 1536. For this reason, a side guide passage 1522 that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the prize ball entrance 1542 formed in the lid 1541 to the side from one end toward the other end is formed by the partition wall 1526 in the upstream portion. . A side guide receiving portion 1523 formed in a concave arc shape is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 1522 immediately below the prize ball entrance 1542 so as to guide the game ball toward the side. A buffer member 1524 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of the passage 1522 to receive the impact of the game ball flowing through the side guide passage 1522 and guide it to the downstream side.

  In addition, the game ball that collides with the buffer member 1524 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 1522 is changed in direction to the downstream side, and then the side wall of the side guide passage 1522 is formed by the inclined side wall 1527 formed on the downstream side. It is induced to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere. That is, the reverse side guide passage 1525 is formed by the partition wall 1526 and the inclined side wall 1527. The game ball that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 1525 is then guided to the front guide passage 1535 that is formed forward, and the above-described dish unit 300 is formed from the ball outlet 1536 that is formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 1535. To the storage section 361.

  Incidentally, a switch housing space 1528 is formed at one end portion of the reverse side guide passage 1525 on the downstream side of the buffer member 1524 so as to protrude outward. A full swing plate 1531 through which a support shaft 1529 is inserted is swingably provided at a lower front position of the switch storage space 1528. The full tank swinging plate 1531 is formed in a plate shape so as to form one end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 1525, a shaft hole is formed in the lower end of the plate shape, and a detection piece 1532 is integrally formed on the back surface thereof. Is formed. The detection piece 1532 is formed by vertically projecting a rear end portion of a fan-like connection plate connected to the back surface of the full tank swinging plate 1531. The projected detection piece 1532 is a projection that will be described in detail later. The ON / OFF state of the full tank switch 730 is detected by shielding or conducting between the light projector and the light receiver of the light receiving type full tank switch 730. The lid 1541 is provided with a switch mounting portion 1543 for mounting a full light switch 730 of a light projecting / receiving type at a position corresponding to the switch storage space 528.

  A shaft spring 1530 is also inserted into the support pin 1529, one end of the shaft spring 1530 is locked to the back surface of the full tank swing plate 1531, and the other end is erected on the rear side of the support pin 1529. By being locked by the spring locking pin 1549, the upper end portion of the full rocking plate 1531 is always urged toward the reverse side guide passage 1525. However, two stopper pieces 1534 are formed in the upper part of the switch storage space 1528 at the downstream extension position of the other end side wall of the side guide passage 1522 and the rear position thereof. Therefore, the upper end portion of the full tank swing plate 1531 only swings around the support shaft pin 1529 between the two stopper pieces 1534. Note that a wiring drawing recess 1547 for drawing the wiring from the full switch 730 to the outside is formed in the rear portion of the upper side wall of the switch storage space 1528.

  Further, a foul ball passage 1537 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 1525. The foul ball passage 1537 is bent so that the upstream foul ball inlet 1538 communicates with a communication port 473 (foul ball guide passage 473a), which will be described later, and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 1535. Has been. For this reason, the foul sphere taken into the foul port 489 (see FIG. 26) and dropped into the communication port 473 is guided to the front guide passage 1535 through the foul sphere passage 1537 bent from the foul sphere inlet 1538 and further to the ball outlet. 1536 is returned to the reservoir 361 of the dish unit 300.

  In the ball supply path 59 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 24, the game balls paid out from the prize ball path 1460 of the ball payout device 53 are upstream from the prize ball entrance 1542 to the side guide path 1522. Enters the side, is guided toward the side different from the direction of the ball outlet 1536 by the side guide receiving portion 1523, and collides with the buffer member 1524. The game ball that has collided with the buffer member 1524 hits the inclined side wall 1527 as it is toward the downstream side with its momentum weakened, and is guided in the reverse side guide passage 1525 in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 1522. It is guided to the front guide passage 1535 and is guided from the ball outlet 1536 of the front guide passage 1535 to the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul sphere entrance 1538 is also weakened by the bent foul sphere passage 1537 and joined to the front guide passage 1535, and from the ball outlet 1536 of the front guide passage 1535, the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300. Led to.

  As described above, when the game ball naturally flows in the ball supply passage 59, when the game ball moves from the side guide passage 1522 to the reverse side guide passage 1525 as shown in FIG. In addition, the ball hits the buffer member 1524 and is reflected toward the substantially central position of the inclined side wall 1527, so that the game ball hardly hits the full tank swing plate 1531. For this reason, the upper end of the full rocking plate 1531 is in contact with the front stopper piece 1534 by the biasing force of the shaft spring 1530, so that the detection piece 1532 is It is in a state (OFF) where the switch does not conduct due to entering the light receiver. On the other hand, when the winning ball is stored in the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 and the game ball is also filled in the ball supply passage 59, as shown in FIG. Due to the pressure of the game ball stored in the direction guide passage 1525, the full swinging plate 1531 swings in the clockwise direction against the urging force of the shaft spring 1530 and comes into contact with the subsequent stopper piece 1534. Become. In this state, the detection piece 1532 is removed from between the light projector and the light receiver of the full tank switch 730 of the light projecting / receiving method, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 730 is turned ON, the rotational driving of the payout motor 1465 of the ball payout device 53 stops (if an ON signal is derived while paying out a predetermined number of prize balls, the predetermined number of prize balls Will be stopped after paying out). Even when game balls are stored in the front guide passage 1535 and the reverse side guide passage 1525, the bottom of the foul ball passage 1537 has a very strong inclination, so the stored game balls are stored in the foul ball passage 1537. , And does not flow backward from the foul bulb inlet 1538.

  As described above, since the sphere supply passage 59 according to the present embodiment is detachably attached to the sphere supply passage installation portion 206 of the main body frame 3, the sphere supply passage is formed in the main body frame as in the past. It is not necessary to form a ball supply passage in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the payout passage.

  Further, since the ball payout device 53 is provided in the immediate vicinity of the ball supply passage 59, it is sent out to the ball supply passage 59, and the game ball can be paid out at an appropriate payout speed by the flat ball supply passage 59. In addition, by providing the ball payout device 53 in the immediate vicinity of the upstream of the ball supply passage 59, supply of the game ball to the ball supply passage 59 can be realized in a form that weakens the momentum of the game ball as much as possible.

  Further, since the ball supply passage 59 is formed in a box shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, the game balls sent to the ball supply passage 59 are scattered in the ball supply passage 59 and paid out to the storage unit 361. Can do. In other words, the conventional gaming machine has delivered a large amount of game balls in a straight line, but in the present embodiment, the ball supply passage 59 weakens the force of the balls to provide a slow payout speed. At the same time, the game balls are paid out so as to be scattered including the collision of the game balls in the ball supply passage 59. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a feeling of pitching or a feeling of paying out according to such a payout mode, thereby giving a sense of bliss when winning a winning ball at the time of a big hit. In addition, the game ball paid out from the prize ball passage 1460 of the ball payout device 53 is guided to a side different from the direction of the ball exit 1536 by the side guide receiving portion 1523, and once to the buffer member 1524. Since it is made to collide, it becomes possible to control the speed of the game ball after it collides with the buffer member 1524 to a substantially constant speed by its natural drop force. Further, by making the inside of the ball supply passage 59 into a zigzag-shaped passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the game balls paid out from the prize ball passage 1460 of the ball payout device 53. The awarded ball does not jump out of the storage unit 361.

  In addition, since the full rocking plate 1531 for operating the full tank switch 730 is provided at a position below the flow lower end of the side guide passage 1522 that is not affected by the flow of the normal game ball, The award ball payout is not stopped due to a full tank, and the award ball payout can be reliably stopped only when the tank is full.

  Furthermore, the ball supply passage 59 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the foul ball passage 1537 for guiding the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 1535 for delivering the prize ball, reducing the momentum of the ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

<Mechanism for foul ball discharge>
Here, a mechanism relating to foul ball discharge formed by the main body frame 3 and the game effect unit 4 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is an enlarged front view centering on the joint portion of the main body frame and the game effect unit, in which (A) is a diagram showing an injection mode of a game ball in the ball guide passage, and (B) is a ball guide passage. It is a figure which shows the backflow aspect of the game ball in.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the game ball supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 38 in response to the operation of the handle unit 318 by the player is directed toward the launch guide path 29 by the reciprocating motion of the hitting basket 57a of the launch device 57. And injected. When the game ball is guided by the launch guide path 29 and reaches the game area 20, the game ball is inserted from the ball insertion port 28 and flows down the game area 20.

  First, as shown in FIG. 26A, the game ball ejected by the launching device 57 slides on the launch rail 38 by its urging force and radiates into the launch guide path 29 from the upper end of the launch rail 38. Is done. Here, the launch rail 38 is slightly curved upward so that the inclination gradually increases from the opening side of the pachinko machine 1 toward the shaft support side. Further, the pachinko machine is configured such that the launch rail 38 and the connection passage portion 477 are connected by the rail connection member 44 to the upper surface portion 44 a of the rail connection member 44 that closes the gap between the launch rail 38 and the connection passage portion 477. 1 is provided with a gradually rising gradient from the open side to the shaft support side. A portion of the rail connection member 44 connected to the firing rail 38 is lower than the upper end portion of the firing rail 38.

  With such a structure, the game ball released from the upper end of the launch rail 38 does not contact the rail connection member 44 and the connection passage portion 477, and the inner side surface (rail surface 472a) of the outer rail 472 in the launch guide path 29. Is directly reachable. The game ball that has reached the outer rail 472 flows so as to rise in the launch guide path 29 while being guided by the rail surface 472a of the outer rail 472. On the other hand, since the urging force with respect to the game ball is small, the game ball may stall before reaching the outer rail 472, and the game ball may fall on the connection passage portion 477. In this case, the rail connection member 44 prevents the game ball from spilling downward from the gap between the connection passage portion 477 and the launch rail 38, and the game ball is returned to the launch position of the launch rail 38 as described later. It is.

  In the game effect unit 4, the gap between the outer rail 472 and the connection passage portion 477 functions as an opening (foul port 489) that can communicate with the communication port 473 and into which a game ball can drop. Then, the foul ball that has been discharged from the upper end of the firing rail 38 and flows backward into the foul port 489 enters the communication port 473 and is discharged to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 as will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), the game ball ejected by the launching device 57 stalls before reaching the game area 20 and flows backward in the launch guide path 29 (that is, flows downward). ) At this time, the game ball that flows backward in the launch guide path 29 flows downward while being guided by the rail surface 472a of the outer rail 472, and reaches the lower end 472b of the outer rail 472. From the upper end portion on the support side, it abuts against a stop wall portion 477b provided continuously (in the lower part) inside the foul port 489 and falls (falls) into the foul port 489. Then, the game ball dropped into the foul port 489 enters toward the communication port 473 or is guided to the communication port 473 along the stop wall portion 477b of the connection passage portion 477.

  Here, the communication port 473 is formed with a foul ball guiding path 473a which is a flow path of a game ball formed so as to penetrate the game effect unit 4 in the front-rear direction along the lower edge of the communication port 473. Yes. The foul ball guiding path 473a is inclined downward from the front to the rear of the game effect unit 4, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 1538 of the above-described ball supply passage 59 on the most downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball. ing. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the communication port 473 rolls on the foul ball guide path 473a and is guided to the back side of the game effect unit 4, and further rolls in the ball supply passage 59 to store the dish unit 300. It is discharged to the part 361.

  On the other hand, when the momentum of the game ball flowing backward through the launch guide path 29 is large, the game ball may jump over the foul port 489 and reach the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477. At this time, the game ball rolls further toward the open side while being guided by the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477 inclined downward toward the open side. Then, after rolling while decelerating on the upper surface portion 44a of the rail connection member 44 having a gentle inclination, the firing rail 38 is flowed back to return to the firing position.

  In the state where the game effect unit 4 is installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the player opens the communication port 473 through the game window 101. Is visible. Therefore, the player can visually check the manner in which the game ball flowing backward in the launch guide path 29 enters the communication port 473.

  By the way, conventionally, the foul mouth is provided in the main body frame below the game board, and almost all of the foul balls are collected from the foul mouth. In other words, even a foul ball that has failed to reach the outer rail is recovered from the foul mouth. Therefore, the foul ball that reaches the outer rail and is not visually recognized by the player does not know what is happening from the player side, and there is a possibility that launch adjustment may be difficult. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the foul ball on the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477 is returned to the firing rail 38 side. In other words, the foul ball that has failed to reach the outer rail 472 is returned to the firing position. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

  Further, since the foul port 489 is provided in the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the front component member 680 described later), the game balls that run backward on the outer rail 472 can be quickly collected. In addition, the foul ball flowing down from the lower end 472 b of the outer rail 472 is dropped into the foul port 489 by the stop wall portion 477 b of the connection passage portion 477. Thereby, the game balls that run backward on the outer rail 472 can be reliably collected.

  A communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is provided for discharging the foul ball dropped into the foul port 489 to the back side of the game effect unit 4 (specifically, a front constituent member 680 described later). As described above, the communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is provided in the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the front constituent member 680 described later), so that the foul ball is discharged at a relatively high position. For example, it becomes easy to return the foul ball to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 on the front side.

  Conventionally, in a configuration having two upper and lower storage dishes on the front side, the game balls collected from the foul mouth are returned to the lower storage dish (lower dish). In this case, it is necessary for the player himself to return the foul ball of the lower plate to the upper storage plate (upper plate), and since the number of foul balls increases particularly during the launch adjustment, there is a possibility that the interest is lowered. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the foul balls discharged from the foul ball guiding path 473a are joined to a ball supply passage 59 that is a flow path of a prize ball discharged from the ball payout device 53. That is, the foul ball is returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 from which the game ball at the time of winning a prize is paid out. This eliminates the need for the player himself to return the foul ball to the upper plate, and can reduce the decrease in interest caused by the foul ball during launch adjustment.

  In particular, since the communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is formed above the ball supply passage 59 provided in the lower part of the main body frame 3, the game effect unit 4 (details will be described in the front component described later) 680), the foul ball discharged to the back side is guided to the ball supply passage 59 without any delay. As a result, the time required for the foul ball to return to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 becomes relatively short.

  Further, the inner rail 462 is arranged in parallel with the outer rail 472, and a launch guide path 29 reaching the ball insertion port 28 is formed. As a result, the foul sphere that does not reach the ball insertion port 28 flows downward along the launch guide path 29, so that the trajectory of the foul sphere flowing down from the lower end 472b of the outer rail 472 can be stabilized, and the connection passage portion The foul ball can be almost surely dropped into the foul mouth 489 by the stop wall portion 477b of 477.

  Here, in the present embodiment, almost the entire area of the launch guide path 29 is visible from the front side through the game window 101 (see FIG. 39). Therefore, the behavior of the foul ball that does not reach the ball insertion port 28 is known, and the launch adjustment is further facilitated. Here, conventionally, in the configuration in which the main body frame is provided with the foul port, the foul ball that does not reach the ball insertion port is received and collected by the foul port. Therefore, if the number of foul balls increases at the time of launch adjustment, the number of game balls returned to the storage tray increases, and there is a problem that launch adjustment is difficult. In this regard, in this embodiment, the foul sphere that has passed the foul port 489 to the launch guide path 29 is received by the foul port 489, while the foul sphere that has not passed the foul port 489 and has not reached the launch guide path 29 is , Returned to the launch position. That is, only the visually recognized foul sphere is received and collected by the foul mouth 489, and the foul sphere not visually recognized is returned to the firing position. In this way, even if the number of foul balls increases during launch adjustment, the number of game balls returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 can be relatively small. In addition, a foul ball that is not visually recognized can be re-shot from the launch position, so that launch adjustment is relatively easy.

  By the way, a foul port 489 is provided in the game effect unit 4 (specifically, a front component member 680 described later) adjacent to the lower end portion 472b of the outer rail 472. On the other hand, the firing rail 38 is provided in the main body frame 3. Therefore, if the launch rail 38 is made long enough to reach the game effect unit 4, the game effect unit 4 housed in the main body frame 3 (the front component member 680 that is a part of the game effect unit 4) may be interfered.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, an “alignment portion” composed of the rail connection member 44 and the connection passage portion 477 is provided. This “alignment portion” is interposed between the foul port 489 and the firing rail 38 to form a series from the outer rail 472 to the firing rail 38. If such a “matching portion” (rail connection member 44 and connection passage portion 477) is interposed, it is not necessary to lengthen the launch rail 38, and the launch rail 38 and the game effect unit 4 (the front component member 680) The problem of interference can be solved. Thereby, even if it is the structure which provides the foul mouth 489 in the game production | presentation unit 4 (front structural member 680), attachment of the firing rail 38 becomes easy.

  And the upper surface part of the above-mentioned "alignment part" is comprised by the inclined surface which inclines to the firing rail 38 side, and the foul ball | bowl of the said inclined surface is returned to the firing rail 38 side. That is, the foul ball is returned to the predetermined launch position by the upper surface portion of the “alignment portion”. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

  Here, in the configuration in which the foul ball of the “alignment portion” is returned to the firing rail 38 side, the upper surface of the end portion on the firing rail 38 side of the “alignment portion” is flush with the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. Arrangement is also possible. However, the upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” may be higher than the end rail surface of the firing rail 38 due to, for example, an attachment error of the firing rail 38. If the upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” becomes slightly high, the launched game ball comes into contact with the “alignment portion”. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the upper end surface of the upper surface portion of the “alignment portion” that is close to the firing rail 38 side is disposed below the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. Even if there is an attachment error, the upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” does not become higher than the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. That is, the launched game ball is prevented from coming into contact with the rail connection member 44.

  In addition, since the above-mentioned “matching portion” includes the connection passage portion 477 (corresponding to the guide portion) of the game effect unit 4 and the rail connection member 44 (corresponding to the step portion) of the main body frame 3, the game effect unit 4 is In the configuration accommodated in the main body frame 3, it is only necessary to consider the alignment between the connection passage portion 477 and the rail connection member 44, and interference of the rail portions (the launch rail 38 and the outer rail 472) can be avoided. In particular, since the rail connection member 44 is integrally formed on the front surface portion of the main body frame 3, unlike the configuration in which the rail connection member 44 is attached separately, an attachment error of the rail connection member 44 itself does not occur. Yes. Further, the firing rail 38 is attached to the main body frame 3 so as to maintain a predetermined positional relationship with the rail connection member 44. Since the rail connection member 44 is integrally formed on the front surface portion of the main body frame 3 as described above, the firing rail 38 can be appropriately attached to the main body frame 3.

  In the configuration in which the foul ball of the “alignment portion” is returned to the rail connection member 44 side, the upper end surface of the connection passage portion 477 on the rail connection member 44 side is flush with the upper end surface of the rail connection member 44. It is also possible to arrange it above. However, the upper surface of the end portion of the rail connection member 44 may be higher than the upper surface of the end portion of the connection passage portion 477 due to, for example, an accommodation error of the game effect unit 4. And if the end part upper surface of the rail connection member 44 becomes high, it will become difficult to return a foul ball | bowl from the connection channel | path part 477 to the firing rail 38 side. In this respect, in the present embodiment, in a state where the game effect unit 4 is housed in the main body frame 3, the upper end surface of the upper surface portion of the rail connection member 44 that is close to the connection passage portion 477 side is the connection passage portion 477. It is arrange | positioned below the edge part upper surface of the upper surface part. Thereby, for example, even if there is an accommodation error of the game effect unit 4, the upper end surface of the rail connection member 44 does not become higher than the upper end surface of the connection passage portion 477. The foul ball quickly returns to the firing position via the rail connection member 44.

  By the way, in recent years, game areas tend to be expanded with the increase in size of liquid crystal displays and the like. Accordingly, the guide path of the game ball from the launching device to the ball slot in the game area is also long. This guide path is composed of a rail member. However, if the rail member becomes longer, the frictional force received from the rail member becomes larger, and the disturbance factor becomes larger. There is.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, a connection passage portion 477 that forms a foul port 489 is provided between the lower end portion 472 b of the outer rail 472. Furthermore, a rail connection member 44 interposed between the connection passage portion 477 and the firing rail 38 is provided in the main body frame 3. Then, the game ball launched from the launch position and guided to the launch rail 38 directly reaches the outer rail 472 through the connection passage portion 477 and the rail connection member 44. That is, it is guided to the ball slot 28 only by the launch rail 38 and the outer rail 472. By providing such a rail connection member 44, the launch rail 38 can be further shortened, the frictional force generated in the game ball can be further suppressed, and the disturbance factor is also relatively small, so that the ball Flying can be stabilized.

  And the upper surface part 44a of the rail connection member 44 is also comprised by the inclined surface which inclines to the firing rail 38 side, and the foul ball | bowl of the said inclined surface is returned to the firing rail 38 side. That is, the foul ball is returned to the predetermined launch position by the upper surface portion 44a of the rail connection member 44. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

  By the way, the foul port 489 is formed not in the main body frame 3 side but in the game effect unit 4, so that the main body frame 3 can be prevented from being damaged or broken due to the discharge of the foul ball. Even if the game effect unit 4 is damaged or broken due to the discharge of the foul ball, the foul ball can be appropriately discharged if only the game effect unit 4 is replaced. There is an advantage that recycling and maintenance of the production unit 4 is easy.

  Further, as described above, both the foul ball and the prize ball are discharged to the storage unit 361 of the common dish unit 300 through the ball supply passage 59 which is one path. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a return path for foul balls and a payout path for prize balls as in the prior art, and the structure of the main body frame 3 is simplified. And since the discharge path of the foul ball and prize ball provided in the main body frame 3 is made common, it is possible to secure the game effect unit installation recess 30 as a large accommodation space without narrowing the game effect unit installation recess 30. Is possible.

<Game production unit installation recess>
Next, the configuration of the game effect unit installation recess 30 will be further described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. As shown in FIG. 16, the game effect unit installation recess 30 has a front-facing saddle face portion that does not accommodate the game effect unit 4 on a part of the upper side and the open side, and Although nothing is formed, door hook holes 352 through which the door frame hook portion 973 of the locking device 60 penetrates are formed in the upper side, the lower side, and the lower side on the open side. That is, the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the open side flange portion (see FIG. 4).

  Thus, as described above, the game effect unit installation recess 30 includes the first peripheral wall 290, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293, so that the left and right sides of the main body frame 3 It is formed in a concave shape in which the rear part of the side and the upper side is surrounded. Here, the first peripheral wall 290 surrounds the game effect unit installation recess 30 from the inner surface on the pivot side, the upper surface of the upper side, the inner surface of the open side, and the inner surface of the lower side toward the rear. It is arranged so that. The second peripheral wall 291 extends rearward from the first peripheral wall 290, the third peripheral wall 292 extends rearward from the second peripheral wall 291, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is the first peripheral wall 293. Extending rearward from the three peripheral walls 292. Thus, the main body frame 3 is integrally formed in a square cylinder shape. However, only the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 are extended from the inner surface of the lower side portion, and the substrate unit 54 is disposed in the vicinity of the rear of the second peripheral wall 291. .

  The first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed to extend straight back from the upper side (main body frame upper wall part) and the side on the pivot side (second main body frame side wall part) with a step. On the other hand, the side on the open side (first body frame side wall) is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 5) that inclines inwardly from the first peripheral wall 290 toward the fourth peripheral wall 293. Has been. In addition, the inwardly inclined shape from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side toward the fourth peripheral wall 293 can be smoothly opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. It is to make it. That is, when the first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 on the open side are formed to extend straight rearward, the fourth peripheral wall 293 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. In order to avoid this, there is a possibility that the rearmost end portion of the frame abuts against the inner surface of the side frame plate of the outer frame 2 and cannot be opened smoothly. The locking device 60 is attached along the first circumferential wall 290 on the open side. The locking device 60 is attached using a lock mounting hole (not shown) provided in the rear end side of the first circumferential wall 290. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole (not shown), it is preferable to form the fourth peripheral wall 293 from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side in an inclined step shape. Furthermore, since the inner peripheral surface of the first peripheral wall 290 and the outer peripheral surface of the game effect unit 4 need to be brought into contact with each other, the step between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 is formed with a somewhat large step. However, the dimension of the step between the second peripheral wall 291 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 is a very small step.

  However, if the first main body frame side wall is unnecessarily large and inclined toward the fourth peripheral wall 293 from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side, the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30 described above In particular, it is difficult to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the maximum lateral width L3 on the back side. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the portion on which the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the front side of the outer frame 2 is an opening / closing axis O, the first main body frame side wall portion has the opening / closing axis O. The center point is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise along the virtual circular arc C drawn on the horizontal plane (see FIG. 5). That is, in this case, the first main body frame side wall is inclined inwardly by a minimum width so as not to adversely affect the opening operation of the main body frame 3 by colliding with the outer frame 2. As a result, it is possible to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the maximum lateral width L 3 on the back side.

  In addition, since the first main body frame side wall portion is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise, the strength of the main body frame 3 as a constituent component is simpler than when it is simply formed linearly in the inner direction. Can be suitably secured. Moreover, each of the second main body frame side wall and the main body frame upper wall formed integrally with the first main body frame side wall also has its own meat each time the first main body frame side wall is bent. Since it is provided to extend backward while being bent inward by the thickness, the strength as the thin peripheral wall 290 to 293 can be efficiently secured. Further, since the second main body frame side wall portion and the main body frame upper wall portion are bent inward only by their substantially wall thickness, the game effect unit installation concave portion 30 becomes uselessly small. There is no end to it.

  In this embodiment, the first main body frame side wall is approximately 0.98 times the distance L11 (see FIG. 49) from the axial point of the opening / closing axis O to the front surface of the side frame plate 13. It is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise along a circular arc of a virtual circle having a radial distance. However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, a thickness portion 13b having a thickness of approximately 19 mm is formed at the rear end portion of the side frame plate 13. For this reason, when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the first main body frame side wall portion particularly has a rear end portion (thickness portion 13 b) more than the front end portion of the outer frame 2. Colliding with each other can adversely affect its opening action. Therefore, in this embodiment, for the first main body frame side wall, the radial distance is approximately 0.99 times the distance L12 (see FIG. 49) from the axis of the opening / closing axis O to the thickness portion 13b. It is provided so as to extend backward while being bent stepwise along the arc of the virtual circle. As described above, the first main body extends along the arc of the virtual circle having a radial distance sufficient to increase the magnification with respect to the distance from the axial point of the opening / closing axis O to the rear end portion of the side frame plate 13. By providing the frame side wall portion, it is possible to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the maximum lateral width L 3 on the back side, compared to the case where the radial distance is adjusted to the conventional front end portion. It becomes like this. That is, in other words, the gaming effect unit installation recess 30 is provided by providing the thick portion 13b having a thickness of approximately 19 mm not at the front end portion of the side frame plate 13 but at the rear end portion thereof. A distance of approximately 44 cm can be ensured as the volume of this, particularly the maximum lateral width L3 on the back side.

  The peripheral walls 290 to 293 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, as shown in FIG. 15, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first peripheral wall 290 corresponds to a thickness that can cover the side of the game panel 409, and is formed by the remaining second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293. The rearward protruding portions of various game devices as the game effect unit 4 are stored in the space to be played. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as described below, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed up to a position corresponding to the outer periphery of the game panel 409. The size of the space is secured. Thereby, for example, even when an effect display device 115 or the like that occupies most of the game panel 409 as a game board is attached, the display device control board box 119 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. The rearward projecting portion (see FIG. 13 etc.) can be easily stored. In addition, the peripheral wall 290-293 concerning this embodiment is formed so that it may extend from the rear surface of the said outer frame 2 to about 63 mm back.

  Further, from the rear end side of the fourth peripheral wall 293, specifically, from the open side, the upper side, and the side of the shaft support side, the open side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the shaft support side rear wall 296 are respectively provided. It extends toward the inside. The “open side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and / or the pivot support side rear wall 296” corresponds to the “rear wall portion” of the present invention.

  The shaft support side rear wall 296 has a flat front surface, and the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53 are detachably attached to the rear surface along the shaft support side rear wall 296. ing. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the shaft support side rear wall 296 to have a width for attaching the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53.

  The upper rear wall 295 has a flat front surface, and the tank rail member 51 is attached to the rear surface. The tank rail member 51 is inclined so that a game ball can flow down, and the lower end side of the upper rear wall 295 is formed in an inclined shape along the tank rail member 51. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 295 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 51 attached in an inclined manner.

  Further, the open-side rear wall 294 has a flat front surface, and a rear cover support cylinder portion (attachment member) 280 that pivotally supports the rear cover 58 is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the open-side rear wall 294 to have a width dimension that forms the back cover support cylinder 280.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the shaft-supporting rear wall 296 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed in a flat plate shape. . In addition, as described above, the size of the space formed by the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is secured up to a position corresponding to the outer periphery of the game panel 409. Therefore, for example, even when an effect display device 115 or the like that occupies most of the game panel 409 as a game board is attached, the display device control board box 119 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115 is used. The rear protruding portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the pivot support-side rear wall 296 form a rear opening 70, and the rear opening 70 is closed by a back cover 58 (see FIG. 4) so as to be opened and closed. It has become so.

<Board unit>
Next, the board unit 54 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the back side. FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the substrate unit 54 is attached to a plurality of attachment holes 207 (see FIG. 18) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and a substrate tray 64 formed of synthetic resin. In addition, various boards such as a door relay board 68, a power board board 62, a terminal board box 56, a payout control board box 55, a main drawer relay board 648, and a sub drawer relay board 649 are attached. Among the above boards, the door relay board 68, the power board box 62, the terminal board box 56, and the payout control board box 55 are attached to the rear side of the board tray 64 in the front-rear direction, and are attached to the main drawer relay board 648. The auxiliary drawer relay board 649 is attached to the front side in the board tray 64. A shield plate is attached to the rear surface of the payout control board box 55 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board 648 and the sub drawer relay board 649 are attached to the board cover 641. Covered and attached.

  First, the substrate tray 64 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, and a wiring opening 642 is formed on one side of the rear surface side thereof. For the relay substrate for attaching the door relay substrate 68 inside the wiring opening 642. A recess is formed. At both the left and right sides and the lower side of the substrate tray 64, mounting pieces 643 for mounting the substrate unit 54 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward, and the mounting pieces 643 are attached to the mounting holes 207 (see FIG. 18), the board unit 54 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. A wiring hooking piece 644 for locking the wiring is formed outside the side wall on the other end side of the substrate tray 64.

  Further, an out-sphere passage 645 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the substrate tray 64. The out ball passage 645 is formed broadly so as to correspond to the above-described out port 471, the downstream side of the ball removal connection passage 415, and the drop port (not shown), and the downstream side discharges the game balls in a row. It is formed so as to be narrow. Therefore, when the substrate unit 54 is attached to the main body frame 3, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 645 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion (not shown) that supports the lower surface of the out port 471. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball-out ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 645 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (generally, an island recovery basket).

  Next, the main drawer relay board 648 and the sub drawer relay board 649 attached to the front side of the board tray 64 will be described.

  Here, the main drawer relay board 648 is provided with a frame side main drawer connector 2000b and a payout control board connector 2010 on the top and bottom. Among these, the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is connected to the unit side main drawer connector 2000a (see FIG. 13) attached to the back side of the game effect control unit 99, whereby the main control device (main control board 710). , See FIG. 84). That is, the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) according to this embodiment is supplied with power via the payout control device (payout control board 720, see FIG. 84) on the main body frame 3 side. The frame-side main drawer connector 2000b is electrically connected to the payout control board connector 2010 by an in-board wiring (not shown) of the main drawer relay board 648. Then, the payout control board connector 2010 is connected to an internal connection terminal (not shown) of the payout control board (the payout control board 720, see FIG. 84) by a wire harness (not shown). The power supply line for the control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) is formed. In this embodiment, the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the payout control board connector 2010 include the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) and the payout control device (payout control board 720, FIG. 84)).

  On the other hand, the sub drawer relay board 649 is provided with a frame side sub drawer connector 2002b and a door frame connector 2012 on the top and bottom. Among these, the frame side auxiliary drawer connector 2002b is connected to the unit side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a (see FIG. 13) attached to the back side of the game effect control unit 99, so that the effect control device (peripheral control board 810, This is a portion for forming an information transmission / reception line for a frame decoration relay terminal board 240 described later (see FIG. 85). In other words, the frame side sub drawer connector 2002b is electrically connected to the door frame connector 2012 by the in-board wiring (not shown) of the sub drawer relay board 649, and the door frame connector 2012 is connected to the door frame connector 2012. By connecting the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 with a wire harness (not shown), an information transmission / reception line for the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 described later of the effect control device (peripheral control board 810, see FIG. 85) is formed. Will be. As a result, the production control device can control the driving of the speakers 144a and 144b, the operation buttons 327, the frame decoration lamp 842, and the like through the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240.

  Although the configuration of the board unit 54 has been described above, in the case of the present embodiment, among various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the board unit 54 is replaced with a change in the game effect unit 4. Door relay board 68 which is a board other than the game control board and display device control board, power board 395 (see FIG. 84) housed in power board box 62, and external terminal board 753 (see FIG. 84) housed in terminal board box 56. The payout control board 720 (see FIG. 84) housed in the payout control board box 55 is assembled into the board tray 64 in advance to form a unit. Then, by simply attaching the unitized substrate unit 54 to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3, the work efficiency can be improved as compared with various types of board attaching work separately attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 conventionally. Can be improved. Further, in this case, since the wiring between the boards unitized in the board unit 54 can be accommodated in the board tray 64, the wiring connecting the boards is not messed up and disturbed and laid in order. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the main drawer relay board 648 having the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b and the sub-drawer relay board 649 having the frame-side sub drawer connector 2002b are provided on the front surface of the board unit 54. Then, when the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game effect control unit 99) is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side, the unit side main of the unit relay board 625 provided on the back side of the game effect control unit 99 is provided. The drawer connector 2000a and the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a are connected to the corresponding frame side main drawer connector 2000b and frame side sub drawer connector 2002b, respectively. Therefore, the mounting of the game effect control unit 99 and the connection between the boards can be performed at the same time, and the replacement work of the game effect control unit 99 can be performed efficiently.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 16, the game panel 409 includes one game including the main control device (game control device). The effect control unit 99 is configured to be accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 from the front receiving port 30a. In this respect, in this pachinko machine 1, in this embodiment, first, the box-shaped substrate holder (peripheral control substrate box 24, main control substrate box 25, display device control substrate box 119, etc.) is used. When the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, at least one inner wall of the pair of main body frame side wall portions and the main body frame upper wall portion (inner wall of the peripheral wall 290 to 293) To be in contact with a part of

  Then, as shown in FIG. 53, a flange portion FG is formed on the periphery of the substrate holder, and a screw hole (not shown) provided at the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface of the panel holder 540 is formed. The board holder is attached to the large game board member provided with the game panel 409 by screwing the flange portion FG in between. Furthermore, when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, a power line for the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) is connected to the game on the main body frame 3 side. The main drawer connector (unit side) shared with the information transfer line with the payout control device via the payout control device (the payout control board 720, see FIG. 84) attached below the effect unit installation recess 30. The main control device (game control device) and the payout control device are electrically connected by the main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b). Further, of the main drawer connectors, the unit side main drawer connector 2000a provided on the game effect control unit 99 side is fixed so as to face rearward at a position where the flange portion FG on the lower peripheral edge of the substrate holder is provided. The frame-side main drawer connector 2000b provided on the main body frame 3 side of the main drawer connector is fixedly arranged so as to face the front at the lowermost part of the game effect unit installation recess 30. Yes.

  In such a configuration, due to the contact between the substrate holder and the inner wall of the main body frame 3, the game effect control unit 99 is properly accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30 while being guided to its accommodation location. It becomes like this. Then, the power supply line to the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) is connected to the payout control device via the payout control device (payout control board 720, see FIG. 84) on the main body frame 3 side. When securing the main side drawer connector 2000a (unit side main drawer connector 2000a and frame side main drawer connector 2000b) shared with the information transfer line with the apparatus, the lower peripheral edge of the substrate holder The frame side main drawer connector 2000b is fixedly arranged so as to face the front at the lowermost part of the game effect unit installation recess 30 at the place where the flange portion FG is provided. It was. Accordingly, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b are automatically connected only by housing the game effect control unit 99 in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. Thus, after the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the power supply line to the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) is connected by an appropriate connector, etc. It becomes possible to omit manual work.

  In addition, in the above configuration, the flange portion FG that is screwed to the periphery of the box-shaped substrate holder and the mounting hole 540j (see FIG. 58) that is a screw hole provided on the rear surface of the panel holder 540. And the unit side main drawer connector 2000a is provided at a place where the flange portion FG is formed. That is, as described above, a structure in which a light-emitting effect is produced from the rear side by attaching a box-shaped back unit 510 having a predetermined depth to a large-sized game board member (game board part) having a transparent board-like game panel 409. The adopted game effect control unit 99 requires a space in which various control boards are arranged in the depth direction. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the unit side main drawer connector 2000a is provided in the flange portion FG of the substrate holder, the connector 2000a can be disposed in a compact manner, and the various control boards are disposed. Even if a design change occurs in the space in the depth direction, it is not necessary to change the position of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a provided in the flange portion FG, and consequently the position of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b. Is also suitably maintained.

  For convenience of explanation, although not shown in the drawings, in this embodiment, a wire harness (not shown) provided so that the unit side main drawer connector 2000a enters the board holder from the flange portion FG. And a drawer connector (not shown) in the holder that is connected to the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) as a free end on the opposite side of the wire harness. Therefore, even if the arrangement and design of the main control device are changed, the position of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a provided in the flange portion FG can be suitably maintained. Still further, the main control device (see the main control board 710, FIG. 84) and the payout control are provided by being connected to a wire harness provided so as to enter the board holder from the flange portion FG. As shown in FIG. 53, the signal line (wire harness) used for exchanging information with the apparatus (payout control board 720, see FIG. 84) is connected to the board holder (peripheral control board box 24, main control). It becomes possible to suitably protect against fraud in the board box 25).

  In this embodiment, the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface of the panel holder 540 is provided with a plurality of screw holes (mounting holes 540j) more than necessary for mounting the substrate holder. Thereby, even if a change occurs in the design on the board holder side, the configuration of the large game board member (game board part) can be suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, on the main body frame 3 side, as shown in FIG. 28 together with FIG. 16, only the upper portion of the main frame frame connector 2000b where the main frame drawer connector 2000b is fixed is arranged. A main drawer relay board 648 is provided so as to protrude from the lower part of the back surface (the lower part of the main body frame 3) to the game effect unit installation recess (large accommodation space) 30. The position where the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is fixedly arranged is the position where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a is positioned when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. Yes. The frame-side main drawer connector 2000b and the in-board wiring (not shown) are provided on the lower side of the main drawer relay board 648 on the same surface as the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b. Since the electrically connected dispensing control board (main drawer connector in frame) connector 2010 is fixedly arranged, the arrangement and design of the dispensing control device (dispensing control board 720, see FIG. 84) have changed. However, the position of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b can be suitably maintained. Furthermore, since the payout control board connector 2010 is fixedly disposed between the main drawer relay board 648 and the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main control device and the payout control device are connected to each other. A signal line (wire harness) used for information exchange between the main drawer relay board 648 and the lower part of the main body frame 3 can be suitably protected from fraudulent acts. become.

  Incidentally, the structure and the mounting position of such a unit side main drawer connector 2000a can be applied to the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a. That is, the unit-side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a is also fixedly disposed so as to face rearward at a location where the flange portion FG is provided on the lower periphery of the substrate holder, and enters the substrate holder from the flange portion FG. Is connected to a wire harness (not shown). In addition, on the opposite side of this wire harness, a drawer connector (not shown) in the holder that is a free end and is connected to the effect control device is formed.

  Similarly, in the sub-drawer relay board 649, only the upper part of the sub-drawer relay board 649 where the frame-side sub drawer connector 2002b is fixedly arranged is the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame 3 (the lower side of the main body frame 3). The game effect unit installation recess (large accommodation space) 30 protrudes from the portion). The position where the frame side auxiliary drawer connector 2002b is fixedly arranged is the position where the unit side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a is located when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. ing.

<Drawer connector>
Next, a drawer connector used for electrical connection between the main body frame 3 and the game effect control unit 99 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a main drawer connector and a sub drawer connector.

  As described above, unit-side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a are provided on the game effect control unit 99 side, and frame-side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b are provided on the main body frame 3 side. A pair of drawer connectors composed of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is the main drawer connector 2000. A pair of drawer connectors constituted by the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a and the frame side sub drawer connector 2002b is the sub drawer connector 2002.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the game effect control unit 99 side is electrically connected by inserting unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a into the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b on the main body frame 3 side. can do. The unit-side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a include terminals 2001a and 2003a as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 29C, the frame-side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b include contacts 2001b and 2003b. When the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a are inserted into the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b, as shown in FIG. 29C, the terminals 2001a and 2003a push down the contacts 2001b and 2003b, and the contacts 2001b and 2003b are displaced. To do. The repulsive force of the contacts 2001b and 2003b generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 2001a and 2003a.

  As a result, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002 are formed with control signal lines for transmitting various control signals between the various control boards (for example, by the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720). Further, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002 are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 395. As described above, by attaching the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a and the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b (that is, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002). The control signal line and the voltage supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 2001a and 2003a and the contacts 2001b and 2003b are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Moreover, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 2001a and 2003a and the contacts 2001b and 2003b. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of the game production unit 4 is ensured.

  Here, when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch turned on, the contact between the terminal 2001a and the contact 2001b, specifically, for various voltage supply lines Since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contact, welding occurs. If the game effect unit 4 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 3 to be attached in this welded state, the contact 2001b is bent and broken, or when the game effect unit 4 is removed from the main body frame 3, the contact 2001b The drawer connector 2000a cannot be used because it is peeled off and damaged from the drawer connector 2000a.

  Further, when the terminal 2001a and the contact 2001b are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding (hot line failure prevention circuit 2100) is provided on the main control board 710, which will be described in detail later.

<Locking device>
Next, the locking device 60 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 to 38. FIG. 30 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device and the main body frame. FIG. 31 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a structure for latching the locking device to the main body frame. FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine. FIG. 33 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a detailed relationship between the locking device and the first peripheral wall and the second peripheral wall of the main body frame. FIG. 34 is a side view (A) of the locking device, and a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side. FIG. 35 is a perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, and a perspective view of a sliding frame for a door frame and a sliding frame for a body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. (B), (C). FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device. FIG. 37 is a front view for explaining the operation of the door frame sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod. FIG. 38 is a front view for explaining the operation of the fraud prevention member.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the locking device 60 is attached from the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and has a U-shaped base 685. . The U-shaped base 685 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) locks formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the outer peripheral side of the main body frame 3 and the rising portion of the first peripheral wall 290. A locking hole 351, a lock mounting hole 350 formed by being cut out in the upper part and middle of the vertical surface of the first peripheral wall 290, and a lock mounting hole 353 formed in the vicinity of the upper part of the cylinder lock through hole 354 , Supported and fixed by. Hereinafter, the structure of the locking device 60 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 37, the locking device 60 includes a U-shaped base 685 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 685. The sliding frame 971, the body frame sliding rod 984 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 685, and the body frame sliding rod 984 cannot be slid. Fraud prevention members 882 and 890 attached to the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685.

  The U-shaped base 685 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 971 and a body frame sliding rod 984 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device integrated on an L-shaped base. This is to increase the space surrounded by the peripheral walls 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 by increasing the size of the game effect unit 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction. That is, in order to increase the size of the game effect unit 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction, it is necessary to extremely reduce the dimension between the first peripheral wall 290 and the outer periphery of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the width of the locking device 60 according to this embodiment is formed to be small so that the locking device 60 can be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 685 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 685 is completely covered except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014. That is, since the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are accommodated in the U-shaped base 685, the door frame 5 can be opened even when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 cannot be directly touched. This makes it possible to provide a highly secure pachinko machine.

  The U-shaped base 685 is provided with a rectangular hook through opening 860 through which the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 are penetrated on the upper and lower sides opposite to the open side. Further, a screw fixing portion 861 is projected in the horizontal direction on the upper side and the middle of the side surface 685b (see FIG. 36) which is opposite to the open side and is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290. Further, locking protrusions 862 are formed to project from the upper and middle portions of the side surface 685a (see FIG. 36) that do not adhere to the first circumferential wall 290 on the open side and the lower ends of the both side surfaces 685a and 685b on the open side. ing. Screw fixing portions 861 and locking protrusions 862 are for attaching the locking device 60 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. When the locking projection 862 is inserted into the lock locking hole 351 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward (see FIG. 31), the screw fixing portion 861 and the lock mounting hole 350 match in this state, so that the matching hole The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown). Note that the locking device 60 is attached not only by the upper and middle screw fixing portions 861 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing holes 898 formed in the lock mounting pieces 866 described later and the cylinder lock through holes 354 above. The lower part of the locking device 60 can also be attached by fixing the lock attaching hole 353 to be fixed with a screw (not shown).

  That is, in this embodiment, the predetermined portion of the portion (first peripheral wall 290) disposed opposite to the inner wall of the outer wall portion 12a (see FIG. 10) described later in the first main body frame side wall portion includes the above-described portion. An insertion hole 290a (see FIG. 30) into which a screw stopper 861 as an attachment member of the locking device 60 provided between the outer wall 12a and the inner wall is inserted is formed. Of the thin wall exposed by forming the insertion hole 290a in the first peripheral wall 290, the portion to be screwed with a screw (screw) (not shown) is thicker than 3 mm. The lock attachment hole 350 is previously formed in the front-rear direction in the thick portion. Accordingly, in the state where the screw fixing portion 861 is inserted into the insertion hole 290a of the first peripheral wall 290, a screw is screwed from the screw fixing portion 861 to the lock mounting hole 350. In this embodiment, the locking device 60 is attached to the first peripheral wall 290 with screws having a diameter of approximately 3 mm including the peak and a length of approximately 12 mm.

  Further, at the time of the mounting, the locking projections 862 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are inserted into the locking holes 351 to be positioned and locked. Thereafter, screw fixing portions 861 formed at two positions on the upper side opposite to the opening side (rear portion) of the U-shaped substrate 685 and screw fixing formed on the opening side (front portion) of the U-shaped substrate 685. In this structure, the hole 898 is fixed to the lock mounting hole 350 with a screw. Therefore, the front portion of the locking device 60 is locked by the locking projection 862 and the lock locking hole 351, the rear portion of the locking device 60 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 861 and the lock mounting hole 350, and the locking device 60 Is fixed by the screw fixing hole 898 and the lock mounting hole 353, the locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure. In other words, even when the locking device 60 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 685 having a very small width, the locking device 60 is fixed to the main body by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 60. It can be firmly fixed to the frame 3. In particular, in the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 862 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion is formed so as to protrude from the side surface 685a that is not in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. The screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. Therefore, the locking device 60 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290.

  In addition, insertion holes 863 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 685a and 685b of the U-shaped base 685. Then, by inserting the rivet 864 into the insertion hole 863 and crimping the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 in the U-shaped substrate 685, the inside of the U-shaped substrate 685. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be slidably attached. In other words, one rivet slot 974 is formed at each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 971, and one is formed on each of the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding rod 984. By passing the rivet 864 through the rivet slots 989 and 996, the door frame sliding rod 971 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 984 can move downward. ing. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the rivet 864 penetrates the lower end of the rivet slot 989, 996 of the main body frame sliding rod 984, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 864 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 974 of the sliding rod 971.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 865 is formed in the lower part of the U-shaped base 685 on the side opposite to the open side. Further, a lock attaching piece 866 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 is provided projecting toward the side at the front end portion of the side face 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the main body frame 3 on the open side. Further, an insertion vertical opening 878, a spring locking piece 879, and a relief lateral hole 880 are formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 865 is configured such that a stopper piece 885 of a first fraud prevention member 882 described later moves forward and backward, which will be described later. In addition, the lock attachment piece 866 is provided on the side surface 685b of the U-shaped base 685 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game effect unit installation recess 30 in a state where the lock device 60 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It projects from the front end toward the side. The lock attaching piece 866 has a lock insertion hole 867 through which the cylinder lock 868 passes, and two attachment holes 871 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 with screws 870. Screw fixing holes 898 for attaching the lower part of the device 60 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed. The insertion vertical opening 878 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 874 and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 fixed to the cylinder lock 868 enter when the cylinder lock 868 rotates. The spring locking piece 879 is for locking the spring 894 provided on the tamper-proof members 882 and 890, and the clearance lateral hole 880 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 893. It is. This point will be described later.

  Next, the cylinder lock 868 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 866 will be described. The cylinder lock 868 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock mounting substrate 869, and a lock shaft 872 of the cylinder lock body protrudes from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 869. The engagement cam 873 is fixed by screws 876. The cylinder lock 868 can be locked and unlocked from the front side of the door frame 5 by the cylindrical portion passing through the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 2, 3, 14 and the like). Further, the cylinder lock 868 is disposed on the lower end side of the game effect unit 4 (more specifically, below the dish unit 300).

  The engagement cam 873 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 874 that engages with the downward engagement hole 997 of the body frame sliding rod 984 when rotating, and the other end. The side is a second engagement protrusion 875 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 when rotating. The cylinder lock 868 configured as described above has a mounting hole (not indicated) and a lock formed in two places on the lock mounting substrate 869 by inserting the cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 867. The U-shaped base 685 can be fixed by aligning the mounting hole 871 of the mounting piece 866 with the screw 870 and screwing it.

  Next, fraud prevention members 882 and 890 attached to the U-shaped base 685 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 882 and 890 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 984 from being lowered illegally by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 868 with an official key. . Accordingly, the tamper-proof members 882 and 890 have a structure in which the first tamper-proof member 882 and the second tamper-proof member 890 are connected by the connecting pin 893. The first fraud prevention member 882 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is configured to be swingable about a swing shaft hole 883 at the upper end. This first fraud prevention member 882 has a swing shaft hole 883 at the lowermost of the insertion hole 863 and the rivet 864 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984. It is fixed by being attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 685 described above by the insertion hole 863 and the rivet 864.

  The first fraud prevention member 882 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 884 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 878 on the plate-like surface, and a second engaging protruding piece 875 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 884. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 875 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 884 and the insertion vertical opening 878, the upward engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside the U-shaped base 685 The second engaging protrusion 875 is engaged. In addition, an outer line obliquely above the opening position of the projecting piece insertion hole 884 of the first fraud prevention member 882 is an inclined portion 882a. The inclined portion 882a is in contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 874 when the engaging cam 873 is rotated. When the engaging cam 873 is rotated, the inclined portion 882a and the inclined portion 882a. , The first fraud prevention member 882 swings about the swing shaft hole 883 (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 37B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 882 is provided with a stopper piece 885 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 884, and a restriction protruding piece 889 is provided below the stopper piece 885. A pin hole 887 and a connecting hole 888 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 889. The stopper piece 885 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 865 and the engagement notch 1017 of the body frame sliding rod 984 when the body frame sliding rod 984 is locked. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. In addition, the restricting protrusion 889 is connected to the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 by a spring 894, but when the spring 894 is connected, the biasing direction of the second fraud prevention member 890 is The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 887 is used to fix the guide pin 886. When the guide pin 886 is fixed to the pin hole 887 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 882, the guide pin 886 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 878. The first tamper-proof member 882 is guided along the side surface 685b of the U-shaped base 685 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the base. Further, the connection hole 888 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 882 and the second tamper-proof member 890 with a connection pin 893.

  The second tamper-proof member 890 connected to the first tamper-proof member 882 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 892 is formed at an upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 896 is formed, and a contact portion 897 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 892 is for matching with the connection hole 888 of the first fraud prevention member 882 and connecting with the connection pin 893, and the spring locking hole 896 is a spring locking piece with a U-shaped base 685 at one end. The other end of the spring 894 locked to 879 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 897 abuts on the closing protrusion 23 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 will be described later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 685 will be described. The door frame sliding rod 971 is composed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 973 project integrally and forwardly at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side of the door frame. Has been. The door frame hook portion 973 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base 685, and when the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3. It protrudes forward from a door hook hole 352 (see FIG. 14) formed on the door and engages with an engagement opening 175 (see FIG. 39) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 973 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 973 and the engagement opening 175 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 971. Can be released.

  Also, a vertically long rivet hole 974 into which the rivet 864 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 971. The uppermost rivet for the rivet long hole 974 A guide protrusion 976 projects from the elongated hole 974 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 971. The rivet long hole 974 is a hole through which the rivet 864 inserted into the insertion hole 863 of the U-shaped base 685 passes, and the rivet 864 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 971. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 864 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 974. The guide protrusion 976 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 991, 999 formed in the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding bar 984, and the door frame sliding bar 986 The sliding movement of 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 is guided.

  A spring hook portion 980 is formed at the upper end of the door frame sliding rod 971. One end of the spring 982 is locked to the spring hook portion 980, and the other end of the spring 982 is the main frame sliding rod. The spring hook portion 993 formed on the upper hook member 985 of 984 is locked. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 971 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 984 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 971, a contact elastic piece 981 is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 981 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding bar 971 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 685 so that the door frame is internally used. This prevents the sliding rod 971 from rattling. Furthermore, a vertically long play hole 978 and a rising engagement hole 979 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 971. When the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 978 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 874 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 979 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 971 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. In addition, an escape notch 983 that is a notch larger in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 865 is formed at the lower rear side of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 971. The escape notch 983 is formed so as not to obstruct the stopper piece 885 of the first tamper-proof member 882 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 865 and the engagement notch 1017.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 984 includes a metal plate upper hook member 985, a metal plate lower hook member 986, a connecting wire rod 987 connecting the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 984 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 having the hook portions 988 and 1014 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 987. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 685.

  By the way, the upper hook member 985 has a hook portion 988 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet slot 989 and a projecting piece moving hole 991 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 993 and a connecting hole 994 are formed at the lower end portion of the vertical side, and contact portions 1015 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 988 penetrates the hook penetration opening 860 above the U-shaped base 685 and engages with the closing protrusion 22 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 989 corresponds to the rivet slot 974 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 971. In a normal state where the rivet 864 is penetrated through the rivet slot 989, The rivet 864 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 989. Thereby, the upper hook member 985 can move downward. In the protruding piece moving hole 991, the guide protruding piece 976 above the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted as described above, and the door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. As described above, the spring hook portion 993 is engaged with the other end of the spring 982. The connecting hole 994 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 987. Further, when the abutting portion 1015 is housed in the U-shaped base 685, the abutting portion 1015 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 685, and the sliding operation of the upper hook member 985 is smoothly performed without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 986 is provided with a hook portion 1014 projecting rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper side to the lower side of the plate surface portion with a long rivet hole 996, a lowering engagement hole 997, and a play hole 998. One moving hole 999 is sequentially formed. Further, a connecting hole 995 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1017 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and contact portions 1016 are formed at the upper and lower sides. The hook portion 1014 penetrates the hook penetration opening 860 below the U-shaped base 685 and engages with a closing projection 23 provided at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 996 corresponds to the rivet slot 974 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 971. In a normal state where the rivet 864 is penetrated through the rivet slot 996, The rivet 864 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 996. Thereby, the lower hook member 986 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 997 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 984 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 998 has a distal end portion of the second engagement protrusion 875 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 976 below the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 999, so that the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are connected to each other. It is designed to guide the movement. The connecting hole 995 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 987. Further, when the abutting portion 1016 is housed in the U-shaped base 685, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 685, and the sliding operation of the lower hook member 986 is smoothly performed without rattling. It is for doing so.

  By adopting such a structure as the locking device 60 and the above-described mounting structure for the first peripheral wall 290, the outer wall of the first body frame side wall (first peripheral wall 290), The locking device 60 can be disposed in a space having a distance of approximately 18 mm from the inner wall of the side frame plate 13, whereby the volume of the above-described game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the above. 49 cm can be secured as the maximum lateral width L1 of the front receiving port 30a.

  As mentioned above, although each member which comprises the locking device 60 was demonstrated, the method of assembling this locking device 60 is as follows. First, the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 are connected by a connecting wire rod 987. In this state, the guide protrusion 976 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 991, 999 of the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986, and the rivet long hole 974 and the rivet The long holes 989 and 996 are aligned and overlapped. Then, in the state of being overlapped, the hook portion 988 of the upper hook member 985 and the hook portion 1014 of the lower hook member 986 are passed through the hook penetration opening 860 of the U-shaped base 685, and the door frame sliding rod 971. The main body frame sliding rod 984 is inserted into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 685. Thereafter, the rivet 864 is inserted from the insertion hole 863. At this time, the rivet 864 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 989, 996 and 974. However, when the lowermost rivet 864 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 864 also into the swinging shaft hole 883 of the first fraud prevention member 882 and attach the first fraud prevention member 882 to the U-shaped base 685 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 882 to the U-shaped base 685, the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 are connected by the connection pin 893, and the guide pin 886 is illustrated in the pin hole 887. The guide pin 886 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 878.

  With the rivet 864, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 685, and the spring 982 is spanned between the spring hook portions 980 and 993. The sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are biased in opposite directions. Further, the spring 894 is stretched over the spring locking pieces 879 and 594 so that the second fraud prevention member 890 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 889. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 868 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 867 of the lock attachment piece 866, and the cylinder lock 868 is fixed to the attachment hole 871 with the screw 870. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 878 outside the inclined portion 882a, and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted. The cylinder lock 868 is attached to the lock attachment piece 866 so that the tip end portion thereof is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 884 and the insertion vertical opening 877 of the first fraud prevention member 882.

  In order to attach the locking device 60 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is formed on the main body frame 3 as described above. While being inserted into the hook hole 352, the locking projection 862 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the lock locking hole 351 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. Then, the screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 that protrude in the horizontal direction in that state are aligned with the lock mounting hole 350, and a screw (not shown) is screwed into the aligned hole, as shown in FIG. The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, the locking protrusion 862 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to project from the side surface 685a that does not adhere to the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685, while the rear portion The screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 that constitute the fixing structure are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 685b that is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. Therefore, the locking device 60 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290.

  By the way, the effect | action of the locking device 60 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 37 and FIG.

  First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hooks 988 and 1014 of the body frame sliding rod 984 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 and the engagement opening 175 of the door frame 5 are locked. ing. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 868 and the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 878, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement protrusion 874 engages with the lower engagement hole 997 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 to push down the lower hook member 986 against the urging force of the spring 982. Further, the connecting wire rod 987 and the upper hook member 985 connected thereto are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, the locking state between the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 is released, and the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. Can be opened to the outer frame 2. When closing the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 is forcibly pressed against the outer frame 2. At this time, the hook portions 988 and 1014 are in a state of being lifted by the urging force of the spring 982 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 37A), but the upper sides of the hook portions 988 and 1014 are directed outward. And tilted down. Therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 988 and 1014 come into contact with the lower end portions of the closing projections 22 and 23, and the main body frame sliding rod 984. Descends downward. Finally, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 988 and 1014 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are locked again, and the main body frame sliding rod 984 rises to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 868 and rotated in a direction in which the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 enters the insertion vertical opening 878, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the second engagement protrusion 875 engages with the ascending engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971, and pushes up and lifts the door frame sliding rod 971 upward against the urging force of the spring 982. . For this reason, since the engagement state between the engagement opening 175 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is released, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. Can be opened to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3. At this time, the door frame hook portion 973 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 982 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 37A), but the lower side of the door frame hook portion 973 is outside. Inclining up towards Therefore, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 973 comes into contact with the upper end portion of the engagement opening 175, and the door frame sliding rod 971 is Ascend upward. Finally, the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 973 and the engagement opening 175 are locked again, and the door frame sliding rod 971 is lowered to return to the locked state.

  Note that the door frame sliding rod 971 in the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base 685, and the U-shaped base 685 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. It is attached over the entire length. In addition, since the door frame hook portion 973 that is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 971, the door frame 5 and the main body Locking of the entire length of the frame 3 in the longitudinal direction is reliably performed. Therefore, there is also an advantage that it is not possible to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from there.

  As described above, the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 868 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the sliding rod 984 for the main body frame without lowering the key without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 868 may be performed. Can not do such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism including a first fraud prevention member 882 and a second fraud prevention member 890, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 685. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are housed in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 38A, the closing projection 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 897 of the second fraud prevention member 890 are in contact with each other. It has become a state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 882 rotates counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 894 so that the stopper piece 885 enters the tamper-proof notch 865 and the stopper piece 885 is tamper-proof notch. It is in a state of being engaged with an engagement notch 1017 formed in the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 at a position corresponding to 865. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 984 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 885 and the engagement notch portion 1017 are engaged. It is not possible to perform an illegal act of pulling down and opening the body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 868, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 873 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 874 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 878. When the first engagement protrusion 874 is rotated, the inclined portion 882a of the first fraud prevention member 882 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 874 are in contact with each other. The stopper piece 885 starts to rotate from the tamper-proof cutout 865 so as to start rotating in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around the 883. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 885 and the engagement notch 1017 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 890 is in a position where the spring 894 is extended and the contact portion 897 is retracted. When the engagement cam 873 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 874 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 874 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 997 of the lower hook member 986. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 984 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 988 and 1014 and the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 890 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 889, so the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 890 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 897 of the second fraud prevention member 890 come into contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. . For this reason, the 1st fraud prevention member 882 and the 2nd fraud prevention member 890 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 984 from being illegally performed. This is because if the body frame sliding rod 984 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 971 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. This is because it is extremely difficult to do. Thus, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 984.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 882 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, even if the locking function of the locking mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in this embodiment, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside is provided. The main body frame sliding rod 984 is housed in a closed space of the U-shaped base 685 except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014, and is completely covered. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted and the main body frame sliding rod 984 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 685 is to be pulled down, both side surfaces 685a and 685b of the U-shaped base 685 can Since entry into the enclosed space is prevented, cheating cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 685 which is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device integrated in the L-shaped base. A sliding rod 971 and a body frame sliding rod 984 are slidably provided, and the cylinder lock 868 for operating the locking device 60 is attached to the U-shaped base 685 at the lower end side of the game effect unit 4. It was set as the position which becomes lower than. Thereby, the storage space of the game effect unit 4 (particularly the game panel 409) is not obstructed by the cylinder lock 868, and the size of the game effect unit 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction can be extremely increased. Therefore, even if the space surrounded by the peripheral walls 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the locking device 60 can be firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside and the main body The frame sliding rod 984 is completely covered with the U-shaped base 685 except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014. Accordingly, it is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a main body frame sliding rod 984 provided by inserting a piano wire or the like. Further, when the locking device 60 is attached, the locking projections 862 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are inserted into the lock locking holes 351 and positioned and locked. The screw fixing portions 861 and the screw fixing holes 898 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides opposite to the open side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 350 with screws. Therefore, the front portion of the locking device 60 is locked by the locking protrusion 862 and the lock locking hole 351, and the rear portion of the locking device 60 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 861, the screw locking hole 898, and the lock mounting hole 350. The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In the above-described embodiment, the screw fixing hole 898 formed in the lock mounting piece 866 and the cylinder lock through hole 354 of the main body frame 3 are formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 866 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685. However, instead of this, a screw 870 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 to the lock attachment piece 866 is used, and the tip of the screw 870 penetrates the lock attachment piece 866. Alternatively, a structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 354. Further, the locking device 60 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685 is not screwed, or only by fixing the screw fixing portion 861 at the rear portion of the locking device 60 and the lock mounting hole 350. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 685 having the left and right side surfaces 685a and 685b. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 685a that is not in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 is attached. L-shaped base body (lock base body) is omitted, and a sliding frame 971 for a door frame and a main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 685a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and the first peripheral wall 290. It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 984. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[About the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG. 39 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the door frame 5 includes a door frame main body 100 formed in a square shape, a door lens unit 120, a reinforcing sheet metal 160, a glass unit 190, a dish unit 300, a security cover 210, and the like. Installed. A vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 having an opening area that occupies approximately 3/4 of the door frame main body 100 in a front view is formed in an upper portion of the door frame main body 100. In other words, the door frame main body 100 formed of a synthetic resin in a frame shape has a gaming window 101 formed in the upper part thereof, and a lower part of the gaming window 101 is a plate-like part. Note that circular speaker openings 102 through which the speakers 144a and 144b penetrate are formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101. A stop lever 108 for locking the stopper piece 194 of the glass unit 190 is rotatably provided below the speaker opening 102.

  In the door frame 5, the door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface of the gaming window 101, while the dish unit 300 is provided on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. A handle unit 318, which will be described later, protrudes and is fixed to one side (open side) of the dish unit 300. Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 160 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 190 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101. Furthermore, the slide unit 230 corresponding to the handle unit 318, the mounting base 220, and the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 are attached to the back surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, respectively. A security cover 210 having a security function is also attached to the lower part of the back surface of the glass unit 190.

  In the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passing port 103 through which a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) of the dish unit 300 passes is provided at the upper part on the pivot support side. Further, a lid opening 105 for attaching and detaching the side surface opening lid 383 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) is provided near the oblique center of the prize ball passing port 103. Further, a ball feed opening 104 for mounting the ball feed unit 226 is opened at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. A lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 868 to pass therethrough is further opened near the opening side of the ball feed opening 104.

  A slide unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the slide unit 230 is formed at a position below the ball feed opening 104 on the back side of the plate-like portion below the game window 101. Further, engagement receiving pieces (not shown) for hooking the latching protrusions 195 of the glass unit 190 are formed on the left and right sides of the gaming window 101. A mounting opening 110 is formed on the side of the engagement receiving piece to which the mounting elastic piece 213 of the security cover 210 is mounted.

  Further, at the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, the engagement is inserted into the guide hole 436 (see FIG. 47) of the dish unit 300 toward the front (that is, the front side) of the door frame 5. A protrusion 111 is formed. On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101, a door frame protrusion 112 protruding rearward (that is, on the back side) of the door frame 5 is formed along the lower side of the door frame main body 100. . The door frame protruding piece 112 is an outer protrusion that is engaged with the engaging grooves 42 and 43 (see FIG. 1) formed in the main body frame 3 at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured as a pair.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the configuration of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part on the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door lens unit attached to the front side of the door frame. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. FIG. 44 is a front view of the door frame when a member that irradiates the LED among members constituting the speaker cover and the decorative member is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the door lens unit 120 includes reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b, cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b, LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b, a lens cover 140, and a speaker 144a. 144b and the lens base body 121.

  More specifically, the front surfaces of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b are reflecting surfaces. The cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b are attached to the front surfaces of the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b, respectively. In addition, LED boards 137, 138a, and 138b are attached to the inside of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b, respectively. Further, a light-transmissive lens cover 140 that covers the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b is provided in front of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b. The lens cover 140 is arranged with a lens base body 121 described later as a base, and a pair of left and right speakers 144a and 144b are attached to the upper portion of the lens cover 140.

  The lens base body 121 is formed of a synthetic resin so as to form an inner hollow triangular shape having a circular arc at the front and a straight shape at the rear and a rear surface (that is, a back surface) opened in a plan view. An inverter board 136 for supplying a high-voltage current to the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b is housed and fixed in the hollow interior of the lens base body 121. Further, an upper reflector 122 having an L-shaped cross section is attached so as to contact the front surface and the bottom surface of the lens base body 121. The upper reflector 122 is formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white, and has a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surface of the upper reflector 122 is a reflection surface that reflects light emitted from the upper cold cathode tube 132 and the upper LED substrate 137. Note that side reflectors 130a and 130b, which will be described later, are similarly formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white.

  Incidentally, electrode support portions 125 for supporting both ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 are formed at both ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively. Further, in order to support the upper cold cathode tube 132 at an appropriate interval, a cathode tube support piece 123 having a tip formed in a U-shape is protruded from the front surface of the upper reflector 122. This is because the central portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is bent into a “<” shape and is bent, so that the bent portion at the center is stressed and is easily damaged. is there. That is, by supporting the horizontally long upper cold cathode tube 132 not only by the electrode support portions 125 at the left and right ends but also by the cathode tube support piece 123 at an appropriate interval, the upper cold cathode tube 132 is preferably not damaged. Can be supported. Further, by supporting the upper cold cathode tube 132 so as not to move with the cathode tube support piece 123 in a state where the upper cold cathode tube 132 is sandwiched between heat-resistant rubber packings (not shown), a support structure that is more difficult to break. It can be.

  In addition, the electrode support portions 125 at the left and right ends are open at the top, and an electrode insertion hole (not shown) that is open to receive the end portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is formed in the peripheral wall facing inward. ing. On the other hand, rubber sleeves 133 that can be elastically deformed are attached to the left and right ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 to which wiring is connected. Then, the electrode lid 127 is fitted from above the electrode support portion 125 in a state where the rubber sleeve 133 is inserted from above into an electrode insertion hole (not shown) formed in the electrode support portion 125. Thus, the upper cold cathode tube 132 can be mounted on the front surface of the upper reflector 122.

  Thus, the rubber sleeve 133 is attached to both ends of the upper reflector 122, and the rubber sleeve 133 is supported in an electrode insertion hole (not shown) of the electrode support 125 in a loosely fitted state. With this structure, even if the upper cold cathode tube 132 vibrates due to an impact or the like, when the rubber sleeve 133 absorbs the vibration, the end portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is swung by the electrode support portion 125 or The sliding stress is weakened by sliding. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper cold cathode tube 132 from being damaged at the electrode support portion 125 and the bent portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132. Note that speaker through holes 128a and 128b through which the speakers 144a and 144b penetrate are formed on the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively.

  By the way, the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122 are connected to the side reflectors 130a and 130b so as to hang down. The side reflectors 130a and 130b are also formed of a polycarbonate resin colored white like the upper reflector 122, and have a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surface of the side reflectors 130a and 130b is a reflecting surface that reflects light emitted from the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b and the side LED substrates 138a and 138b. The side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b attached in front of the side reflectors 130a and 130b are formed in a straight line extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, electrode support portions 131a and 131b that support the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are formed at two locations on the upper and lower ends of the side reflectors 130a and 130b, respectively. Of course, the structure for supporting the side cold-cathode tubes 134a and 134b with the electrode support portions 131a and 131b is the same as that of the upper cold-cathode tube 132 and the electrode support portion 125 described above. That is, rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are attached to the end portions of the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b, and the rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are in contact with and supported by the electrode support portions 131a and 131b. . Thereby, it can be set as the support structure which is hard to be damaged even if the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b vibrate.

  Note that LED boards 137, 138a, and 138b on which a large number of LEDs are mounted are attached to the inner side of the upper reflector 122 and the side reflectors 130a and 130b (positions that border the gaming window 101). The inner peripheral surface of the lens cover 140 described later is decorated by the LEDs mounted on the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b.

  The lens base body 121, the upper reflector 122 to which the upper cold cathode tube 132 is attached, and the side reflectors 130a and 130b to which the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are attached are arranged on the back side of the lens cover 140. Fixed. The lens cover 140 includes an upper lens cover portion 141 and side lens cover portions 142a and 142b as a cover body formed of a transmissive resin. The upper lens cover portion 141 is a cover body provided corresponding to the upper reflector 122 to which the lens base body 121 and the upper cold cathode tube 132 are attached. The side lens cover parts 142a and 142b are cover bodies provided corresponding to the side reflectors 130a and 130b to which the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are attached, respectively.

  More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 141 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are both formed as a white lens portion with a front bulging portion having a wedge-shaped cross section made of synthetic resin. Further, on the rear end side of the lens cover portions 141, 142 a, 142 b, a red lens portion 150 formed of a synthetic resin having a different color from the lens cover portions 141, 142 a, 142 b borders the gaming window 101. Each is formed along the peripheral surface. In the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b, the white lens portion and the red lens portion 150 are connected and molded in a series. The red lens portion 150 is illuminated by a plurality of LEDs mounted linearly on the upper LED substrate 137 and the side LED substrates 138a and 138b.

  By the way, the upper lens cover part 141 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section in which the inside is hollow and the rear side is open, and is configured in a boomerang shape in plan view. The inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip end portion of the upper lens cover portion 141 is close to the above-described upper cold cathode tube 132 formed in a “<” shape. Furthermore, a front lens portion 141c colored in silver is bonded to the outer side of the wedge-shaped tip portion of the upper lens cover portion 141. With this structure, the front bulging surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 141 is illuminated by the upper cold cathode tube 132.

  Further, the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are the same as the upper lens cover portion 141 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. However, the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are configured in a boomerang shape having a wedge-shaped protrusion amount smaller than that of the upper lens cover portion 141 in a side view, and having a gentle curve as a whole. Further, the inner surfaces of the wedge-shaped tips of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are close to the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b formed in the above-described linear shape. Furthermore, a front lens portion 142c colored in silver is bonded to the outside of the wedge-shaped tip portions of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b. With this structure, the front bulging surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire side lens cover portion 142a, 142b is illuminated by the side cold cathode tubes 134a, 134b.

  In the above-described embodiment, the light emitting sources arranged in the space defined by the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b are the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b. Then, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b corresponding to these light emitting sources were molded and connected with synthetic resins having different colors (in this case, white and red). Specifically, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b corresponding to the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b are white lens portions, while the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b corresponding to the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b are red. The lens unit 150 was obtained. In this manner, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b can be molded with a structure and color that are suitably irradiated by the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b. Of course, different types of light emitting sources are not limited to the combination of the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b, and both may be configured as LED substrates.

  By the way, speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b for attaching the speakers 144a and 144b are formed in a connecting portion between the upper lens cover portion 141 of the lens cover 140 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b. And speaker cone 145a is provided in the front of these speakers 144a and 144b. Therefore, the cone support that supports the speaker cone 145a is attached from the back surface of the speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b using a predetermined attachment member (not shown). The front surfaces of the speakers 144a and 144b attached to the speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b are covered with speaker covers 146a and 146b having mesh-like covers 147a and 147b (punching metal).

  Furthermore, decorative member attachment areas 148a and 148b are formed below the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b, and the decorative members 149a and 149b are attached to the decorative member attachment areas 148a and 148b. The decorative members 149a and 149b have shapes similar to the speaker covers 146a and 146b described above. With this structure, when the lens cover 140 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, it is possible to give an impression that the upper left and right and the lower left and right of the lens cover 140 are balanced.

  Incidentally, the speaker covers 146a, 146b and the decorative members 149a, 149b not only cover the front of the speakers 144a, 144b or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 140, but the surroundings are light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

  Specifically, inside the speaker covers 146a and 146b, the LED substrate 152 is in close contact with the back surface of the cover base plate 151 formed of a synthetic resin into a flat plate shape. The speaker frame 154 is covered with an inner lens and a front lens (not shown) with the speaker frame 154 built in front of the cover base plate 151. Further, the front surfaces of the speaker covers 146a and 146b are closed with mesh covers 147a and 147b.

  Further, inside the decorative members 149a and 149b, the LED substrate 156 is in close contact with the back surface of the decorative base plate 155 formed in a flat plate shape with a synthetic resin. And the decoration base board 155 is covered with the inner lens and decoration lens which are not shown in figure in the state which incorporated the decoration frame 158 ahead of the decoration base board 155. FIG. Further, the front surfaces of the decorative members 149a and 149b are closed by the decorative plates 159a and 159b.

  Thus, the speaker covers 146a, 146b and the decorative members 149a, 149b are light decorations by the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LED boards 137, 138a, 138b in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5. Separately, the four corners of the door frame 5 are mainly light-decorated. Therefore, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a strong tendency to arrange only speakers. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, since the light decoration around the speaker is not performed, the light decoration around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 has an impression. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery of the door frame 5 excluding the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively light-decorated.

  In the present embodiment, the cold cathode fluorescent lamps 132, 134a, 134b and the LED boards 137, 138a, 138b that perform light decoration on the door frame 5 correspond to the frame decoration lamp 842 (see FIG. 85).

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 161, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 162, an open side reinforcing sheet metal 163, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 that are fastened to each other with screws or the like. It is configured in a shape. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 is attached along the rear surface of the upper side of the door frame main body 100. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 is attached along the shaft support side side part back surface of the door frame main body 100. The open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 is attached along the open-side side portion back surface of the door frame main body 100. The lower reinforcing metal plate 164 is attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the game window 101 of the door frame main body 100.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the width of the door frame body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 are an upper bent protrusion piece 165 and a lower bent protrusion piece 166 that are bent backward. The upper bent protrusion 165 and the lower bent protrusion 166 are fitted into the upper crime prevention double groove 33 (see FIG. 14) of the main body frame 3.

  The pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 also has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame main body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 are a shaft support side short bent protrusion 172 and a shaft support side L-shaped bent protrusion 167 which are bent backward. However, while the shaft support side short bent protrusion 172 that is the inner bent protrusion is extremely short, the shaft support side L-shaped bent protrusion 167 that is the outer bent protrusion is the tip of the bent portion. Is formed in an L shape. The shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 167 is configured such that a tip portion bent in an L shape comes into contact with the inside of the shaft support side portion 49 of the main body frame 3 described above.

  The opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame main body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 are an open-side outer bent protrusion 173 and an open-side inner bent protrusion 174 that are bent rearward. The open-side outer bent protrusion 173 is inserted into the side crime prevention groove 34 (see FIG. 14) of the main body frame 3 described above, and the open-side inner bent protrusion 174 is a security concave portion of the main body frame 3. 35 (see FIG. 14). Engagement openings 175 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 so that the door frame hook portion 973 of the locking device 60 can enter. A hook cover 176 with which the door frame hook portion 973 engages is fixed so as to cover the back side of these engagement openings 175.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the width of the door frame body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 are a lower bent protrusion piece 178 and an upper bent protrusion piece 179 which are bent toward the rear. However, the lower bent protruding piece 178 is formed by bending the lower long side edge of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 toward the rear, and the upper bent protruding piece 179 is the upper longer side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164. The both sides of the edge are bent rearward, and the portion sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 179 on both sides is a vertical bent protrusion 180 extending in the vertical direction. Yes. The vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed in a concave shape so that the upper end edge shape thereof matches the lower end shape of a unit frame 191 of a glass unit 190 described later. Then, when the glass unit 190 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the upper end piece of the vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed along the substantially central outer periphery in the width direction of the unit frame 191 of the glass unit 190. The mating groove 200 is engaged. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 177 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit>
Next, the glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 is demonstrated with reference to FIG.40 and FIG.41. As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the glass unit 190 is configured by adhering a unit frame 191 and a glass plate 201 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate). The unit frame 191 is a frame having an annular vertically long octagon shape molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101. The glass plate 201 is two transparent plates disposed on the front and rear surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 191.

  Stopping pieces 194 are formed on the left and right sides of the upper part of the unit frame 191 so as to project outward. In addition, on the left and right sides of the lower part of the unit frame 191, hooking protrusions 195 are formed so as to project outward from the annular shape. The stopper piece 194 and the hooking protrusion 195 are for attaching the glass unit 190 to the back surface of the door frame 5 as described above. The glass unit 190 of the present embodiment is integrally formed with a unit frame 191 with a pair of security projection plates 199 (see FIG. 39) that project obliquely upward in a front view. Therefore, when the glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame 5, the security protruding plate 199 is connected to the lateral positions of the speakers 144a and 144b without any gap.

<Security cover>
Next, the crime prevention cover 210 provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190 and prevents the unauthorized equipment from entering the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the crime prevention cover 210 is formed in a flat plate shape with a transparent synthetic resin so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 190 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 162 and 163. The upper side portion of the crime prevention cover 210 is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 211 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 462, and the crime prevention post-projection piece faces rearward along the contact recess 211. 214 protrudes.

  The rear surface of the crime prevention cover 210 is provided with a rear crime prevention end protrusion 215 that projects obliquely on the rear surface of the door frame 5 with the door frame 5 attached thereto. Yes. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 210, the security cover 210 is attached to the door frame 5, and the pre-crime projection piece 212 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 191, and both lower ends of the unit frame 191. A mounting elastic piece 213 formed in a U-shape is formed so as to project forward.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the mounting base 220 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100. And like the crime prevention cover 210, it is formed in the horizontal rectangular parallelepiped shape which the front open | released with the transparent synthetic resin. A ball flight guide surface 227 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 220, and the launch rail 38 is held between the ball flight guide surface 227 and the plate portion 32 when the door frame 5 is closed. Thereby, the ball launched from the launch rail 38 is smoothly guided to the game area 20.

  By the way, an opening for a prize ball passage opening through which a rearward protruding portion of a prize ball passage opening covering portion (not shown) formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is formed in the upper part of the mounting base 220 according to the present embodiment. 221 is formed. A ball feed unit mounting recess 222 for mounting the ball feed unit 226 is formed in the lower part on the open side of the mounting table 220. In addition, the area | region of the diagonal direction from this ball feed unit attachment recessed part 222 is the above-mentioned ball flight guide surface 227. In addition, the ball feed unit 226 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 222 is provided with a ball feed member (not shown) that swings in accordance with the reciprocating motion difference of the hitting ball of the launching device 57. By this swinging movement of the ball feeding member, the balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 38. Further, a lid opening 223 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 383 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 220. Further, a vertical wall 224 is formed on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 220. When the security cover 210 is attached, the standing wall 224 is in contact with the front surface of the security cover 210 so as to restrict the lower part of the security cover 210 from moving forward.

<Frame decoration relay terminal board>
As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, a frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting table 220. Further, a relay board cover 241 is attached so as to cover the rear surface of the frame decoration relay terminal board 240. The frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 includes an electrical component and electrical components (cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b, LED boards 137, 138a, 138b, speakers 144a, 144b, 341a, 341b, handles provided on the door frame 5. Wiring from a switch, a ball rental unit 324, an operation button unit 326, and the like provided in the unit 318 are collectively connected. Then, the wiring from the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 is delivered to the delivery control board box 55 via the door frame connector 2012 of the sub drawer relay board 649 incorporated in the board unit 54 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The control board is connected to the main control board of the main control board box 25.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a front view of the dish unit provided on the front surface of the door frame. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the dish unit. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the dish unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, in the dish unit 300, members such as a lower speaker unit 330, a dish body 360, a second ball extraction link unit 400, a dish lid body 430 are attached to a unit frame 301 constituting the appearance. Is configured. Specifically, the lower speaker unit 330 is attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, while the dish 360 is provided so as to face the upper surface of the unit frame 301 above the lower speaker unit 330. The second ball removal link unit 400 performs the ball removal operation of the ball removal valve 375 provided in the dish body 360, while the dish lid body 430 closes the rear surface of the unit frame 301.

  First, the unit frame 301 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, in the unit frame 301, an upper surface cover portion 302 and a front surface cover portion 303 are integrally formed of synthetic resin. The upper surface cover portion 302 has a semi-elliptical shape in plan view in which the upper surface is gently inclined toward the near side, and constitutes the upper surface of the unit frame 301. Further, the front cover portion 303 continuously extends from the front side to the rear side and constitutes the front and bottom surfaces of the unit frame 301. A vertical cover portion 302 a that contacts the front side of the door frame main body 100 is also integrally formed on the back side of the upper surface cover portion 302. The vertical cover 302a has a ball rental button unit opening 323 at the center thereof. The ball rental unit 324 can be attached to the ball rental button unit opening 323 from the back side. When a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the lending unit 324 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like.

  Further, a dish body upper surface opening 305 is opened from the rising portion of the vertical cover portion 302a of the upper surface cover portion 302 toward the front. An operation button unit concave space 306 is formed at the front center of the dish upper surface opening 305. Further, LED decoration space portions 307 are formed along the front end portions of the left and right upper surface cover portions 302 from the operation button unit concave space portion 306. Further, a first ball extraction button opening 313 a for attaching the first ball extraction button 313 is provided on the side of the dish upper surface opening 305. The dish body upper surface opening 305 is formed in the same shape as the upper surface opening of the storage part 361 of the dish body 360 and the guide passage part 362 communicating therewith. When the dish body 360 is attached to the unit frame 301, the storage section 361 and the guide passage section 362 of the dish body 360 face the dish body upper surface opening 305.

  In addition, a space portion forming member 310 is attached to the operation button unit concave space portion 306, and the operation button unit 326 is attached to the space portion forming member 310. The space forming member 310 has a wiring housing opening 310b. The wiring storage opening 310b stores a connector 310a for wiring that is connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the bottom surface of the operation button unit 326 when the operation button unit 326 is inserted into the space forming member 310. It is. The operation button unit 326 includes a plurality (three in the illustrated example) of operation buttons 327. The plurality of operation buttons 327 are operated when the player participates in the game content performed on the effect display device 115 or the like.

  Further, the first ball removal button 313 is attached to the upper surface cover portion 302 via a sliding support member 314 attached to the first ball removal button opening 313a of the upper surface cover portion 302. The member 314 slides in the vertical direction. When the first ball removal button 313 is pressed by the player, the rotation member 366 positioned below the first ball removal button 313 rotates about the rotation shaft 367 in the clockwise direction. Then, in conjunction with the operation of the rotating member 366, the slide valve 365 linked to the lower end of the rotating member 366 moves. The slide valve 365 is always biased by a spring 369 and is in a position where the downstream end portion of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 is closed. When the first ball extraction button 313 is moved as described above, the first ball extraction passage portion evacuates from the guide passage portion 362 and continues downstream of the guide passage portion 362 and the guide passage portion 362. 364 is communicated. Thereby, the balls stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 can be extracted from the dish body 360. This structure will be further described in detail when the dish 360 is described.

  Next, the configuration of the front cover portion 303 of the unit frame 301 will be described. As described above, the front cover portion 303 forms the front surface and the bottom surface of the unit frame 301 continuously from the front side of the upper surface cover portion 302. For this reason, the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303 is inclined to the back as the central portion protrudes most forward and moves left and right. Speaker openings 315a and 315b are provided on the left and right sides of the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303 (that is, the central protrusion). The speaker openings 315a and 315b are covered with a mesh-like speaker cover 316a and 316b (punching metal). Then, two speakers 341a and 341b that are housed and fixed in the lower speaker unit 330 are located behind the speaker covers 316a and 316b. Note that the speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed in an inclined surface that inclines from the protruding portion at the center of the front surface of the front cover portion 303 toward the back side. Therefore, when the unit frame 301 is viewed from the front, the unit frame 301 is opened outward from the central vertical line of the pachinko machine 1. And the front decoration board 304 is attached so that the protrusion from the center of the front surface of the front cover part 303 may be bordered to the upper and lower opening edges of the speaker openings 315a and 315b.

  Further, a handle attachment hole 317 for attaching the handle unit 318 is formed below the open side end of the front cover portion 303. As is well known, the handle unit 318 is for adjusting the resilience of the hit ball. Therefore, the handle unit 318 is provided with a rotation operation member 318a that can be operated by the player. When the turning operation member 318a is turned, the engaging cam 319 fixed to the rear end of the turning shaft is turned. Then, as described above, by converting the rotational movement of the engaging cam 319 into the sliding movement of the slide engaging / disengaging piece 231 of the slide unit 230, the strength of the elastic force of the launching device 57 can be adjusted. It is like that.

  Here, the second ball removal link unit 400 includes a second ball removal button 401, a pressing swing member (not shown), a first link 414, and a second link 419. The pressing swing member (not shown) is a member that swings when the second ball extraction button 401 is locked. The first link 414 and the second link 419 are members for transmitting a pressing operation of a pressing swing member (not shown) as a ball swinging motion of the ball release valve 375.

  A second ball extraction button opening 320 for opening the second ball extraction button 401 constituting a part of the second ball extraction link unit 400 is opened at the center lower portion of the front cover portion 303. In addition, a ball discharge port for discharging a ball, which has been removed according to the operation of the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401, to the outside of the dish unit 300 is provided at the center of the bottom surface of the front cover portion 303. 322 is formed. A fastener insertion hole 325 for attaching the operation button unit 326 is formed obliquely in front of the ball discharge port 322. In the present embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 313 and 401 of the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401 are provided for the following reason. That is, all the spheres stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish 360 can be extracted by operating the first ball release button 313, but are aligned in a line at the guide passage portion 362. It takes some time to remove the sphere. On the other hand, since the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 361 of the dish body 360 can be quickly extracted from the large-diameter extraction opening 388 by operating the second extraction button 401, the extraction time is shortened. Can do. In other words, it is possible to arbitrarily select the length of time that the player spends removing the ball. Also, when a big hit is made during the game and a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full switch 730 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 may function. is assumed. Then, due to the operation of the full tank switch 730, the payout operation is stopped or the bulleting operation is stopped, and there is a possibility that the game cannot be continued despite the big hit. In such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 401, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained, The game can be continued.

  Next, the configuration of the dish lid 430 that closes the back surface of the unit frame 301 of the dish unit 300 will be described. The dish lid 430 is formed of a synthetic resin as a rectangular flat plate so as to close almost the entire back surface of the unit frame 301. Further, a ball passage rear ridge 433 is formed integrally and projectingly at substantially the center on the front side of the dish lid 430. A curved upper guide rod 434 and a lower guide rod 435 are formed in the rear ball passage 433 so as to guide the ball forward and downward. Then, when the dish lid 430 is attached to the back surface of the unit frame 301, the ball outlet passage front rod 337 formed in the speaker box main body 331 of the lower speaker unit 330 and the bulb outlet passage rear rod 433 are opposed to each other. This constitutes a ball passage in the dish. At this time, the guide rod 338 formed on the ball guide passage front rod 337 is positioned between the upper guide rod 434 and the lower guide rod 435 of the ball guide passage rear rod 433. For this reason, the in-dish ball extraction passage is formed in a meandering shape, and the extracted ball is discharged to the outside from the ball discharge port 322 while weakening the momentum.

  In addition, an opening lid attachment window 432 is provided in the dish lid body 430 at the upper side of the rear punching passage 433. Further, a square cylindrical award ball connecting rod 431 protrudes from the upper back surface at one end side (axial support side) of the dish lid 430. When the dish unit 300 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the prize ball communication rod 431 penetrates the prize ball passing port 103 formed in the lower part of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100, and It penetrates to the back side. Then, with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the end of the prize ball passage formed in the main body frame 3 faces in a superposed manner. The opening lid attaching window 432 is an opening for detachably attaching the side opening lid 383 that closes the side wall opening (not shown) of the second ball extraction passage portion (not shown) of the dish body 360. And it is provided in the position corresponding to the opening 105 for lid | covers (refer FIG.40 and FIG.41) formed in the door frame main body 100. FIG.

[Relationship between outer frame, main frame and game effect unit]
Next, the positional relationship when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the game effect unit 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a plan sectional view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 49 is a plan sectional view of the pachinko machine, in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame.

  Of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of wood having a thickness of 19 mm. On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are thin-walled members made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate. In the present embodiment, the side frame plates 12 and 13 have a thickness of 3 mm. Further, as described above, ribs are formed on the inner side of the rear portion of the side frame plates 12 and 13 so that the thickness h2 (see FIG. 10C) of the rear portion is increased. That is, the side frame plates 12 and 13 include vertically long outer wall portions 12a and 13a (a portion having a thickness of 3 mm), and thickness portions 12b and 13b formed with ribs directed toward the inner side of the rear portions of the side frame plates 12 and 13, respectively. (The outer wall 13a and the thickness 13b of the open side frame 13 are shown in FIG. 7). The thickness sections 12b and 13b are formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section so as to have a space section 12G opened behind the side frame plates 12 and 13.

  The outer wall portions 12a and 13a are substantially flat plate members, and the thickness portions 12b and 13b are erected inwardly from the rear end portions of the outer wall portions 12a and 13a. Thereby, the thickness of the left-right direction in the front-end part of the side frame boards 12 and 13 becomes the thickness of the outer wall parts 12a and 13a, and there is no structure which increases this thickness elsewhere. Further, outer frame spaces 12A and 13A having rib widths are formed inside the outer wall portions 12a and 13a. Therefore, a part of the body frame 3 (more specifically, the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291) can be accommodated in the outer frame inner space 12A, and the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 are accommodated. The outer frame 2 can be made closer. As a result, the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral surface walls 290 to 293 on the shaft support side and the peripheral surface walls 290 to 293 on the open side can be widened to the limit, and the left and right width of the game area 20 can be increased. Moreover, the effect becomes remarkable by making the side frame plates 12 and 13 thin. In this way, while the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made thin by reducing the thickness, not only can the strength equal to or higher than that of conventional wood be maintained, but also the game area 20 can be enlarged. Can also be achieved.

  Furthermore, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 of the locking device 60 described above in the state where the main body frame 3 is confined to the outer frame 2 are also provided in the outer frame inner space 13A. Be contained. Thereby, the lateral width of the gaming panel 409 (the lateral width when viewed from the player) is substantially equal to the thickness of the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 from the lateral width of the entire pachinko machine 1 (more specifically, the thickness of the outer wall portion). ) Is subtracted. As a result, a sufficient width of the game area 20 can be secured. When the main body frame 3 is confined to the outer frame 2, the second peripheral wall 291 of the main body frame 3 is close to the open side thick portion 13 b of the side frame plate 13. It is difficult to insert a finger or the like from between b and the second peripheral wall 291. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress injustice such as operating the door frame sliding rod 971 or the body frame sliding rod 984 from behind the outer frame 2.

  The main body frame 3 is formed with peripheral wall 290 to 293 along the inner peripheral surface of the outer frame 2. That is, the main body frame 3 is configured such that the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is provided along the surface of the inner peripheral wall of the outer frame 2 while maintaining the width of the left and right when viewed from the front. Specifically, the inner side wall surface of the pivot side frame 12 and the outer side surface of the first peripheral wall 290 on the pivot side are closely adjacent to each other and formed on the side frame plate 12 on the pivot side. A first peripheral wall 290 is extended to the ribs. Further, the open side frame plate 13 and the open side first peripheral wall 290 are formed on the open side frame plate 13 with the thin side locking device 60 (details will be described later) sandwiched therebetween. A first peripheral wall 290 is extended to the ribs. In this way, the first peripheral wall 290 is closest to the outer frame 2 on both the pivot support side and the open side. Thereby, the width in the left-right direction of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the shaft support side and the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the open side can be maximized. Note that almost no openings are formed in the peripheral walls 290 to 293.

  Further, on the pivot support side, the main body frame 3 is bent at a substantially right angle about 18 mm inside just before the rib formed on the open side frame plate 13, and the second peripheral wall 291 avoids this rib. Is extended substantially in parallel with the first peripheral wall 290 toward the rear.

  The third peripheral wall 292 is substantially parallel to the second peripheral wall 291 from the rear end of the second peripheral wall 291 (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) to the rear. Is extended. Note that the third peripheral wall 292 is slightly (about 1 mm) inside the second peripheral wall 291. In other words, on the shaft support side, a fine step having a wall thickness is formed between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292.

  Furthermore, from the rear end portion (boundary portion between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) of the third peripheral wall 292 toward the rear, the fourth peripheral wall 293 is substantially parallel to the third peripheral wall 292. Is extended. The fourth peripheral wall 293 is slightly inside (about 1 mm) from the third peripheral wall 292. That is, on the shaft support side, a fine step having a thickness of about 3 mm is formed between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293.

  In addition, since the thickness of the level | step difference between the 2nd surrounding wall 291 and the 3rd surrounding wall 292 and between the 3rd surrounding wall 292 and the 4th surrounding wall 293 is as thin as about thickness, the main body frame 3 is 2nd. From the front end portion of the peripheral wall 291 to the rear end portion of the fourth peripheral wall 293, it extends substantially linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the game panel 409. Moreover, although the second peripheral wall 291 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 are substantially straight, the strength of the main body frame 3 is increased by forming a fine step of about the thickness.

  On the other hand, on the open side, the main body frame 3 is connected to the first peripheral wall 290 from the rear end of the first peripheral wall 290 (the boundary between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291) toward the rear. A second peripheral wall 291 extends substantially in parallel. The second peripheral wall 291 is slightly inside (about 5 mm) from the first peripheral wall 290. In other words, on the open side, a fine step with a thickness of approximately 1 is formed between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291.

  Further, a third peripheral wall 292 extends from the rear end portion of the second peripheral wall 291 (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) toward the rear inner side. Note that a fine step having a thickness of about a thickness is formed at the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292. In other words, the third peripheral wall 292 extends from the front end (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) to the rear end (the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293). It will be formed diagonally backward.

  Further, a fourth peripheral wall 293 extends from the rear end portion of the third peripheral wall 292 (boundary portion between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) toward the rear inner side. In addition, a fine step having a thickness of about 3 mm is formed at the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293. That is, the fourth peripheral wall 293 on the open side is the boundary between the front end (the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) and the rear end (the fourth peripheral wall 293 and the open rear wall 294). Part), it will be formed obliquely rearward.

  In this way, the main body frame 3 is formed obliquely rearward from the distal end portion of the third peripheral wall 292 toward the rear end portion of the fourth peripheral wall 293 without interfering with the open side frame plate 13. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 around the axis connecting the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 (see FIG. 2) (see FIG. 2). 49). In particular, in the present embodiment, when the axis connecting the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 (see FIG. 2) is used as the center of rotation, the open-side peripheral walls 290 to 293 have the axis It is formed along an arc shape having a radius from the center to a portion close to the inner end of the side frame plate 13 (specifically, the first peripheral wall).

  In other words, the main body frame 3 has a plurality of peripheral walls 290 to 293 as strip-shaped plate portions whose longitudinal direction is the vertical direction, and is thicker so that the rear peripheral wall is arranged on the inner side. A slight level difference is formed. That is, the second peripheral wall 291 is inside the first peripheral wall 290, the third peripheral wall 292 is inside the second peripheral wall 291, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is inside the third peripheral wall 292. Very few step portions are formed so as to be arranged respectively. As a result, the strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased, and the opening-side peripheral wall 290 to 203 can be brought close to the inner end (inner side surface) of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2. While adopting the effect display device 115, the width of the game panel 409 (the width in the left-right direction as viewed from the player), that is, the width of the game area 20 can be sufficiently secured. Further, on the open side, the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293 are inclined obliquely inward toward the rear, so that the main body frame 3 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Can smoothly open the main body frame 3 without interfering with the outer frame 2.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 is inserted and attached to the main body frame 3 described above. More specifically, the front structural member 680 and the panel holder 540 that partition and form the game area 20 are arranged along the inner wall of the first peripheral wall 290 without a gap. Further, the transparent game panel 409 is sandwiched between the front component member 680 and the panel holder 540.

  Further, the game effect unit 4 is inserted into the main body frame 3 so that the game effect unit installation recess 30 is entirely accommodated. In other words, the foremost part of the game effect unit 4 (the surface of the game panel 409) is located deeper than the foremost part of the main body frame 3 (the foremost surface of the first peripheral wall 290). The open-side rear wall 294 is molded at a substantially right angle from the rear end of the open-side third peripheral wall 292 toward the inside (left side in front view), and the upper rear wall 295 is the rear of the upper fourth peripheral wall 293. It is molded at a substantially right angle from the end toward the inside (front view lower side), and the shaft support side rear wall 296 is approximately directed from the rear end portion of the shaft support side third peripheral wall 292 toward the inside (right side of the front view). Molded at right angles. Accordingly, the game effect unit 4 is closed in the depth direction by the peripheral wall 290 to 293 of the outer frame 2. As a result, foreign acts are inserted from the side of the game panel 409 to suppress illegal acts such as operating the winning ports such as the start ports 602, 604, the general winning port 614 and the opening / closing device 500 provided in the gaming panel 409. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having excellent security can be provided. In particular, since the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is not formed with an opening other than the lock locking hole 351, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 functions as a covering portion that covers the game effect unit 4 from the side. The cheating from the side with respect to the production unit 4 can be suppressed.

  Behind the panel holder 540, a back unit 510 having a frame-like box-shaped back box 514 that forms a space of a predetermined volume is disposed. An opening 514b (see FIG. 65) is formed on the rear surface side of the back box 514, and the effect display device 115 is arranged so as to close the opening 514b. Behind the effect display device 115, a main control board box 25 that houses a main control board 710 (see FIG. 84) and a peripheral control board box 24 that houses a peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 85) are mounted.

  Thus, the front structural member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25, and the peripheral control board box 24 are accommodated in the main body frame 3. That is, the front structural member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25 and the peripheral control board box 24 are mounted on the main body frame 3 as a box-like game box. Is done.

  Here, in other words, the positional relationship among the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the game effect unit 4 is a state in which the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The side portions (longitudinal outer surfaces) of the pivot support side and the open side game panel 409 are brought close to the inner ends (inner side surfaces) of the side support plates 12 and 13 on the pivot support side and the open side, respectively. Is formed. In addition, for each of the pivot support side and the open side, a thin first peripheral wall 290 extends from the front toward the rear between the side portion of the game panel 409 and the inner ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is installed. Further, the upper side portion (outer side surface in the short side direction) of the game panel 409 is formed so as to be close to the inner end (inner side surface) of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper side portion and the upper frame plate of the game panel 409 are formed. A thin first peripheral wall 290 is also extended from the front toward the rear between the inner ends of 10. Thereby, the game area 20 formed in the game panel 409 can be designed sufficiently large. In addition, the left limit, right limit, and upper limit of the accommodation space of the game effect unit 4 are easy to understand, and the design of the game effect unit 4 can be facilitated.

  By the way, a light emitting decorative body 1720 is disposed in a space formed by the back unit 510. The light emitting decoration body 1720 includes a plurality of LEDs 1740 as electric decoration members as described later, and projects light toward the front side of the game effect unit 4. It should be noted that the LEDs 1740 of the light emitting decoration 1720 are arranged around the effect display device 115 arranged at the approximate center of the back unit 510 and scattered over substantially the entire game area 20.

  In the present embodiment, many of the main components constituting the game effect unit 4 are used as light transmissive members, for example, the game panel 409 is made of a transparent resin. Furthermore, in the space formed by the back unit 510, an effect device such as a light emitting decoration 1720 is disposed. Thus, the game area 20 is not narrowed by the light emitting decoration 1720, and a sufficient space for the game ball to flow down can be secured. Moreover, since the main body frame 3 extends rearward while maintaining a wide state, a wide-area production space 510G (nets shown in FIGS. 48 to 50) for accommodating the production device is provided behind the game panel 409. A hanging portion) is formed, and it is possible to play a three-dimensional game with a wide and deep sense of reality. In particular, an electric decoration member such as a light emitting decoration 1720 arranged in the depth direction can give the impression that the entire game effect unit 4 is lit up in front view, and the depth of the game effect unit 4 It is strongly emphasized that the depth (more specifically, the depth of the production space 510G) is deep. In addition, this wide production space 510G is widely formed behind the game panel 409 (particularly, formed up to the back of the guide rail 482).

  Also, the main body frame 3 has a housing part (game effect unit installation recess) formed so as to be surrounded by the peripheral surface walls 290 to 293 with almost no opening on the side surface from the first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293. 30). The main body frame 3 is integrally molded. Therefore, there are no gaps or the like that can occur when a plurality of plate members are screwed, and the security is improved. Further, a box-shaped game whose main components are the front component member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25 and the peripheral control board box 24. The production unit 4 can be accommodated as it is. Thereby, it is only necessary to design the game effect unit 4 in consideration of only the space secured by the peripheral walls 290 to 293, and it is not necessary to consider the balance with other components constituting the pachinko machine 1. The production unit 4 can be easily designed. The gaming panel 409 is provided with winning members such as the start ports 602 and 604, the general winning port 614, and the opening / closing device 500. However, foreign objects are inserted from the side of the gaming panel 409, and these winning members are attached. It is possible to suppress fraud such as operation, and the pachinko machine 1 having excellent security can be provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame 3 is from the peripheral wall 290-293 (in this embodiment, the side wall of the 1st peripheral wall 290 and the 2nd peripheral wall 291) which opposes the side frame plates 12 and 13 among the peripheral walls 290-293. It extends toward the rear. In addition, the main body frame 3 is integrally molded, and the back cover 58 is provided on the rear end surface of the main body frame 3 (open side rear wall 294, upper rear wall 295, shaft support side rear wall 296). As a result, the back cover 58 can be provided without worrying about the interference between the hinge for opening and closing the back cover and the outer frame (more specifically, the side frame plate) as in the prior art. Accordingly, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 can be brought closer to the inner ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the pivot support side and the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the open side can be increased. Can be wide.

  Here, the flow of the game balls flowing through the prize ball tank 50, the tank rail member 51, the ball path unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50. FIG. FIG. 48 is as described above, and FIG. 50 is a side sectional view of the pachinko machine.

  The prize ball tank 50 is disposed in front of the open-side rear wall 294 and above the outer frame 2 (more specifically, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 extending from the upper side of the main body frame 3 toward the rear. Placed on the top surface). By the way, since the prize ball tank 50 receives the game balls circulated and supplied from the island facility, the position of the pachinko machine 1 is uniquely determined. In other words, since the island facility cannot be remodeled unnecessarily, even if any pachinko machine is installed on the island, it must be able to receive the game balls supplied from the island facility. However, the prize ball tank 50 of this embodiment includes a position (region) for receiving a game ball supplied from the island facility, and is disposed over a wide region extending from the upper surface of the peripheral wall 290 to 293. Thereby, even if the prize ball tank 50 is formed in a shallow dish shape, a large amount of game balls can be stored. As a result, the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged in the vertical direction (the height direction viewed from the player). Therefore, the game area 20 can be enlarged both in the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and the effect space 510G provided behind the game panel 409 can be enlarged both in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. Accordingly, the game area 20 and the effect space 510G that are enlarged in both the left and right directions and the up and down direction can be formed, so that it is possible to provide a game full of three-dimensionality and profound feeling.

  The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 50 flow to the tank rail member 51 by a gravitational action. The tank rail member 51 is a double rail, and game balls are alternately sent from the rails to the ball path unit 52 one by one by the order supply device 51a. The tank rail member 51 is disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294.

  The ball path unit 52 is a single rail, and is meandered in the width direction (left and right direction as viewed from the player) so that the game ball flowing down by its own weight meanders and flows down. Thereby, the ball pressure more than necessary is not applied to the game ball flowing down in the tank rail member 51. The game balls flowing through the ball passage unit 52 are sent to the ball dispensing device 53 one by one. The ball passage unit 52 is disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294. Further, by making the ball passage unit 52 a single rail, the thickness of the ball passage unit 52 can be reduced in both the front-rear direction and the left-right direction as viewed from the front, and the ball passage unit 52 can be made compact. Can do. Furthermore, since the ball path unit 52 can meander in the left-right direction, a wide-area effect space 510G formed by the back unit 510 over the entire back side of the game panel 409 can be secured.

  The ball payout device 53 is a device that pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 in accordance with winning, and has a payout motor 1465 for ball cutting. And along the rear surface of the open side rear wall 294, it is disposed below the ball passage unit 52. However, since the game ball paid out from the ball payout device 53 is supplied to the storage unit 361 by the action of gravity, the ball payout device 53 needs to be arranged at a position higher than the storage unit 361. In the present embodiment, the ball payout device 53 is disposed behind the open-side rear wall 294 and slightly higher than the storage portion 361, and is disposed as low as possible ( At least below the effect display device 115).

  Here, a ball supply passage 59 formed in the internal space is formed between the ball payout device 53 and the storage unit 361 so that the flow path of the game ball meanders (see FIG. 16 and the like). A ball outlet 1536 (see FIG. 24) which is an opening formed on the most downstream side of the game ball in the ball supply passage 59 is a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) of the dish unit 300 described later. Furthermore, it communicates with the passage notch 478 (see FIG. 26). Then, the game balls paid out from the ball payout device 53 are paid out to the storage unit 361 through the ball supply passage 59 and the prize ball communication bar 431. The ball supply passage 59 can store game balls as much as possible from the rear of the open side rear wall 294 to the storage unit 361. That is, although this ball supply passage 59 cannot be visually recognized by the player, it can substantially store the paid-out game balls, so that there are more game balls than the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage unit 361 (part that can be viewed). Can actually be stored. In particular, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can store the same or more gaming balls in the storage unit 361, although there is no conventional lower dish.

  On the other hand, on the most upstream side of the game ball in the ball supply passage 59, the above-described ball payout device 53 is connected and a foul ball inlet 1538 (see FIG. 24), which is an opening through which the game ball can flow, is formed. Yes. The foul ball entrance 1538 communicates with the communication port 473 on the back side of the game effect unit 4. Here, of the game balls that have been ejected by the launching device 57 and entered the game effect unit 4, the game is formed in the gap between the launch guide path 29 (the outer rail 472 and the inner rail 462) without reaching the game area 20. The hit ball that has flowed backward through the injection path of the ball is received by the foul port 489 and enters the communication port 473. Then, the game balls that have entered the communication port 473 are guided from the back side of the game effect unit 4 to the ball supply passage 59 via the foul ball entrance 1538, and the ball supply passage 59 and the prize ball communication pole 431 are the same as described above. After that, it is discharged to the storage unit 361. The ball dispensing device 53 is also provided with a ball removal connecting passage 415 that is a flow path for discharging the game balls with the ball removed from the bottom of the pachinko machine 1 into the island.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the tank rail member 51, the ball passage unit 52, and the ball dispensing device 53 are all disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294 (that is, the above-mentioned). It will be arranged on the rear side of the game box). Thereby, it does not interfere with the display device control board box 119 which is arranged behind the above-mentioned wide-area effect space 510G and attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. Therefore, it is possible to freely design the arrangement positions of the tank rail member 51, the ball passage unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 while securing the wide production space 510G and increasing the size of the production display device 115. In particular, it is necessary for the ball passage unit 52 to escape the ball pressure by folding back so that a load exceeding a predetermined ball pressure is not applied. However, since the ball passage unit 52 in the present embodiment is a compact single rail, and is arranged meandering in the left-right direction along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294, the arrangement position and the meandering method can be changed. It can be designed freely, and it is possible to avoid clogging due to abnormal ball pressure.

  In addition, since the ball payout device 53 is arranged as low as possible, it is possible to secure a certain amount or more of the game balls present in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a ball shortage trouble. That is, if a certain amount or more of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be secured, for example, when a large amount of game balls are paid out, the game paid out more than the amount of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 There is concern that the amount of spheres will exceed. Since the amount of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 is determined by the amount of game balls existing between the prize ball tank 50 and the ball payout device 53, the ball payout device 53 is arranged as low as possible. Trouble caused by the shortage of balls can be suppressed.

  If the ball payout device 53 is disposed below, the time from winning a game ball to paying out a game ball as a winning ball is shortened, and it is confirmed that the game ball as a winning ball has been paid out reliably. May not be able to confirm. In other words, if there is a certain time lag between winning a prize and paying out a prize ball and paying out a game ball as a winning ball, rather than a series of operations for winning and winning a prize ball being performed instantaneously It is easy to perform both checks. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the ball supply path 59 is provided between the ball payout device 53 and the storage unit 361, and the ball path unit 52 is a single rail. By disposing 53 below, it is possible to provide a certain time lag between winning and paying out a winning ball while suppressing a ball shortage trouble.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the game board attached to the main body frame is a mountain shape in which only the center portion where the effect display device is provided in the lateral width direction protrudes backward in plan view (that is, when viewed from above). It was common to have a shape or pyramid shape. However, the game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment has a square shape having substantially the same protruding width in the rear in the lateral width direction in plan view (that is, when viewed from above). Therefore, the game effect unit 4 has a substantially box-shaped appearance as a whole, but such a characteristic shape is caused by the following points.

  That is, in the game effect unit 4, the effect display device 115 is disposed behind (in the depth direction) the game panel 409 as described above, and a wide effect space 510G is formed in the gap between the effect display device 115 and the game panel 409. is doing. With this structure, the substantially central portion of the game effect unit 4 in the front view largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (in the depth direction).

  Further, in the game effect unit 4, each light emitting decoration body 1720 as a plurality of light emitting members each having an LED substrate is disposed behind the game panel 409 around the effect display device 115 in a front view. Various substrates are provided behind these light-emitting decorative bodies 1720 (more specifically, on the back side of the back box 514) to control the lighting / flashing of LEDs of the light-emitting decorative bodies 1720.

  As described above, the game effect unit 4 has a plurality of light emitting members and various substrates related to them on the outer peripheral portion with respect to the substantially central portion in a front view. Therefore, the outer peripheral portion with respect to the substantially central portion of the game effect unit 4 also largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (depth direction). With this structure, almost the entire area of the game effect unit 4 when viewed from the front largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (in the depth direction), and forms a substantially box-shaped appearance as a whole. Then, the substantially box-shaped game effect unit 4 can be closely fitted into the effect space 510G having a space shape substantially equal to that of the game effect unit 4.

[Detailed configuration of the game production unit]
Next, a detailed configuration of the above-described game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a front view of the game effect unit. FIG. 52 is a perspective view of the game effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 53 is a perspective view of the game effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of each main member constituting the game effect unit as seen from the front. 55 is a perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. 54 viewed from the back.

  As shown in the figure, the game effect unit 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 472 and an inner rail 462, and a player operates a handle unit 318 to play a game ball (simply “ A frame-shaped front component member 680 that defines and forms the outer periphery of the game area 20 into which the game area 20 is to be driven, and a transparent plate-like game that is disposed so as to close the game area 20 behind the front component member 680 A panel-shaped panel holder 540 that covers the outer periphery of the panel 409 and the game panel 409 and holds the game panel 409 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear side of the front component 680, and is attached to the rear side of the panel holder 540 A rear unit 510 to be displayed, and an effect display device 115 as an effect display means arranged on the rear side of the back unit 510 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. Eteiru. The effect display device 115 is provided with a larger one (for example, about 21 inches) than the effect display device used in the conventional pachinko machine.

  In the game area 20 of the game effect unit 4, a frame-shaped center accessory 620 is disposed at a substantially central portion, and the effect display device 115 is forwarded from the front (player) through the frame of the center accessory 620. The effect image to be displayed can be visually recognized. A chucker inlet 1601 and a chucker outlet 1602 are formed on the left edge of the outer periphery of the center accessory 620 so as to be lined up and down. (Passing gate 612) is formed (see FIG. 59). A gate sensor 760 that detects a game ball that circulates is provided in the passage gate 612, and after the game ball that has entered from the chucker inlet 1601 is detected by the gate sensor 760, The game area 20 is returned to the left side.

  In addition, a warp inlet 1605 is formed below the chucker outlet 1602 in the center accessory 620, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 1605 passes through the warp passage 1606, and a lower frame of the center accessory 620. It is guided on a stage 1607 formed on the upper surface.

  In this game area 20, an attacker unit 600 is disposed below the center of the center accessory 620. The attacker unit 600 has a first start port 602 that is always open upward and a game ball can be won, and a second start port 604 that is provided below the first start port 602 and has a pair of movable pieces 606 that can be opened and closed. , And an opening / closing device 500 disposed below the second start port 604. When the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the closed state, the second start port 604 is unable to receive the game ball or difficult to receive, and when the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the open state, The game ball can be received more easily than the start port 602. Since the first start port 602 is arranged immediately above the second start port 604, the player can aim for the winning of the game ball to the first start port 602 or the second start by the launch position of the game ball. It is difficult to aim for winning a game ball in the mouth 604. In other words, as long as the player is generally firing a game ball toward a position where the game ball is to be launched (for example, the left side of the center role 620), the game can be played at either the first start port 602 or the second start port. A ball can win.

  The opening / closing device 500 includes a special prize opening 500a and a special prize opening / closing door 500b provided corresponding to the special prize opening 500a. The big prize opening 500a is an opening that can accept a game ball. The special prize opening / closing door 500b is a member for switching the special prize opening 500a between an open state in which a game ball can be received and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received or difficult. It should be noted that when the special winning opening 500a is in the closed state, it is not necessarily limited to the fact that it is not always possible to accept the game ball that is driven toward the game area 20, and it is difficult, preferably extremely difficult. good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the game area 20 has a winning port member 670 having two general winning ports 614, a special symbol display, a normal symbol display, and the like on the right side of the attacker unit 600. LED design display unit 80 is provided. A slope 683 having a lower left end is provided on the upper surface of the LED symbol display unit 80, and the game ball flowing down on the LED symbol display unit 80 is moved toward the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 20 by the slope 683. It is supposed to be.

  The LED symbol display unit 80 includes a first special symbol display 84 for displaying a result of an internal lottery process by a first special symbol lottery means 900 to be described later, and an internal lottery process by a second special symbol lottery means 910. The second special symbol display 86 for displaying the result of the first special symbol lottery means 900 to display the number of lottery suspension (the number of lottery processing by the first special symbol lottery means 900 in the hold state). A second special symbol for displaying the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol lottery means 910 (the number of lottery processes performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910 in the on-hold state). A hold indicator 90 is provided. Further, the LED symbol display unit 80 is provided with a normal symbol display 82 for displaying a lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920 and a normal symbol hold indicator 92 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the normal symbol lottery means 920. It has been. These displays can recognize that a plurality of processes relating to the progress of the game sequentially executed by a main control board 710 described later are functioning based on control data stored in a RAM 713 described later. It can also be said to be a main control function diagnostic display.

  Each of these indicators 82, 84, 86, 88, 90, 92 is composed of, for example, an LED, and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the second special symbol lottery means, depending on the lighting state of this LED. The lottery result by 910, the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920, the holding number of lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the holding number of lotteries by the second special symbol lottery means 910, and the holding number of lotteries by the normal symbol lottery means 920 Is notified.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the “number of lottery holds” refers to the number of holds for the determination (lottery process) of whether or not the acquired random number for determination is correct, although the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired. This means, but is not limited to this, and may be the number of hold determination random numbers for which the acquisition / determination random number is suspended and the acquisition is suspended.

  In the present embodiment, the holding number of lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 900 may be referred to as “the holding number of the first special symbol” or “the number of starting memories of the first special symbol”. In addition, the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 may be referred to as “second special symbol hold number” or “second special symbol start memory number”.

  Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold indicator 90 may be the number of lots to be held instead of the lottery hold number. In other words, although it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained and whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the determination result is not displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. , The number of such hold may be displayed.

  The game area 20 further includes a guide member 690 that guides the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 620 in the direction of the attacker unit 600 on the side opposite to the LED symbol display unit 80 in the left-right direction. ing. A slope 691 having a lower right end is formed on the upper surface of the guide member 690, and the game ball is guided to the center side where the attacker unit 600 is arranged by the slope 691.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a game ball wins the general winning port 614, the first starting port 602, the second starting port 604, and the big winning port 500a, a predetermined number of gaming balls are set according to the winning port. Will be paid out. For example, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 614, 10 game balls win three winning balls when entering the first starting slot 602, and four gaming balls win when winning the second starting slot 604. Then, when a prize is entered in the grand prize winning opening 500a, 13 game balls are paid out.

  In addition, when a game ball that has entered from the chucker entrance 1601 is detected by the gate sensor 760, a predetermined lottery is performed, and after the symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display 82, a symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. Is done. When a symbol suggesting “winning” is displayed on the normal symbol display 82, the pair of movable pieces 606 having the second start port 604 closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), Winning can be made to the second start port 604.

  On the other hand, when a game ball wins one of the first start port 602 and the second start port 604, a random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, and a predetermined lottery is performed when a special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. Then, after the special symbol variation display based on the lottery is started, a predetermined mode indicating the lottery result in either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 corresponding to the lottery. The special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, a game in which the big prize opening / closing door 500b of the opening / closing device 500 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (for example, A big hit game) occurs, and during that time, a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 500a, so that more game balls can be obtained. The special symbol variation start condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display is not performed on either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. In addition, when the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86, the special symbol variation start condition is satisfied when the variation display ends.

  In the game effect unit 4 of this example, a game panel 409 having a obstacle nail planted on the front surface (front surface) has a transparent plate shape, and the player can visually recognize the rear side of the game panel 409. As described above, various decorations and the like of the back unit 510 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 409 can be visually recognized through the game panel 409.

<Retaining structure of game panel in game effect unit>
The holding structure of the game panel 409 in the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the front component member, the game panel, and the panel holder in the game effect unit cut in the vertical direction in an assembled state. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of a front component member, a game panel, a panel holder, and the like that mainly constitute the game effect unit, as viewed from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 57 viewed from the back.

  As described above, the game effect unit 4 of the present embodiment includes a plate-like game panel 409 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 20, and a composite that holds the game panel 409 detachably from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 540 made of resin, and an outer rail 472 and an inner rail 462 that are arranged on the front side of the panel holder 540 and define the outer periphery of the game area 20 and guide the game ball into the game area 20 are provided. And a plate-like panel back plate 504 disposed in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540.

  As shown in the figure, the front component member 680 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 680a and positioning protrusions 680b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although the positioning boss 680a and the positioning projection 680b will be described in detail later, the positioning boss 680a and the positioning projection 680b can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 540, the substrate holder 505, and the game panel 409 disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 409 in the gaming effect unit 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 20, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or the like. Yes. The game panel 409 is thinner than the panel holder 540 and has a minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail 410 (see FIG. 56) is installed. Yes.

  The gaming panel 409 has a plurality of fitting holes 409a formed by round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 409b extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b are disposed outside the game area 20, and are positioned with the panel holder 540. Further, the game panel 409 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 409c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 409c has a shape in which approximately half of the thickness of the game panel 409 is cut out, and is disposed outside the game area 20 in the same manner as the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b. The game panel 409 is engaged and fixed to the panel holder 540.

  The game panel 409 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 409d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 462 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 680b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 462 into the inner rail fixing hole 409d.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 56, the gaming panel 409 has a lower hole 409f for planting the obstacle nail 410 so as to penetrate the gaming panel 409. The lower hole 409f The inner diameter of the hanger 410 is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the obstacle nail 410 on the planting side. A plurality of lower holes 409f are drilled at predetermined positions in the game panel 409, and obstacle nails 410 are planted in the lower holes 409f from the front side by using an obstacle nail planting device (not shown). A large number of obstacle nails 410 are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

  The obstacle nail 410 according to the present embodiment has a head diameter of 4 to 5 mm and a total length of 25 to 30 mm. And the driving | running | working part formed in the axial part of the obstruction nail 410 is rounded at the front-end | tip, and the helical part cut | disconnected helically is formed. That is, since the tip shape of the driving portion of the obstacle nail 410 is rounded, the obstacle nail 410 can be easily inserted into the small-diameter pilot hole 409f. Furthermore, it is easy to embed the obstacle nail 410 in the game panel 409 by the torsion part formed in the driving part of the obstacle nail 410. The depth at which the obstacle nail 410 is implanted with respect to the game panel 409 (so-called driving dimension) is preferably about 10 mm.

  Further, the game panel 409 is formed with an opening 409e having a predetermined inner diameter and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with a center accessory 620, an attacker unit 600, a prize opening member 670, an LED symbol display portion 80, and the like. In addition, fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions.

  The panel holder 540 in the game effect unit 4 has a size that includes the game panel 409 and has a substantially rectangular shape, and is a member made of wooden plywood in the game effect unit of a conventional pachinko machine (for example, a game effect unit base). It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 540 includes a holding step 540a that detachably holds the game panel 409 and that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 20 inside the holding step 540a. It mainly includes a through-hole 540b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 540a of the panel holder 540 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 409, and the front surface of the game panel 409 held in the holding step portion 540a is the front surface of the panel holder 540. It is designed to be almost the same surface. Further, the holding step portion 540 a has a front inner peripheral surface having a predetermined amount of clearance C with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 409. With this clearance C, even if the game panel 409 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed (see FIG. 56). An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b formed in the game panel 409 held by the holding step portion 540a, and forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 540a. A plurality of projecting pins 540c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b of the game panel 409 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 540c into the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b of the game panel 409, the panel holder 540 and the game panel 409 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with an engaging claw 540d and an engaging piece 540e that engage with the engaging step portion 409c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 409c of the game panel 409. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the engaging claw 540d is disposed on the upper holding step portion 540a of the panel holder 540, and corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 409c of the game panel 409. The holding step 540a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step 409c. The engagement claw 540d has a size that does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 540. On the other hand, the engagement piece 540e is disposed on the lower holding step portion 540a of the panel holder 540, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 540a. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 540 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 409c of the panel 409 to be inserted is formed. By engaging the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409 with the engagement claws 540d and the engagement pieces 540e, the game panel 409 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 540.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with a boss insertion hole 540f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 680a provided in the front component member 680 can be inserted. By inserting the positioning boss 680a of the front component 680 through the boss insertion hole 540f, the panel holder 540 and the front component 680 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 58, the panel holder 540 has a mounting support portion 540g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. Is provided. With this attachment support portion 540g, the rear surface of the panel holder 540 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height and the rear outer peripheral portion protrudes backward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth) is about 2.5 mm that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 514d (see FIG. 67, etc.) of the back box 514 in the back unit 510 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 540g. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 540g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 514d from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 540, and the panel holder 540, that is, the game effect unit 4 is connected to the pachinko machine. It is possible to reliably install and install in one game effect unit installation recess 30.

  In addition, the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 540g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 504. And a locking portion 540i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the receiving recess 540h in the front-rear direction and that can lock a locking claw 504c formed on the panel back plate 504. The housing recess 540h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 504 by engaging the locking claw 504c of the panel back plate 504 with the locking portion 540i, and the rear surface of the accommodated panel back plate 504 is a panel. The holder 540 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the panel holder 540 has a plurality of mounting holes 540j arranged in a rear surface side of the mounting support portion 540g and on the upper side of the housing recess 540h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw in a predetermined arrangement. Is arranged. Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 540k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 540j. The positioning hole 540k is for inserting a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion 514f formed on the fixing portion 514d of the back box 514) formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 540j. In this example, the positioning hole 540k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the back.

  The mounting hole 540j has a large diameter and a small diameter mixed so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixed. 540j may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 540l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 540 is reduced by the thinned portions 540l. It has become. By the way, as shown in FIG. 57, these thinning portions 540l are not formed in a predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 540h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 540 to a predetermined height. That is, within this predetermined range, since the front surface of the panel holder 540 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 477 of the front component member 680 disposed on the front surface is substantially flat. Become. Therefore, the game balls launched from the launching device 57 are smoothly guided. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 540 is formed with a thinned portion 540l so that the mounting holes 540j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 540. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 540 is formed with an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning portion 540m corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 409 on the obstacle nail planting device. It can be set in the state. Further, an opening 540n that communicates with the out port 471 of the front component 680 and a communication hole 540o that communicates with the foul port 489 of the front component 680 are further provided at the lower portion of the panel holder 540.

  Next, the panel back plate 504 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 so as to cover the lightening portion 540l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing recess 540h of the panel holder 540 A plurality of screw holes 504a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the planar rear surface, and can be screwed into predetermined screws, and a plurality of screw holes 504a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 504a. A positioning hole 504b, a locking claw 504c that can be locked to the locking portion 540i of the panel holder 540, and a concave portion 504d for reducing the weight so as not to penetrate from the front side are provided.

  The screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 504b in the panel back plate 504 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting holes 540j and the positioning holes 540k in the panel holder 540. Similarly to the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 504b are formed by the recessed portion 504d, and supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 504, grid-like ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 504 is provided with an opening 504e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 540n of the panel holder 540, the communication hole 540o, and the boss insertion hole 540f.

  The panel back plate 504 is housed in the housing recess 540h of the panel holder 540, and the locking claw 504c of the panel back plate 504 is locked to the locking portion 540i of the panel holder 540, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 540. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 504 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 540. By integrating the panel holder 540 and the panel back plate 504 in this way, the mounting holes 540j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 540b over substantially the entire circumference. An attachment hole made up of 504a and the like and positioning holes 540k and 504b are arranged, and the presence of these attachment holes makes it possible to attach and fix a predetermined member at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the gaming panel 409 in this example, the gaming panel 409 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 540a of the panel holder 540 from the front, and the engaging claws 540d and the engaging pieces 540e By engaging the engagement step portion 409c, the game panel 409 can be held by the panel holder 540, and the front side of the game panel 409 and the panel holder 540 are substantially flush with each other. Therefore, it becomes possible to set the game panel 409 on the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding the game panel 409 on the panel holder 540 without modifying the conventionally used obstacle nail planting device. An increase in the cost of planting can be suppressed.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 having the game area 20 is divided into a game panel 409, a panel holder 540, and a front component member 680. The game panel 409 with a variable speed can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 540 and the front component member 680 can be used as a common part. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the game effect unit 4 that can be adapted to various types of models by simply exchanging only 409 can be obtained.

  Further, since the panel holder 540 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 540j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various predetermined units such as the back unit 510 and the substrate holder 505 that are mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 according to the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the members are different from each other, the panel holder 540 is designed to correspond to the position of the mounting hole 540j, so that the panel holder 540 and the common parts of the pachinko machine 1 are independent of the model. Can be done.

  As described above, in the game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment, at least the game panel 409 is configured by the transparent member, and the electrical decorations and the like arranged behind can be visually recognized through the game panel 409. In other words, it is not necessary to provide an electric decoration or the like in the game area, and the area where the game ball can actually flow down in the game area 20 can be made as wide as possible. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Moreover, since the game panel 409 in which the game area 20 is formed is configured by a transparent member, the player can visually recognize what is arranged behind the game panel 409. For example, a large effect display device 115 that extends over the entire game area 20 is arranged behind the game panel 409 to display an unprecedented large effect image, and various effects and decorations are displayed in depth. It can be set as the structure of the game production | presentation unit 4 with a sense of depth which is not arranged until now. Thereby, it becomes possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract the player's interest.

<Center role>
A detailed configuration of the center accessory 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. FIG. 59 is a front view of the center accessory. FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed from the front. FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the back.

  The center accessory 620 has a size that occupies a width of three quarters or more with respect to the width direction of the game area 20 (see FIG. 51 and the like), and is substantially around the periphery of the opening 409e formed in the game panel 409. It is formed in a frame shape along. An effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 arranged behind can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 620.

  On the upper edge of the center accessory 620, an effect decoration body 1608 in which letters “MAGMA ZONE” and “FREEZE ZONE” are formed in a circular shape is disposed slightly from the center in the left-right direction. Yes. On the upper surface of the effect decoration body 1608, a guide shelf 1609 having a lower right side is provided, and a game ball that has been driven to the upper side of the effect decoration body 1608 is guided to the induction shelf 1609, and plays a center role. The object 620 is guided to the right outer periphery. On the other hand, the upper surface on the left side of the decoration body 1608 for production at the upper edge is provided with a guide shelf 1610 having a lower left side, and the game ball that has flowed down on the guide shelf 1610 is the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 620. To be guided to.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the effect decoration body 1608 of the center accessory 620 is formed so that a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between the guide shelf 1609 and the inner peripheral upper portion of the game area 20. It extends upward. As long as the game ball driven into the game area 20 does not roll along the inner periphery of the game area 20, it does not flow down the right outer periphery of the center accessory 620 beyond the effect decoration body 1608. Yes.

  At the left edge of the center accessory 620, a chucker inlet 1601, a chucker outlet 1602, and a warp inlet 1605 are provided on the outer peripheral surface from above. The chucker inlet 1601 and the chucker outlet 1602 communicate with each other as a passing gate 612. A game sensor circulating in the passage gate 612 can be detected by the gate sensor 760 disposed in the passage gate 612.

  In addition, a right edge guide path 1611 in which a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between the outer periphery of the center accessory 620 and the inner periphery right part of the game area 20 at the right edge part. The game ball guided to the guide shelf 1609 beyond the decoration for decoration 1608 is supplied to the slope 683 of the LED symbol display unit 80 through the right edge guide path 1611. Yes. The right edge guide path 1611 is formed with a plurality of ridges 1612 protruding toward the inside of the guide path, and a game ball flowing through the right edge guide path 1611 abuts on the ridges 1612. It is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the game ball from being attenuated and the flow speed of the game ball from increasing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent damage to the LED symbol display unit 80 and the like disposed below the right edge guiding path 1611 due to the game balls released from the right edge guiding path 1611.

  A stage 1607 on which a game ball can roll in the left-right direction is formed at the lower edge of the center accessory 620 on the upper surface in the frame. The stage 1607 has a shape in which the center in the left-right direction is lowered, and includes a first stage 1607a and a second stage 1607b that have different rolling surfaces and are arranged in the front-rear direction. A first start port 602, a second start port 604, and a big prize opening 500a are arranged below the center of the stage 1607 in the left-right direction. The game balls that have entered the warp inlet 1605 are supplied to the stage 1607, and when the game balls flowing down the left side of the center object 620 in the game area 20 enter the warp inlet 1605, the stage After being supplied onto 1607 and rolling on the stage 1607 in the left-right direction, the game balls can be released to the first start port 602 and the second start port 604 so that they can win with high probability. Yes.

  The center accessory 620 of this example has a flange-like portion 620a that contacts the front peripheral edge of the opening 409e in the game panel 409, and the flange-like portion 620a extends in a substantially right angle direction and is inserted into the opening 409e of the game panel 409. Insertion portion 620b. By the flange-shaped portion 620a and the insertion portion 620b, the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 409e in the game panel 409 is hidden from the player. The insertion portion 620b is configured such that a part thereof extends to the vicinity of the front surface of the effect display device 115 inside the back unit 510. Although details will be described later, the insertion portion 620b of the center accessory 620 is formed in a shape such that a part thereof is continuous with the wall-shaped side surface of the light emitting decorative body 1720 disposed in the back unit 510.

  The center accessory 620 is composed of a member that combines a white opaque member and a white translucent member from the decorative element 1608 at the upper edge to the lower end of the right edge. From the guide shelf 1610 arranged on the left side of 1608, the left edge portion and the lower edge portion (including the stage 1607) are formed of a colorless transparent member. The outer surface of the center accessory 620 is shaped into a shape simulating ice or an iceberg.

<Attacker unit and prize opening member>
The configurations of the attacker unit 600 and the winning prize opening member 670 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62A is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the front and obliquely upward, and FIG. 62B is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the obliquely upward and rear side.

  The attacker unit 600 is inserted from the front into the opening 409e of the game panel 409, and protrudes from the rear side of the game panel 409 to the rear, and extends from the front surface of the casing 600a along the surface of the game panel 409. The flange part 600b contact | abutted with the front side peripheral part of the part 409e is provided. The casing 600a includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 774 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 606 for opening and closing the second start opening 604, and a large winning opening opening / closing door 500b for opening and closing the large winning opening 500a of the opening / closing device 500. An opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 for driving the opening / closing device, and the normal electric accessory solenoid 774 and the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 are respectively connected to a pair of movable pieces 606 and a prize opening opening / closing door 500b by a link mechanism (not shown). Can be opened and closed.

  Further, the casing 600a is provided with a second start port sensor 782 for detecting a game ball won in the second start port 604, and an opening / closing device count sensor 776 for detecting a game ball won in the big winning port 500a. Yes. Although not shown, the game balls detected by the second start port sensor 782 and the opening / closing device count sensor 776 are discharged downward from different discharge ports formed on the lower surface of the casing 600a. ing.

  As shown in the figure, a first start port 602, a second start port 604, and a general winning port 614 are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 600b of the attacker unit 600 so as to protrude forward. Further, a guide rod 1641 integrally formed with the flange portion 600b extends rearward from the first start port 602 and the general winning port 614. A plurality of through holes 1642 are formed in the flange portion 600b, and the attacker unit 600 is attached to the game panel 409 by screwing a predetermined screw into the front surface of the game panel 409 through the attachment holes 1642. It can be fixed.

  Reference numeral 1643 in the figure is a protrusion for positioning the fixed position of the attacker unit 600 with respect to the game panel 409, and a positioning hole into which the protrusion 1643 is inserted at the position of the game panel 409 corresponding to the protrusion 1643. Are drilled (not shown).

  On the other hand, the winning hole member 670 includes a main body portion 1671 having two general winning holes 614 arranged in the vertical direction, a flange portion 1672 extending from the rear of the main body portion 1671 along the front surface of the game panel 409, and a main body portion. And a guide rod 1673 extending rearward from each of the general winning ports 614 of 1671. The flange portion 1672 of the winning opening member 670 is formed with a mounting hole 1694 that passes therethrough, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the front surface of the gaming panel 409 through the mounting hole 1694 so that the winning port member 670 is connected to the gaming panel. It can be fixed to 409.

  In addition, each of the guide rods 1641 and 1673 of the above-described attacker unit 600 and prize opening member 670 has a length that extends rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 409 through the opening 409e of the game panel 409. Guide rods 1641 and 1673 communicate with a ball guide unit 1760 provided in the back unit 510 described later, and a game ball guided through each guide rod 1641 and 1673 is detected by each sensor in the ball guide unit 1760. After being discharged, it is discharged downward.

  Further, in this example, the attacker unit 600 and the winning prize opening member 670 are formed of a white non-translucent member, and, similar to the above-described center actor 620, the outer shape and the image of ice such as icebergs and snow. It is considered as a color.

<Board holder>
The configuration of the substrate holder 505 will be described with reference to FIGS. The board holder 505 in the game effect unit 4 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel back plate 504, has a box shape with the front and upper sides opened, and includes a game ball discharge port 505a and a bottom plate 505b. The game ball discharge port 505a is a game medium discharge port having a size through which a game ball can pass. The bottom plate 505b is a plate-like portion that is inclined so that the upper surface thereof becomes lower toward the game ball outlet 505a. The substrate holder 505 collects game balls that have been driven into the game area 20 and can discharge them downward from the game ball discharge port 505a. The substrate holder 505 supports the main control substrate box 25 having the main control substrate 710 on the back side thereof.

  Further, the substrate holder 505 is provided with a cylindrical fixed boss 505e that fits with the positioning boss 680a of the front component 680 at a predetermined position on the front side thereof. Then, the fixed boss 505 e is fitted to the positioning boss 680 a of the front component 680 with the panel holder 540 sandwiched between the fixed boss 505 e and the front component 680. At the same time, by screwing a predetermined screw into the positioning boss 680a of the front component 680 through the through hole 505f penetrating the fixed boss 505e from the rear of the substrate holder 505, the front component 680, the panel holder 540, and the substrate holder 505 are attached. It can be fixed together.

  Further, the substrate holder 505 is provided with an opening receiving portion 505g communicating with the communication port 473 of the front component member 680 at the lower part of the front surface thereof. The opening receiving portion 505g can guide the game ball to the lower side of the substrate holder 505 at a position different from the game ball discharge port 505a. The “dead ball” received inside the substrate holder 505 can be distinguished from the game ball that was missed when the game ball was driven into the game area 20.

  With this structure, the main members (the front component member 680, the game panel 409, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, the board holder 505, etc.) constituting the game effect unit 4 can be easily and integrally assembled. In particular, a transparent resin game panel 409 is suitably held, and a center role 620, a back unit 510, an effect display device 115, and the like are arranged before and after the game panel 409, thereby providing an unprecedented depth game. The production unit 4 can be realized.

<Back unit>
A detailed configuration of the back unit 510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a front view of the back unit. FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the rear unit as viewed from the front and obliquely above. FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the rear and obliquely above. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front upper side. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view in which the rear unit is disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the rear. 68A is an exploded perspective view of the upper left light emitting decorative body in the back unit disassembled for each member and is shown from obliquely upward on the front side, and FIG. 68B is an exploded perspective view of the diffuser lens member in FIG. FIG. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the lower left light-emitting decorative body in the back unit, which is disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the upper front. 70A is an exploded perspective view in which the upper right light emitting decorative body in the back unit is disassembled for each member and is seen from obliquely upward on the front side, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every and was seen from diagonally forward. FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right corner light emitting decorative body in the back unit, which is disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the upper front.

  FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the right middle movable light-emitting decorative body as seen obliquely from the front and above. 73A is a left side view showing a state in which the pair of first surface forming members in the middle right movable light emitting decorative body is opened, and FIG. 73B shows a state in which the pair of first surface forming members are closed. It is a left view shown. FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the upper left movable light emitting decorative body as seen obliquely from the upper front. FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view showing the moving mechanism in the upper left movable light emitting decoration. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the mobile assembly in the upper left movable light emitting decorative body in an exploded manner. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the lower left movable light emitting decorative body as seen obliquely from the upper front. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view showing the moving mechanism in the lower left movable light emitting decorative body in an exploded manner. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view showing the moving body assembly in the lower left movable light emitting decorative body in an exploded manner. FIG. 80 is a front view of the upper left middle light emitting decorative body. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view showing the upper left upper light emitting decorative body in an exploded manner. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view showing the left middle lower light emitting decorative body in an exploded manner. 83 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG.

  The back unit 510 in the game effect unit 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a box-shaped box having a predetermined depth (depth) that is attached to the rear side of the panel holder 540 and opened on the front side, and penetrates the rear wall 514a. A back box 514 having 514b, and a plurality of light emitting decorations 1720 arranged on the outer periphery of the opening 514b of the rear wall 514a in the back box 514.

  The back box 514 in the back unit 510 has a rectangular outer shape in front view and a rectangular tube-shaped outer tube portion 514c extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width, and a plurality of flange-shaped flange portions extending outward from the front end of the outer tube portion 514c. A fixing portion 514d, a rear wall 514a for closing the rear end opening of the outer cylinder portion 514c, and a rectangular opening 514b penetrating the rear wall 514a are provided. A fixing hole 514e penetrating in the front-rear direction and a positioning projection 514f protruding forward are formed in the fixing portion 514d. After the fixing portion 514d is brought into contact with the rear surface side of the panel holder 540, a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting holes 540j and 504a of the panel holder 540 and the panel back plate 504 through the fixing hole 514e. The box 514, that is, the back unit 510 can be attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 540. Further, the positioning protrusion 514f can be positioned in the relative position between the panel holder 540 and the back unit 510 by fitting with the positioning holes 540k and 504b formed on the rear side of the panel holder 540 and the panel back plate 504. It has become. In addition, as shown in the drawing, some of the fixing portions 514d are not formed with positioning protrusions 514f.

  On the rear wall 514a of the back box 514, an attachment hole for attaching and fixing the light emitting decorative body 1720 and the like, a boss having an attachment hole formed at the tip, and the like are formed at appropriate positions on the front side. Further, on the rear surface side of the rear wall 514a, a panel relay terminal plate fixing portion 514g for mounting and fixing the panel relay terminal plate 750 (see FIGS. 55 and 84) and a first connected to the panel relay terminal plate 750 are provided. A first decoration control board box fixing portion 514h for attaching and fixing the first decoration control board box 1713 having the decoration control board 746 (see FIG. 85), and a first decoration control board 746 of the first decoration control board box 1713. A second decoration control board box fixing portion 514i for mounting and fixing a second decoration control board box 1715 having a second decoration control board 748 (see FIG. 85) connected to

  The panel relay terminal board 750 is a relay board for connecting the main control board 710 of the main control board box 25 and the game effect unit 4. Further, the first decoration control board 746 is the LED 1740 (corresponding to the unit decoration lamp 852 in FIG. 85) on each board (upper left board 1726h, lower left board 1730h, left middle board 1748, etc.) included in each light emitting decoration body 1720. It is a control board for controlling a light emission mode. In addition, the second decoration control board 748 is provided with each moving mechanism 1725d, each moving mechanism 1725d, and the like in each board (right middle movable light emitting decoration body 1725, upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726, lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730, etc.). It is a control board for controlling the drive mode of 1726b, 1730b (equivalent to the drive unit for effect 854 in FIG. 85). That is, the first decoration control board 746 and the second decoration control board 748 cooperate with each other to control decorations of the light emitting decorations 1720 and the like.

  Further, the back box 514 is provided with liquid crystal fixing portions 514j for detachably mounting and fixing the effect display device 115 on the left and right sides of the opening 514b on the rear surface side of the rear wall 514a. The liquid crystal fixing part 514j on one of the left and right sides (right side as viewed from the back) is provided with a slide piece 1716 that can slide in the vertical direction. The fixing piece 115a (see FIGS. 54 and 55) of the effect display device 115 is inserted into the liquid crystal fixing portion 514j, and the opposite fixing piece (not shown) is inserted into the corresponding liquid crystal fixing portion 514j, and the slide piece. The effect display device 115 can be attached and fixed to the rear side of the back box 514 by sliding 1716 downward.

  The back box 514 is in a state where the effect display device 115 is closed by the effect display device 115 by attaching and fixing the effect display device 115 to the rear surface side of the rear wall 514a. Then, by attaching and fixing the effect display device 115 to the back box 514, the back box 514 becomes a box shape whose front is opened by the cylindrical outer tube portion 514c, the rear wall 514a, and the effect display device 115. With the back box 514, a space of a predetermined volume that is substantially sealed except for the front side can be formed on the rear side of the game panel 409. In this example, a light emitting decorative body 1720 capable of various effects is arranged in this space. A game ball may be distributed in this space. Further, as shown in the figure, the back box 514 of this example does not have a rear wall 514a formed on a single plane, and the distance (depth) from the front surface of the back box 514 to the rear wall 514a is 50 mm to 100 mm. It is within the range.

  That is, the back box 514 is formed with an opening 514b substantially in the center, and the effect display device 115 is arranged so as to face the opening 514b. The back unit 510 is attached to the back side of the game panel 409 so as to form an effect space 510G described later. The effect display device 115 is arranged so that the liquid crystal display surface is substantially parallel to the game panel 409, and thereby, the effect display is performed from the front side of the game effect unit 4 through the opening of the center accessory 620. The liquid crystal display surface of the device 115 becomes visible. Note that a transparent shielding plate that shields from the game area 20 is provided in the opening of the center accessory 620, and the rear of this shielding plate is also included in the above-described effect space 510G.

  A light emitting decoration body 1720 in the back unit 510 includes an upper left light emitting decoration body 1721 disposed from the upper left center in the back box 514, an upper right light emitting decoration body 1722 disposed adjacent to the right side of the upper left light emitting decoration body 1721, A lower left light emitting decoration body 1723 arranged from the lower left center in the back box 514 and a lower right light emission decoration body 1724 arranged adjacent to the right side of the lower left light emission decoration body 1723 are provided. In addition, a right middle movable light emitting decoration body 1725 that is movable in accordance with the gaming state is disposed on the right side in the back box 514 at the substantially vertical center.

  Further, the light emitting decoration body 1720 is disposed at the upper left end in the back box 514 and adjacent to the left side of the upper left light emission decoration body 1721, and is movable in accordance with the gaming state. The left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 disposed adjacent to the lower side of the decorative body 1726 and the left middle light emitting element disposed adjacent to the lower side of the left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 and approximately at the center in the vertical direction of the back unit 510. The decorative body 1728, the left middle lower light emitting decoration body 1729 arranged adjacent to the lower side of the left middle light emitting decoration body 1728, and the lower left light emitting decoration body 1723 adjacent to the lower side of the left middle lower light emitting decoration body 1729. A lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730 which is arranged adjacent to the left side and can be moved according to the gaming state, and these upper left movable light emission decoration body 1726, left middle upper light emission decoration body 1727, left middle light emission decoration body 1728, lower left middle decoration body. Light emission Kazaritai 1729 and lower left movable luminous decorative body 1730, is as shown, the left end of the back box 514, are arranged in the vertical direction.

  On the left side of the back box 514, the light emitting decorations 1720 arranged in the vertical direction have the letter “E” on the front surface of the upper left movable light emission decoration body 1726 and “AG” on the front surface of the left middle upper light emission decoration body 1727. , The letter “CE” is formed on the front face of the left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729, and the letter “I” is formed on the front face of the lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730, respectively. The “ICEAGE” logo, which characterizes the model, is now appearing.

  Although the right middle movable light emitting decorative body 1725 will be described in detail later, when the pair of first surface forming members 1725a is opened, the second surface forming member 1725b appears to protrude, and the pair of first surface forming members 1725a When closed, the second surface forming member 1725b can be retracted and hidden.

  Further, the upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726 and the lower left movable light emission decoration body 1730 can be moved in the left-right direction, respectively, and the left half of the upper left light emission decoration body 1721 and the lower left light emission decoration body 1723 in the state of moving to the rightmost side. Is formed so that it can be substantially covered.

  The light emitting decorative body 1720 further includes a right lower corner light emitting decorative body 1731 disposed at the lower right corner in the back box 514 and disposed adjacent to the right side of the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724. 66 and 67, reference numeral 1732 is an upper left corner decoration member disposed on the front surface of the upper left corner of the back box 514, and reference numeral 1733 is a lower left corner decoration member disposed on the front surface of the lower left corner of the back box 514. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 includes a first surface forming member 1721a and a first surface forming member 1721a having a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined. A second surface forming member 1721b having a shape formed by combining a plurality of curved ridges disposed adjacent to the first surface forming member 1721a and a diffusion disposed on the rear side of the first surface forming member 1721a and the second surface forming member 1721b. The lens member 1721c is composed of an upper left substrate 1741 and a part of the upper right back substrate 1744, which are arranged on the rear side of the diffuser lens member 1721c and have a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted on the surface thereof.

  The first surface forming member 1721a of the upper left light-emitting decorative body 1721 is formed in a multi-sided shape using a blue transparent member and having an angular surface shape. That is, a plurality of relatively large multi-faceted prisms are formed on the surface, whereby light from the front side and light from the LED 1740 are gently diffused to express a waved sea surface (water surface). Is. The second surface forming member 1721b uses a red transparent member, and a plurality of ridges with curved surface shapes are arranged in a curved line to represent flowing lava (magma). It is.

  The diffuser lens member 1721c of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 is made of a colorless and transparent member, and has a plurality of first ridges 1721d extending in the up and down direction in a curved shape on the front side, and a rear surface. There are a plurality of second ridges 1721e arranged on the side at intervals smaller than the arrangement interval of the first ridges 1721d and extending in the left-right direction in a wavy shape in cross section (see FIG. 68B). The front surface of the diffusing lens member 1721c expresses a flow in the same manner as the second surface forming member 1721b by the first convex line 1721d. The second ridge 1721e expresses waves in the sea. In addition to the appearance due to the surface shape, the diffusion lens member 1721c can diffuse light from the LED 1740 disposed on the rear side more widely by the lens action of the first ridge 1721d and the second ridge 1721e. In addition, the thickness of the diffusing lens member 1721c can be reduced.

  The upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 has a configuration in which a diffusing lens member 1721c extends to the left side of the first surface forming member 1721a, and the extended portion does not go through the first surface forming member 1721a. It can be exposed directly to the front side. The portion of the diffusing lens member 1721c that extends to the left is covered with the front left exposure by the upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 with the upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 moved to the right end (see FIG. 63). The upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 is exposed to the front side in a state where it moves to the left end side.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 includes a first surface forming member 1723a and a first surface forming member 1723a having a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined. A second surface forming member 1723b which is arranged adjacent to the surface and has a surface shape of a combination of a plurality of curved ridges, and a diffusion which is arranged behind the first surface forming member 1723a and the second surface forming member 1723b. The lens member 1723c, and a lower left substrate 1742 and a part of the lower middle substrate 1745 arranged on the rear side of the diffusing lens member 1723c and having a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted thereon.

  Similarly to the upper left light-emitting decorative body 1721, the lower left light-emitting decorative body 1723 also has a first surface forming member 1723a made of a blue transparent member, and is waved by a plurality of relatively large multi-faceted prisms formed on the surface. While representing the standing sea surface, the second surface forming member 1723b represents a lava (magma) flowing out using a red transparent member. Further, the diffusing lens member 1723c has the same configuration as that of the diffusing lens member 1721c of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721, and a plurality of first ridges 1723d on the front side and a plurality of first ridges 1723d on the rear side with respect to the colorless and transparent member. Second ridges (not shown) are formed, respectively, so that light from the LEDs 1740 such as the lower left substrate 1742 can be diffused widely.

  The lower left light-emitting decorative body 1723 is configured such that a diffusing lens member 1723c extends to the left side of the first surface forming member 1723a, and the extended portion does not go through the first surface forming member 1723a. It can be exposed directly to the front side. The portion of the diffusing lens member 1723c that extends to the left is covered with the front left exposure by the lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730 in a state where the lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730 is moved to the right end side (see FIG. 63). The lower left movable light emitting decoration 1730 is exposed to the front side in a state of moving to the left end side.

  As shown in FIG. 70A, the upper right light emitting decorative body 1722 of the light emitting decorative body 1720 has a circular upper right front board 1743 having a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted on the surface and an upper right front board 1743 attached to the front side. A surface forming member 1722b having a circular substrate fixing portion 1722a that has a substantially flat front surface, and a decoration auxiliary member 1722c disposed at a position visible from the front side behind the surface forming member 1722b, The upper right back substrate 1744 and a part of the upper left substrate 1741 are arranged on the rear side of the surface forming member 1722b and the decoration auxiliary member 1722c, and a plurality of LEDs 1740 are mounted on the surface.

  A white translucent member is used for the surface forming member 1722b in the upper right light emitting decorative body 1722. Further, the decoration assisting member 1722c of the upper right light emitting decorative body 1722 uses a white non-translucent member, and the outer shape of the front view is a shape (see FIG. 63) in the image of a ground crack. A penetrating portion 1722d that penetrates in the direction and whose inner shape is substantially in line with the outer shape is provided. In addition, this penetration part 1722d has the form which was pulled out downward (open | released) in the lower end of the decoration auxiliary member 1722c.

  As shown in the figure, an inverted L-shape for supporting the left middle movable light emitting decoration body 1725 to the back box 514 is provided between the surface forming member 1722b and the decoration auxiliary member 1722c and the upper right back substrate 1744. A part of the support base 1735 is disposed, and a decoration auxiliary member 1722c is attached and fixed to an attachment boss 1735a formed on the front surface of the support base 1735. The support base 1735 is made of a colorless and transparent member, and can transmit light from the LED 1740 such as the upper right back substrate 1744 to the surface forming member 1722b side so that the light can be decorated in a good state.

  The upper right light emitting decorative body 1722 is disposed on the rear right side of the upper edge portion of the center accessory 620 including the effect decoration body 1608 and the guide shelf 1609 of the center accessory 620 described above. An upper right front substrate 1743 fixed to the front surface of the surface forming member 1722b is positioned at the rear position corresponding to the effect decoration body 1608. And the decoration part on the right side of the upper edge part of the center accessory 620 and the upper right light emitting decoration body 1722 cooperate to form an iceberg, clouded ice, and the like.

  The LED 1740 mounted on the surface of the upper right back substrate 1744 so as to correspond to the penetrating portion 1722d of the decoration auxiliary member 1722c is a red color that is completely different from the white light in addition to the same white light as the color of the surface forming member 1722b. Light (including orange) can also emit light. When the LED 1740 emits red light, it is possible to project a light emitting effect that shines red on the right side of the upper edge portion of the center accessory 620 in the form of a crack that is the same shape as the inner shape of the penetrating portion 1722d. Yes.

  Further, the surface forming member 1722b of the upper right light emitting decorative body 1722 has a wall-like side surface 1722e extending in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 67 and the like), and this wall-like side surface 1722e is substantially the same as the depth of the back box 514. The length is extended to the vicinity of the rear wall 514a of the back box 514.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (B), the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 is formed with a stepped plane substantially along the surface of the game effect unit 4 on the front surface side and extends in the front-rear direction on the side surface side. A surface forming member 1724a having a surface shape formed in a multi-surface shape in which a plurality of elongated planes are arranged in a side surface direction (a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction) and a rear surface of the surface forming member 1724a are arranged. The decorative auxiliary member 1724b is composed of a lower middle substrate 1745 and a lower right substrate 1746, which are disposed on the rear side of the surface forming member 1724a and the decorative auxiliary member 1724b, and a plurality of LEDs 1740 are mounted on the surface.

  As the surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724, a white translucent member is used and the front side surface is subjected to a textured process. Similarly to the decoration auxiliary member 1722c of the upper right light emitting decoration body 1722, the decoration auxiliary member 1724b uses a white light-impermeable member, and the external shape of the front view is a shape that looks like a ground crack. In addition, a penetrating portion 1724c penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner shape substantially parallel to the outer shape is provided.

  In the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724, the LED 1740 arranged at a position corresponding to the through-hole 1724c of the decoration auxiliary member 1724b on the lower right substrate 1746 arranged on the rear side of the decoration auxiliary member 1724b is connected to the surface forming member 1724a. In addition to white light having the same color, red light (including orange) completely different from white light can be emitted. When the LED 1740 emits red light, the surface forming member 1724a can project a light emitting effect that shines red in the shape of a crack that is the same shape as the inner shape of the penetrating portion 1724c.

  As shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724 is disposed on the rear side of the attacker unit 600 and the winning hole member 670, and the rear end of the attacker unit 600 is attached to the surface forming member 1724a. A notch portion 1724d that can be inserted, and an insertion portion 1724e that can be inserted through the guide rod 1673 of the winning opening member 670 are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 70B, a ball guiding unit 1760 is disposed between the surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724 and the lower middle substrate 1745 and the lower right substrate 1746. The ball guiding unit 1760 includes an attacker unit 600 and a prize opening member 670 that protrude to the rear side of the surface forming member 1724a through the notch 1724d and the insertion portion 1724e formed in the surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724. After receiving the game balls guided by the guide rods 1641 and 1673, it is detected by a sensor which one of the winning holes is won and discharged downward. The sphere guiding unit 1760 is formed of a thin white transparent member, and can sufficiently transmit light emitted from the LEDs 1740 such as the lower middle substrate 1745 and the lower right substrate 1746 to the surface forming member 1724a side. At the same time, the light from the LED 1740 can be diffused.

  In this example, the surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724 is a white translucent member, and the attacker unit 600 and the winning opening member 670 are white non-translucent members, so that a ball guide is provided. Units 1760 are each formed of a white transparent member. For this reason, the surface forming member 1724a can make it difficult for the player side to see the portion of the attacker unit 600 and the winning hole member 670 protruding rearward from the game panel 409 and the ball guiding unit 1760. Yes. More specifically, the color of the surface forming member 1724a (in this case, white) is substantially the same as the colors of the attacker unit 600, the winning opening member 670, and the ball guiding unit 1760. The colors of the attacker unit 600, the ball guiding unit 1760, and the like are mixed with the color. Thereby, the ball guiding unit 1760 and the like disposed on the rear side of the surface forming member 1724a can be made difficult to see from the front side.

  Further, the surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724 has a wall-like side surface 1724f extending in the front-rear direction, and this wall-like side surface 1724f has a length substantially the same as the depth of the back box 514. The box 514 extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 514a.

  As shown in FIG. 71, a lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 is formed with a stepped plane substantially along the game effect unit 4 surface on the front side and an elongated plane extending in the front-rear direction on the left side. A surface forming member 1731a having a surface shape formed in a multi-surface shape such that a plurality of rows are arranged in a side surface direction (a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction), and a diffusing lens disposed on the rear side of the surface forming member 1731a It comprises a member 1731b, a lower right substrate 1746 and a right lower substrate 1747 arranged on the rear side of the surface forming member 1731a and the diffusing lens member 1731b and having a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted on the surface. Although not shown, the front surface of the lower right substrate 1747 is covered with the lower end of the transparent support base 1735.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731 is disposed on the rear side of the LED symbol display unit 80, and is a groove for passing wiring connected to the rear side of the LED symbol display unit 80. 1731c is formed on the front surface of the surface forming member 1731a. This groove 1731c is formed so as to be pulled out to the right side so that the wiring can be guided to the right outside of the back box 514.

  Similar to the surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, the surface forming member 1731a of the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731 is made of a white translucent member, and the front side surface is textured. ing. Further, a colorless transparent member is used for the diffusion lens member 1731b of the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731. Like the upper left light emission decoration body 1721 and the diffusion lens members 1721c and 1723c of the lower left light emission decoration body 1723, the diffusion lens member 1731b is arranged on the front side. A plurality of first ridges 1731d and a plurality of second ridges (not shown) are formed on the rear side, respectively, so that light from the LEDs 1740 such as the lower right substrate 1746 can be diffused widely. ing.

  Further, the surface forming member 1731a of the lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731 has a wall-like side surface 1731e extending in the front-rear direction. The wall-shaped side surface 1731e has substantially the same length as the depth of the back box 514, and extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 514a of the back box 514.

  In the lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731, the wall-like side surfaces 1731 e and 1724 f of the surface forming members 1731 a and 1724 a are not in contact with each other and narrower than the depth at the boundary with the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724. A gap is formed, and the crevasse generated on the glacier and the snowy valley is expressed by this gap. In addition, at the bottom (back) of the gap, the first ridge 1731d of the diffusing lens member 1731b is arranged as desired, and the fluid flowing in the crevasse is expressed by the first ridge 1731d. (See FIG. 63). In addition to the blue light and white light, the LED 1740 arranged at a position corresponding to the gap can emit red light. The LED 1740 emits red light according to the gaming state, so It is now possible to produce a light-emitting effect as if a magma came out from.

  The light emitting decorative body 1720 is configured as described above, and is a decorative body that represents an iceberg, a glacier, and the like in this example. More specifically, in the case where a plurality of multi-faceted prisms are formed on the surface, such as the first surface forming members 1721a and 1723a of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 and the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723, the light from the front side is used. Because it can be diffusely reflected in various directions, the surface of the broken ice and the rippling sea surface can be reproduced more realistically. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 1740 arranged on the rear side of these can be appropriately blinked to express a wave of waves, and the upper left light emitting decoration body 1721 and the lower left light emission decoration body 1723, which are solid objects, are provided to the player. On the other hand, the illusion is as if the sea surface is actually there, and it is possible to attract attention.

  In addition, as in the surface forming members 1722b, 1724a, and 1731a of the upper right light emitting decorative body 1722, the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724, and the lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731, the white translucent member and the surface are subjected to a texture. According to the present invention, the member disposed on the rear surface side can be made invisible from the player side. At the same time, light and shade from the LED 1740 arranged on the rear surface side (a deviation from the optical axis, shielding, transmission and reflection by other members) appears on the surface. On the other hand, it is possible to express the thickness of the ice as if it were different, so that the depth can be felt strongly in a limited space. In addition, the texture formed on the surface prevents the light from the front side from being diffusely reflected and reflected in a planar shape, so that it can be displayed on a flat snow shelf, iceberg shelf, etc. Realistic feelings such as icebergs are increasing.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the right middle movable light emitting decorative body 1725 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 includes a pair of first surface forming members 1725a and a pair of first surface forming members 1725a arranged in the vertical direction. A second surface forming member 1725b disposed between the surface forming members and on the rear side; a right middle substrate 1725c disposed on the rear side of the second surface forming member 1725b and having a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted thereon; and a first surface A moving mechanism 1725d for moving the forming member 1725a and the second surface forming member 1725b is provided. When the second surface forming member 1725b is moved forward, the moving mechanism 1725d separates the pair of first surface forming members 1725a from each other, and when the second surface forming member 1725b is moved backward, the pair of first surface forming members 1725a are moved closer to each other. Is.

  That is, the right middle movable light emitting decorative body 1725 appears so that the second surface forming member 1725b protrudes when the pair of first surface forming members 1725a is opened by the moving mechanism 1725d, and the pair of first surface forming members 1725a When closed, the second surface forming member 1725b can be retracted and hidden.

  The moving mechanism 1725d of the right middle movable light emitting decorative body 1725 will be described in detail. The moving mechanism 1725d meshes with a motor 1725f having a rotating shaft 1725e, a pinion gear 1725g that rotates together with the rotating shaft 1725e of the motor 1725f, and a pinion gear 1725g. A rack gear 1725h, a slide member 1725i to which the right middle substrate 1725c and the second surface forming member 1725b are fixed at the front end side, a detection piece 1725j protruding outward from the slide member 1725i, and a slide position capable of detecting the detection piece 1725j A sensor 1725k and a base member 1725l that holds the slide member 1725i slidably in the front-rear direction and holds the motor 1725f, the slide position sensor 1725k, and the like are provided.

  Further, the moving mechanism 1725d is arranged at a position on the rear side of the position where the right middle substrate 1725c of the slide member 1725i is fixed, and a transmission pin 1725m that protrudes outward in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction, and a transmission pin 1725m. And a substantially L-shaped flange member 1725o formed with a long hole 1725n through which can be inserted. The flange member 1725o is pivotally supported by the base member 1725l at a position corresponding to the substantially vertical direction with respect to the transmission pin 1725m, and is one end extending forward substantially along the slide direction from the pivotally supported portion. The first surface forming member 1725a is fixed to the side, and is formed on the other end side extending in the direction of the slide member 1725i in a direction substantially perpendicular to the slide direction from the pivotally supported portion. As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, a pair of flange members 1725o are provided so as to face each other vertically with a slide member 1725i interposed therebetween, and also provided on the left and right sides with a base member 1725l interposed therebetween. . The upper flange member 1725o supports the upper first surface forming member 1725a and the lower flange member 1725o supports the lower first surface forming member 1725a with the slide member 1725i interposed therebetween. Yes.

  In the moving mechanism 1725d, the pinion gear 1725g fixed to the rotating shaft 1725e is rotated by the rotation of the motor 1725f, and the slide member 1725i is slidable in the front-rear direction by the feeding action of the rack gear 1725h engaged with the pinion gear 1725g. Yes. For example, when the slide member 1725i is slid forward by the rotation of the motor 1725f, the transmission pin 1725m moves forward together with the slide member 1725i. And the advance of the transmission pin 1725m is transmitted to the other end side of the flange member 1725o through the long hole 1725n, and the other end side of the flange member 1725o moves forward. At this time, since the flange member 1725o is pivotally supported by the base member 1725l, the transmission pin 1725m slides in the elongated hole 1725n and rotates around the portion where the flange member 1725o is pivotally supported. One end side of 1725o moves in a direction away from the slide member 1725i.

  That is, by advancing the slide member 1725i, the second surface forming member 1725b fixed to the tip of the slide member 1725i is advanced, and the first surface forming member 1725a fixed to one end side of the flange member 1725o is the slide member 1725i, that is, the first member. The second surface forming member 1725b moves away from the surface. In this embodiment, since the flange member 1725o and the first surface forming member 1725a are provided so as to face each other with the slide member 1725i interposed therebetween, the slide member 1725i is advanced to form a pair of first surface formations. The member 1725a moves in a direction away from each other, and moves forward (moves in the right direction in FIG. 73) as if the second surface forming member 1725b protrudes from there.

  On the other hand, when the motor 1725f is reversely rotated and the slide member 1725i is reversely moved, the transmission pin 1725m is reversely moved contrary to the above, and accordingly, the other end side of the flange member 1725o is also rotated backwardly. To do. Thereby, the one end side of the collar member 1725o moves in a direction approaching the slide member 1725i (left direction in FIG. 73). That is, when the slide member 1725i is moved backward, the second surface forming member 1725b moves backward and the pair of first surface forming members 1725a move in a direction approaching each other.

  When the slide member 1725i moves backward (backward) to a position where the pair of first surface forming members 1725a are closed, the slide position sensor 1725k detects the detection piece 1725j formed on the slide member 1725i. ing. In this example, a photo sensor is used as the slide position sensor 1725k.

  By the way, in the middle right movable light emitting decorative body 1725, the first surface forming member 1725a is formed of a white opaque member, and the second surface forming member 1725b is formed of a red transparent member. Although not shown in detail, the second surface forming member 1725b is formed with a plurality of first ridges on the front surface side thereof in a circular arc shape and extending left and right in a curved shape, and on the rear surface side. And a plurality of second ridges that are arranged at intervals narrower than the arrangement interval of the first ridges on the front side and that have a circular cross section and extend in the vertical direction. Accordingly, the second surface forming member 1725b can express a flow of red lava and can diffuse light from the LED 1740 of the right middle substrate 1725c widely.

  As described above, the middle right movable light emitting decorative body 1725 opens and closes the pair of first surface forming members 1725a arranged in the vertical direction by moving the slide member 1725i forward and backward by the rotation of the motor 1725f. The second surface forming member 1725b disposed therebetween can appear or be concealed. At the same time, the second surface forming member 1725b can be moved forward and backward along with the opening / closing operation of the pair of first surface forming members 1725a. By these movements, it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from being lowered by attracting the player's interest strongly or making the player entertained.

  In the middle right movable light emitting decoration 1725, the first surface forming member 1725a is white, and the second surface forming member 1725b is red. Therefore, when the second surface forming member 1725b is made to appear or concealed by the opening / closing operation of the pair of first surface forming members 1725a, not only the shape decoration mode but also the color decoration mode can be greatly changed. It is possible to attract the player's interest more strongly.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726 in the light emitting decoration body 1720 includes a movable body assembly 1726a that can emit light decoration and a moving mechanism 1726b that moves the movable body assembly 1726a in the left-right direction. And. As shown in detail in FIG. 76, the moving body assembly 1726a of the upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 has a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined. That is, the moving body assembly 1726a includes a light-transmitting outer shell member 1726d having an opening 1726c having a predetermined inner peripheral shape (here, E shape) on the front side, and an opening 1726c of the outer shell member 1726d. A light-transmitting front surface forming member 1726e, a sheet-like diffusion lens member 1726f disposed on the rear side of the front surface forming member 1726e and having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface, and a rear surface of the diffusion lens member 1726f. A transparent holding member 1726g that sandwiches the diffusing lens member 1726f in cooperation with the front surface forming member 1726e, and an upper left substrate 1726h that is arranged behind the holding member 1726g and has a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted thereon. The upper left board 1726h and the holding member 1726g are accommodated and the rear opening of the outer shell member 1726d is closed. It includes a base member 1726i to, a.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 1726i of the upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 has an extending portion 1726j extending to the right side of the outer shell member 1726d. Similar to the surface shape of the outer shell member 1726d, the surface shape of the extending portion 1726j is formed by combining a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles.

  In the upper left movable light emitting decorative body 1726 of this example, the surface of the outer shell member 1726d is silver-plated to represent the silver world in a snowy landscape, and the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1726c allows the logo to be displayed. The letter “E” is shown. Further, the front surface forming member 1726e is colorless and transparent, and the front surface side has a gentle and smooth shape, and the opening 1726c expresses “E” -shaped transparent ice. Further, the base member 1726i is a blue transparent member, and an extending portion 1726j extending to the right side forms the first surface forming member 1721a of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 and the first surface formation of the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723. Similar to the member 1723a, a waved sea surface (water surface) is expressed.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the moving mechanism 1726b in the upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 includes a motor 1726l having a rotation shaft 1726k, a pinion gear 1726m rotating together with the rotation shaft 1726k of the motor 1726l, and a rack gear 1726n meshing with the pinion gear 1726m. A slide member 1726o having a sliding edge, a detection piece 1726p projecting outward from the slide member 1726o, a slide position sensor 1726q capable of detecting the detection piece 1726p, and a slide member 1726o and a movable body assembly 1726a are slidable in the left-right direction. And a base member 1726r that holds the motor 1726l, the slide position sensor 1726q, and the like at predetermined positions.

  In the moving mechanism 1726b, a slide member 1726o is disposed on the rear side of the base member 1726r. A slit 1726s extending in the left-right direction is formed at a position corresponding to the slide member 1726o of the base member 1726r, and a horizontally long support member 1726t is disposed so as to face the slide member 1726o with the slit 1726s interposed therebetween. ing. Then, the slide member 1726o and the support member 1726t are connected by the connecting pin 1726u through the slit 1726s, so that the slide member 1726o is slidably held by the base member 1726r. As shown in the drawing, both ends of the slide member 1726o and the support member 1726t are connected to each other by connecting pins 1726u in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction).

  Further, another slit 1726v extending in parallel with the slit 1726s is formed on the base member 1726r below the slit 1726s. A slide support member 1726x having a projecting pin 1726w that passes through the slit 1726v is disposed on the front side of the slit 1726v. A mating fixed bush 1726y is disposed. Then, by fitting the fixed bush 1726y to the projecting pin 1726w of the slide support member 1726x penetrating the slit 1726v, the slide support member 1726x can be slidably held with respect to the base member 1726r. .

  The moving mechanism 1726b fixes the moving body assembly 1726a to the support member 1726t and the slide support member 1726x, so that the moving body assembly 1726a can slide in the left-right direction. Since the movable body assembly 1726a is slidably supported by a slide support member 1726x in addition to the support member 1726t, the movable body assembly 1726a can be slid in the left-right direction by the slide support member 1726x without rattling. In FIG. 75, reference numeral 1726z denotes a bracket for fixing the motor 1726l to the rear side of the base member 1726r.

  The upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726 can slide the moving body assembly 1726a in the left-right direction by the rotational drive of the motor 1726l of the moving mechanism 1726b. At the same time, by appropriately controlling the rotation of the rotating shaft 1726k in the motor 1726l, the slide member 1726o (moving body assembly 1726a) can freely move back and forth between the right moving end and the left moving end to perform a desired performance operation. It can be made to. The slide position sensor 1726q is arranged to detect the right side moving end of the slide member 1726o.

  Further, when the moving body assembly 1726a is moved to the position of the right moving end by the moving mechanism 1726b, the upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726 has a diffusing lens member in the upper left light emitting decoration body 1721 by the extension portion 1726j of the moving body assembly 1726a. The front side of the portion exposed to the front side of 1721c is covered. By moving the movable body assembly 1726a to the left side, a part of the diffusing lens member 1721c of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 is exposed to the front side and can be viewed by the player.

  Since the upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726 can slide the moving body assembly 1726a in the left-right direction by the moving mechanism 1726b as described above, the front surface forming member 1726e etc. that is decorated with light emission by the LED 1740 moves. It is possible to attract the player's interest. At the same time, the blue extending portion 1726j is moved together with the moving body assembly 1726a by the moving mechanism 1726b, so that the transparent (white) diffusing lens member 1721c arranged on the rear side can appear or concealed. . Thereby, not only the change of the shape decoration aspect but also the color decoration aspect can be changed, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Next, the lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730 in the light emitting decoration body 1720 has the same basic configuration as the upper left movable light emission decoration body 1726 as shown in FIGS. A movable body assembly 1730a and a moving mechanism 1730b for moving the movable body assembly 1730a in the left-right direction. As shown in detail in FIG. 79, the moving body assembly 1730a of the lower left movable light emitting decoration 1730 has a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined. That is, the movable body assembly 1730a includes a translucent outer shell member 1730d having an opening 1730c having a predetermined inner peripheral shape (here, I shape) on the front side, and an opening 1730c of the outer shell member 1730d. A light-transmitting front surface forming member 1730e, a sheet-like diffusing lens member 1730f disposed on the rear side of the front surface forming member 1730e and having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface, and the diffusing lens member 1730f A transparent holding member 1730g that sandwiches the diffusing lens member 1730f in cooperation with the front surface forming member 1730e, and a lower left substrate 1730h that is arranged behind the holding member 1730g and has a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted on the surface. In addition, at least the lower left substrate 1730h and the holding member 1730g are accommodated and the rear opening of the outer shell member 1730d is closed. It includes a base member 1730i to, a.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 1730i of the lower left movable light emitting decoration 1730 has an extending portion 1730j extending to the right side from the outer shell member 1730d. Similar to the surface shape of the outer shell member 1730d, the surface shape of the extending portion 1730j is a form in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined.

  In the lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730 of this example, the surface of the outer shell member 1730d is silver-plated to represent a silver world in a snowy landscape, and the logo is formed by the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1730c. The letter “I” is shown. Further, the front surface forming member 1730e is colorless and transparent, and the front surface side thereof has a shape having gentle and smooth unevenness, and expresses "I" shape transparent ice by the opening 1730c. Further, the base member 1730 i is a blue transparent member, and an extending portion 1730 j extending to the right side forms the first surface forming member 1721 a of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 and the first surface formation of the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723. Similar to the member 1723a, a waved sea surface (water surface) is expressed.

  As shown in FIG. 78, a moving mechanism 1730b in the lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730 includes a motor 1730l having a rotating shaft 1730k, a pinion gear 1730m that rotates together with the rotating shaft 1730k of the motor 1730l, and a rack gear 1730n that meshes with the pinion gear 1730m. A sliding member 1730o having a sliding edge, a detection piece 1730p projecting outward from the sliding member 1730o, a slide position sensor 1730q capable of detecting the detection piece 1730p, and a sliding member 1730o and a movable body assembly 1730a are slidable in the left-right direction. And a base member 1730r that holds the motor 1730l, the slide position sensor 1730q, and the like at predetermined positions.

  In the moving mechanism 1730b, a slide member 1730o is disposed on the rear side of the base member 1730r. Further, a slit 1730s extending in the left-right direction is formed at a position corresponding to the slide member 1730o of the base member 1730r, and a horizontally long support member 1730t is disposed so as to face the slide member 1730o across the slit 1730s. ing. The slide member 1730o and the support member 1730t are connected by the connection pin 1730u via the slit 1730s, so that the slide member 1730o is slidably held by the base member 1730r. As shown in the drawing, both ends of the slide member 1730o and the support member 1730t are connected to each other by connecting pins 1730u in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction).

  Further, another slit 1730v extending in parallel with the slit 1730s is formed on the base member 1730r below the slit 1730s. A slide support member 1730x having a projecting pin 1730w penetrating the slit 1730v is disposed on the front side of the slit 1730v, and a rear end of the slit 1730v is fitted with the projecting pin 1730w of the slide support member 1730x. A mating fixed bushing 1730y is arranged. Then, by fitting the fixed bush 1730y to the projecting pin 1730w of the slide support member 1730x penetrating the slit 1730v, the slide support member 1730x can be slidably held with respect to the base member 1730r. .

  The moving mechanism 1730b is configured so that the moving body assembly 1730a can slide in the left-right direction by fixing the moving body assembly 1730a to the support member 1730t and the slide support member 1730x. Since the movable body assembly 1730a is slidably supported by a slide support member 1730x in addition to the support member 1730t, it can be slid by the slide support member 1730x in the left-right direction without rattling. In FIG. 78, reference numeral 1730z denotes a bracket for fixing the motor 1730l to the rear side of the base member 1730r.

  This lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730 can slide the moving body assembly 1730a in the left-right direction by the rotational drive of the motor 1730l of the moving mechanism 1730b. At the same time, by appropriately controlling the rotation of the rotating shaft 1730k in the motor 1730l, the slide member 1730o (moving body assembly 1730a) can freely move back and forth between the right moving end and the left moving end, and a desired performance operation can be performed. It can be made to. Note that the slide position sensor 1730q is arranged to detect the right side moving end of the slide member 1730o.

  The lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730 has a diffusing lens member in the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723 by the extension portion 1730j of the moving body assembly 1730a when the moving body assembly 1730a is moved to the position of the right moving end by the moving mechanism 1730b. The front side of the portion exposed to the front side of 1723c is covered. By moving the movable body assembly 1730a to the left side, a part of the diffusing lens member 1723c of the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723 is exposed to the front side and can be viewed by the player.

  Since the lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730 can slide the moving body assembly 1730a in the left-right direction by the moving mechanism 1730b as described above, the front surface forming member 1730e decorated with the light emission by the LED 1740 moves. It is possible to attract the player's interest. At the same time, the blue extending portion 1730j is moved together with the moving body assembly 1730a by the moving mechanism 1730b, so that the transparent (white) diffusing lens member 1723c arranged on the rear side can appear or concealed. . Thereby, not only the change of the shape decoration aspect but also the color decoration aspect can be changed, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 includes a colorless and transparent first surface forming member 1727a having a gentle and smooth unevenness formed on the front surface side. A predetermined inner peripheral shape (here, A-shaped and G-shaped) opening 1727b closed by the first surface forming member 1727a is provided on the front side. Further, a non-translucent outer shell member 1727c having a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined, and a surface disposed behind the first surface forming member 1727a inside the outer shell member 1727c. A sheet-like diffusion lens member 1727d having a plurality of fine prisms formed thereon, and a transparent lens that is disposed behind the diffusion lens member 1727d and holds the diffusion lens member 1727d in cooperation with the first surface forming member 1727a. A holding member 1727e and a colored transparent second surface forming member 1727f arranged on the left side surface of the holding member 1727e and having an outer shape that continues from the side surface of the outer shell member 1727c are provided.

  The left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 is disposed on the rear side of the holding member 1727e and supported on the front side of the rear wall 514a of the back box 514, and a plurality of LEDs 1740 are mounted on the surface of the left middle board 1748. Is provided. Specifically, a portion above the middle in the vertical direction of the left middle substrate 1748 is disposed on the rear side of the holding member 1727e. The left middle substrate 1748 is a substrate for light emission decoration, and in addition to the left middle upper light emission decoration body 1727, a plurality of LEDs 1740 for decorating the left middle light emission decoration body 1728 and the left middle lower light emission decoration body 1729 are also provided. Has been implemented.

  The left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 is configured such that the first surface forming member 1727a is fitted so as to close the opening 1727b from the rear side of the outer shell member 1727c, and diffuses into the outer shell member 1727c. A lens member 1727d and a holding member 1727e are arranged. The second surface forming member 1727f is fixed to the rear side of the outer shell member 1727c, so that the first surface forming member 1727a, the diffusing lens member 1727d, and the holding member 1727e do not come out of the outer shell member 1727c. Is to be supported.

  The upper left upper light emitting decorative body 1727 of this example has a silver plating treatment on the surface of the outer shell member 1727c, and represents a silver world in a snow scene. At the same time, the letters “A” and “G” of the logo are shown by the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1727b, and transparent ice of “A” and “G” shape is formed by the first surface forming member 1727a through the opening 1727b. It is expressed. The second surface forming member 1727f is a blue transparent member, and expresses a waved sea surface (water surface), and an outer shell member 1727c disposed on the front side thereof protrudes from the water surface (floating). State).

  Further, the left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 has a wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 760 at a position (a rear side) corresponding to the position where the gate sensor 760 in the passing gate 612 in the center accessory 620 is disposed. A conduction path 1727g for guiding the rear side to the rear side of the back box 514 is formed. More specifically, the conduction path 1727g is disposed on the left side of the left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 where the letter “A” is formed, penetrates the outer shell member 1727c in the front-rear direction, and opens to the left side surface. The portion opened to the side surface is bent into a crank shape when viewed from the front. By inserting the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 760 through the conduction path 1727g, the wiring cord can be hidden from view by the player, and the wiring cord is passed into the conduction path 1727g through the portion opened to the side surface. Can be easily inserted. Note that the second surface forming member 1727f of the upper left middle light emitting decoration 1727 is in a state of being divided into two at the portion where the conduction path 1727g is formed.

  The left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 has a wall-like side surface 1727h extending in the front-rear direction on the side surface. The wall-like side surface 1727h has a length substantially the same as the depth of the back box 514. 514 extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 514a. Further, the wall-shaped side surface 1727h is formed in a shape that is continuous with the insertion portion 620b of the center accessory 620 (see FIGS. 51 and 52).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82, the left middle light-emitting decorative body 1728 in the light-emitting decorative body 1720 has a red cross-section in which a plurality of ridges 1728a extending in the left-right direction are formed in a circular arc shape in a cross section on the front side. It is a transparent member, and a substantially intermediate portion in the vertical direction of the left middle substrate 1748 having a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted on the surface thereof is disposed on the rear side. This left middle light emitting decoration 1728 represents a flow of red lava by a plurality of ridges 1728a formed on the front side.

  The left middle light emitting decorative body 1728 has a wall-like side surface 1728b extending in the front-rear direction. The wall-like side surface 1728b has a length substantially equal to the depth of the back box 514, and the rear wall 514a of the back box 514. It extends to the vicinity. The wall-shaped side surface 1728b is formed in a shape that is continuous with the insertion portion 620b of the center accessory 620 (see FIG. 52).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 includes a colorless and transparent first surface forming member 1729a in which gentle and smooth irregularities are formed on the front surface side, and a first surface. An opening 1729b having a predetermined inner peripheral shape (here, a C shape and an E shape) closed by the forming member 1729a is provided on the front surface side. Furthermore, a non-translucent outer shell member 1729c having a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined, and a surface disposed inside the outer shell member 1729c on the rear side of the first surface forming member 1729a. A sheet-like diffusion lens member 1729d having a plurality of fine prisms formed thereon, and a transparent lens that is disposed behind the diffusion lens member 1729d and holds the diffusion lens member 1729d in cooperation with the first surface forming member 1729a. A holding member 1729e and a colored transparent second surface forming member 1729f arranged on the left side surface of the holding member 1729e and having an outer shape that continues from the side surface of the outer shell member 1729c are provided.

  The left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729 has a portion below the middle in the vertical direction of the left middle substrate 1748 on the surface of which a plurality of LEDs 1740 are mounted on the rear side of the holding member 1729e.

  Furthermore, the left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729 is configured such that the first surface forming member 1729a is fitted so as to close the opening 1729b from the rear side of the outer shell member 1729c. A diffusing lens member 1729d and a holding member 1729e are arranged. The second surface forming member 1729f is fixed to the rear side of the outer shell member 1729c, so that the first surface forming member 1729a, the diffusing lens member 1729d, and the holding member 1729e do not come out of the outer shell member 1729c. To be supported.

  In the left middle lower luminescent decorative body 1729 of this example, the surface of the outer shell member 1729c is subjected to silver plating, and expresses the silver world in a snow scene. At the same time, the letters “C” and “E” of the logo are shown by the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1729b, and transparent ice of “C” and “E” shapes are formed by the first surface forming member 1729a through the opening 1729b. It is expressed. The second surface forming member 1729f is a blue transparent member, and expresses the undulating sea surface (water surface), and the outer shell member 1729c arranged on the front side thereof protrudes from the water surface (floating). State).

  Further, the left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729 has a wall-like side face 1729g extending in the front-rear direction on the side face. It extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 514a. Further, the wall-shaped side surface 1729g is formed in a shape that is continuous with the insertion portion 620b of the center accessory 620 (see FIGS. 51 and 52).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 83, the left middle substrate 1748 of the light emitting decorative body 1720 is supported so as to be close to the front side of the rear wall 514a of the back box 514, and the left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727, The light emitting decorative body 1728 and the left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729 are arranged as far as possible from the front surface. Further, it is difficult to understand that the light of the LED 1740 provided on the left middle board 1748 from the player side is emitted in a spot shape when viewed from the player side, and the depth feeling of the light emitting decoration 1720. Can be improved.

  By the way, the upper left movable luminous ornament 1726, the upper left middle luminous ornament 1727, the lower left middle luminous ornament 1729, and the diffusion lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f of the lower left movable luminous ornament 1730 in the luminous ornament 1720 are: The prism sheet has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface. And, it is also possible to radiate light incident from the front side to the front side by the action of the prism, and even if the LED 1740 arranged on the rear side does not emit light, it can be shimmering like a pearl, and the rear side Can be made invisible to the player. Further, when the LED 1740 disposed on the rear side of the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f is caused to emit light, the light can be finely diffused in various directions, and is further pearl-shaped when viewed from the player side. It is designed to sparkle.

  Further, the upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726, the left middle upper light emission decoration body 1727, the left middle lower light emission decoration body 1729, and the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a of the lower left movable light emission decoration body 1730 in the light emission decoration body 1720, As described above, the first surface forming member 1729a and the front surface forming member 1730e are formed so that the surfaces thereof are smooth and uneven, and the rear surfaces thereof are formed substantially flat, and the thickness thereof is smooth. The thickness is uneven. As a result, the surface design looks distorted, and transparent ice can be reproduced with a natural feeling.

<Action and effect of luminous decoration>
Here, the actions and effects of the light-emitting decorative body 1720 described above will be summarized. According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the side frame plates 12 and 13 in the outer frame 2 are made of metal extrusion molds, thereby increasing the horizontal dimension of the game effect unit installation recess 30 in the main body frame 3. At the same time, by providing only one dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame 5, the vertical size of the gaming window 101 is increased, and the rearward projecting amount of the peripheral wall 291, 292, 293 in the main body frame 3 is increased. Is made substantially the same position as the rear end side of the prize ball tank 50 so that the depth of the game effect unit installation recess 30 is increased. Thereby, the volume of the game effect unit installation recessed part 30 can be enlarged as much as possible, and the larger game effect unit 4 can be supported favorably.

  Further, the game effect unit 4 can be further increased in size, and at that time, a light emitting decoration 1720 is disposed on the rear side of the transparent game panel 409 forming the game area 20. The light emitting decoration 1720 includes a transparent front surface forming member 1726e, a first surface forming member 1727a, a first surface forming member 1729a, and diffusing lens members 1726f and 1727d having a plurality of minute prisms on the rear side of the front surface forming member 1730e. , 1729d, 1730f, an upper left substrate 1726h, a lower left substrate 1730h, and a left middle substrate 1748 are sequentially provided. Therefore, the light incident by the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f of the light emitting decorative body 1720 is spectrally diffused to emit glitter and seven colors of light, and the light condition changes depending on the position viewed by the player. It becomes. Then, it is possible to give the player an impression that is completely different from a flat pattern or image like a conventional pachinko machine, and attracts the player's attention strongly, and this pachinko machine 1 It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f having a plurality of fine prisms are arranged on the light emitting decorative body 1720, the LED 1740 and the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f arranged on the rear side are arranged. The upper left substrate 1726h, the lower left substrate 1730h, the left middle substrate 1748, and the like can be hidden from the front side. The LED 1740 and the like disposed on the rear side of the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f can be visually recognized, thereby preventing the decorativeness of the light-emitting decorative body 1720 from being deteriorated and reducing the interest of the player. be able to. Further, the light incident on the diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f from the front side of the light emitting decoration 1720 can be emitted to the front side by the diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f, so that the LED 1740 emits light. Even if it is not, the light emitting decoration 1720 can be shined to some extent, and the player's interest can be attracted.

  Furthermore, the light emitting decorative body 1720 is arranged in the back box 514 having a predetermined depth, and the light emitting decorative body 1720 can be three-dimensionally shaped. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 1, the three-dimensional light-emitting decorative body 1720 can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 409 at a position where a planar pattern or image in the game area can be visually recognized in the conventional pachinko machine. . At first glance, it is possible to give the player an impression different from that of a conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be greatly differentiated from other pachinko machines. The possibility that this pachinko machine 1 is selected can be increased.

  Further, since the thickness of the transparent front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the front surface forming member 1730e is nonuniform, the refraction of the transmitted light is nonuniform. It becomes possible. Therefore, the diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f arranged on the rear side from the player side appear to be distorted so that the player can see the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, and the first surface. The shape of the forming member 1729a and the front surface forming member 1730e can be easily recognized, and the one that can exert the above-described effects by exerting the decorative effect by the shape can be realized. Further, the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f arranged on the rear side of the front surface forming member 1730e are distorted from the player side. Can be seen in. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the appearance of the surface design of the geometrical diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f, which is distorted, and to reduce the artificial feeling, and the three-dimensional light-emitting decorative body 1720 (the front surface forming member 1726e, The real feeling of the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the front surface forming member 1730e) can be further enhanced to attract the player's interest strongly. Further, since the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f appear to be distorted, the light emitted from the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f also becomes non-uniform. Therefore, the light condition of the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f that glitters can be non-uniform so that the glitter can be further increased, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, an upper left substrate 1726h having an LED 1740, a lower left substrate 1730h, and a left middle substrate 1748 are provided. Therefore, the light from the LED 1740 can be diffused widely by the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f, and the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f can be lit in a pearl shape, and the light emitting decoration 1720 With this luminous decoration, the player's interest can be more strongly attracted and the expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Further, the diffusion lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f are narrowed by the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the front surface forming member 1730e and the holding members 1726g, 1727e, 1729e, and 1730g. Can be held and held. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 which can hold | maintain the flexible diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f reliably by being made into a sheet shape, and can produce the above-mentioned operation effect reliably is realized. be able to.

  Further, the diffusion lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f are narrowed by the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the front surface forming member 1730e and the holding members 1726g, 1727e, 1729e, and 1730g. I have to hold it. Therefore, the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f are arranged at positions where the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the rear surface of the front surface forming member 1730e are in contact with each other. Is done. Thus, the diffusion lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f are arranged near the front surface of the back box 514 together with the front surfaces of the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the front surface forming member 1730e. Will be. This makes it possible to provide a distance between the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f and the rear wall 514a of the back box 514. A moving means (moving mechanism) for moving 1720 can be arranged, and the decorative effect of the light emitting decorative body 1720 can be further enhanced.

  Further, the diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f are configured to be able to radiate light incident from the front, and the light incident on the diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f from the front of the decorative body is The light is reflected or refracted by the prism and is emitted forward from the diffusion lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f. Therefore, if there is a light source in front of the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f, the light emitting decorative body 1720 can be shining at any time regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 1, and the appeal to the player is enhanced. This pachinko machine 1 can be selected as a pachinko machine to play.

  Further, a back box 514 having a depth of 50 mm to 100 mm is disposed on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 409 that forms the gaming area 20, and extends in a substantially vertical direction (front-rear direction) with respect to the surface of the gaming panel 409. A light emitting decoration 1720 having wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e having a length substantially the same as the depth of the back box 514 is disposed. That is, the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, the left middle upper light emitting decoration body 1727, the left middle light emitting decoration body 1728, and the left middle lower light emission whose depth (front and rear direction) is emphasized by the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e. A decorative body 1729 and a lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731 are arranged. Therefore, this three-dimensional light-emitting decorative body 1720 can be recognized as completely different from the game effect unit in the conventional pachinko machine, and can attract the player's interest strongly. It is possible to prevent a player's interest from decreasing by raising the sense of expectation for the game.

  Further, the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, the left middle upper light emitting decoration body 1727, the left middle light emitting decoration body 1728, the left middle lower light emitting decoration body 1729, and the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731 have substantially the same length as the depth of the back box 514. Wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, 1731e. Accordingly, the front surface of the light emitting decoration 1720 is disposed at a position close to the front surface of the back box 514, that is, the rear surface of the game panel 409. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to reduce the difference in distance between the front surface of the light-emitting decorative body 1720 and the game ball flowing down in the game area 20, and between the light-emitting decorative body 1720 and the game ball. The focal shift can be reduced as much as possible. Furthermore, it is possible to make it easy to see both the light emitting decoration 1720 and the game ball at the same time, to prevent eyeball fatigue from occurring at an early stage, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, on the rear side of the transparent game panel 409, a light-emitting decorative body 1720 (lower right light-emitting decorative body 1724, left-hand side) having wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e having a length substantially the same as the depth of the back box. A middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727, a left middle light emitting decorative body 1728, a left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729, and a lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731), and an effect display device 115 is disposed on the rear side of the back box 514. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the restriction of the focal length of the player by the game effect unit surface (game panel 409) and further increase the restricted range of the focal distance, so that the player who faces the game effect unit 4 It is possible to suppress a feeling of pressure against the player, and it is possible to relax the player and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the depth of the back box 514 is set to a depth of 50 mm to 100 mm and the effect display device 115 is arranged in the opening 514b of the rear wall 514a, the display screen of the effect display device 115 is displayed on the game effect unit. A predetermined distance from the surface (the distance of the depth of the back box) is arranged on the rear side. That is, since the effect display device 115 is arranged at a position farther away from the player than the conventional pachinko machine, the focal distance with respect to the effect image is likely to be longer, and the occurrence of eyeball fatigue is suppressed and the player's interest is enhanced. Can be prevented from decreasing.

  Furthermore, the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e of the light emitting decorative body 1720 are disposed so as to substantially follow the opening 514b of the back box 514 in which the effect display device 115 is disposed. Therefore, the outer periphery of the effect display device 115 can be substantially covered with the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e, and the effect display device 115 and the light emitting decorative body 1720 can be clearly separated to make the appearance clear. It is possible to attract the player's interest by using the game production unit 4 having the above. At the same time, it is possible to block light incident on the display screen of the effect display device 115 from the up / down or left / right oblique directions with respect to the game effect unit 4, thereby preventing reflection of unnecessary light. Thus, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 can be easily seen.

  In addition, since the depth of the back box 514 is in the range of 50 mm to 100 mm, the light emitting decoration body 1720 having a high level of three-dimensional effect that is undulating in the depth direction (depth direction) is reliably disposed in the back box 514. be able to. Thereby, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which attracts a player's interest strongly and can raise the expectation with respect to the game by this pachinko machine 1.

  Further, an upper right back board 1744, a lower middle board 1745, a lower right board 1746, a right lower board 1747, and a left middle board 1748 are provided, and a lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, a left middle upper light emitting decoration body 1727, and a left middle light emitting decoration body. 1728, the left middle lower light emitting decoration body 1729, and the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731 can be decorated with light emission. Further, the light-emitting decorative body 1720 that is lit, blinks, or emits light in various colors can further attract the player's interest, and can suppress the player's interest from decreasing. Further, the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, the left middle upper light emitting decoration body 1727, the left middle light emitting decoration body 1728, the left middle lower light emitting decoration body 1729, and the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731 can be decorated with light emission. The light-emitting decorative body 1720 disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 409 can be prevented from being dark and difficult to see, and the decoration effect of the light-emitting decorative body 1720 can be further enhanced to suppress the player's interest from being lowered. be able to. The lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, the left middle upper light emitting decoration body 1727, the left middle light emitting decoration body 1728, the left middle lower light emitting decoration body 1729, and the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731 are substantially the same as the depth of the back box 514. The wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e are long, and the front surface of the light emitting decorative body 1720 is disposed near the front surface of the back box 514 as described above. Therefore, the upper right back substrate 1744, the lower middle substrate 1745, the lower right substrate 1746, the right lower substrate 1747, and the left middle substrate 1748 can be easily arranged near the rear wall 514a of the back box 514. As a result, by moving the front surface (front surface) of the light emitting decoration 1720 and the LED 1740 as far as possible, the light of the LED 1740 that emits light in a dotted manner further spreads, and the entire light emitting decoration 1720 is light-decorated substantially uniformly. In addition, the light source of the LED 1740 that emits light in a dot shape can be made inconspicuous. Further, the upper right back board 1744, the lower middle board 1745, the lower right board 1746, the right lower board 1747, the left middle board 1748, and the LED 1740 are difficult to see from the player side, and the decoration effect of the light emitting decoration 1720 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the portion where the wall-like side surfaces 1724f and 1731e are arranged to face each other, the depth is deeper than the interval, so that the bottom portion is difficult to see and the depth is emphasized, and the light emitting decorative body The depth feeling of 1720 can be further emphasized, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In addition, since it becomes difficult to see the bottom portion where the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f and 1731e face each other, it is possible to make the player think that there is something in that portion, It is possible to prevent the interest in games from deteriorating with a sense of expectation. Further, a crack, a crevasse, a hole, or the like can be expressed by a portion where the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f and 1731e are opposed to each other, and a more realistic light emitting decoration 1720 can be obtained. In addition, since the substrate having the LED 1740 is arranged at the bottom of the portion where the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f and 1731e face each other, a light-emitting effect in which light is emitted from a ground crack or the like is possible, and the player is more entertained. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

  In addition, a center accessory 620 having an insertion portion 620b that is disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 409 and is formed so as to be continuous with the wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e of the light emitting decoration 1720 is provided on the gaming panel 409. It is arranged in front of. Therefore, the length from the front surface of the center accessory 620, that is, the front surface of the game effect unit 4 to the rear wall 514a of the back box 514 is determined by the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, 1731e and the insertion portion 620b. A wall-like portion extending in the depth direction (front-rear direction) having a sword is formed in the game effect unit 4. And by this long wall-like part in the back, the depth feeling of the game effect unit 4 can be further emphasized, and it can be made the pachinko machine 1 with a prominent depth compared to the conventional pachinko machine, A pachinko machine 1 that can be distinguished from other pachinko machines at first glance and can attract strong interest in the pachinko machine 1 and can increase the expectation of the game by the pachinko machine 1 and enhance the interest of the player. It can be. Further, since the game panel 409 is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 620 that surrounds the outer periphery of the effect display device 115, a pachinko machine 1 similar to a pachinko machine having a conventional center accessory can be obtained. This makes it difficult for a player who is used to a conventional pachinko machine to have the impression of “a completely unknown pachinko machine” and allows the player to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play without a sense of incongruity.

  Moreover, since the depth of the game effect unit installation recessed part 30 can be enlarged, the back side from the panel holder 540, ie, the depth of the back unit 510 (depth of the back box 514) can be enlarged. Thereby, the wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e of the light emitting decoration 1720 can be made longer, and the sense of depth of the space behind the game panel 409 can be further emphasized. In addition, it is possible to provide a game effect unit 4 having an apparently different appearance from the conventional planar game effect unit. This game effect unit 4 strongly attracts the player's interest, and this pachinko machine 1 It becomes the pachinko machine 1 which can raise the expectation with respect to the game in Japan and can suppress that an interest falls.

  Furthermore, the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a that mimic predetermined objects that characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1, and the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a appear as the movements. A second surface forming member 1725b and diffuser lens members 1721c and 1723c are disposed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an impression that is completely different from a flat picture or image like a conventional pachinko machine, and the part that has not changed with the conventional pachinko machine is shaped By changing to, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest in combination with the large-sized game effect unit 4 and to increase the sense of expectation for the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the background of the game effect unit 4 is changed by moving the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a, 1730a arranged on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 409 by the moving mechanisms 1725d, 1726b, 1730b. Like that. Thereby, compared with the case where a large liquid crystal display device is arranged behind the transparent game effect unit and the background of the game effect unit is changed by the effect image (including moving images), the manner of change It is possible to make it easy to understand, and even if a game ball circulates in front of the light emitting decoration 1720, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being hard to see and to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. it can.

  Further, the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a can be decorated with light emission by the upper left substrate 1726h and the lower left substrate 1730h, and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a can be moved by the moving mechanisms 1726b and 1730b. Therefore, the LED 1740 provided on the upper left board 1726h and the lower left board 1730h can turn on and blink the mobile body assemblies 1726a and 1730a and emit light in various colors. Furthermore, it can attract more strongly and can suppress that a player's interest falls. Further, since the moving body assembly 1726a, 1730a can be decorated with light emission, the moving body assembly 1726a, 1730a disposed on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 409 can be prevented from being dark and difficult to see. The decoration effect by the body assemblies 1726a and 1730a can be further enhanced to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, since the upper left substrate 1726h and the lower left substrate 1730h are provided inside the movable body assemblies 1726a and 1730a, the dimensions of the movable body assemblies 1726a and 1730a in the front-rear direction (depth) are compared with the case where illumination is performed from the front side. Can be made as large as possible. The shapes of the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a can be made more three-dimensional, and the realistic moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a can entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating. . Further, since the upper left substrate 1726h and the lower left substrate 1730h are arranged on the rear side of the holding members 1726g and 1730g, the LED 1740 can be arranged as far back as possible, and the distance between the LED 1740 and the front surface of the front surface forming members 1726e and 1730e is reduced. Can be made as large as possible, and the light source of the LED 1740 that emits light in the form of dots can be made inconspicuous.

  Further, since the LED 1740 emits light on the rear side of the front surface shape members 1726e and 1730e, it is possible to suppress the surface shape of the front surface shape members 1726e and 1730e from being emphasized, which is imitated by the front surface shape members 1726e and 1730e. The ice that has translucency as a predetermined object can reproduce not only the shape but also the texture of the ice, making the player entertained by the more realistic front shape members 1726e and 1730e and less interesting Can be suppressed.

  Further, the second surface forming member 1725b and the diffusing lens members 1721c and 1723c appear or disappear as the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a are moved by the moving mechanisms 1725d, 1726b, and 1730b. . Thereby, the shape decoration aspect of the game effect unit 4 can be greatly changed, the player's interest can be more attracted, and a sense of expectation for the game can be given by the change of the decoration aspect. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing due to the expectation. Further, the colors of the second surface forming member 1725b and the diffusing lens members 1721c and 1723c are different from those of the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a, so that the moving mechanisms 1725d, 1726b and 1730b The movement of the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a causes the second surface forming member 1725b and the diffusing lens members 1721c and 1723c having different colors to appear, and at first glance, the decoration mode of the light emitting decorative body 1720 has changed. Can be recognized by the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, the surface forming member 1721a of the light emitting decoration 1720 and the like are made to have substantially the same color as icebergs and glaciers as predetermined objects, and the LED 1740 arranged on the rear side thereof emits light in substantially the same color or white as the predetermined objects. ing. As a result, the surface forming member 1721a and the like emit light with a feeling similar to a predetermined object, the surface forming member 1721a and the like become more realistic, the appeal to the player is increased, and the player's interest is increased. Can be attracted.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, the three-dimensional surface forming member 1721a and the like are arranged through the transparent game panel 409 at a position where a planar picture or image can be visually recognized in the game area. It is possible to give the player an impression different from that of a conventional pachinko machine. And this pachinko machine 1 can be greatly differentiated from other pachinko machines, and the possibility of selecting this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play can be increased.

  In addition, the surface forming member 1721a and the like disposed on the rear side of the game panel 409 is a light emitting decoration 1720 that emits light of a predetermined color by the light emission of the LED 1740. Just do it. Therefore, compared with the case where a moving image is displayed as in a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the front of the game panel 409 from being difficult to see, and the game balls are difficult to see. This can prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, the model of the pachinko machine 1 can be characterized by the three-dimensional surface forming member 1721a disposed on the rear side of the game panel 409. Therefore, unlike conventional pachinko machines, there is no need to place a specially shaped accessory or decoration to characterize the model in the game area, and it is possible to suppress the narrowing of the basin of the game ball due to them. It is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, since a multi-faceted prism or texture is formed on the surface of the surface forming member 1721a or the like, even if the surface forming member 1721a or the like is formed of a highly transparent material, It is difficult to recognize the side member. Then, when the LED 1740 is not emitting light, the light emitting decoration substrates 1741 and the LEDs 1740 arranged on the rear side of the surface forming member 1721a and the like can be recognized, and the real feeling of the surface forming member 1721a and the like is reduced. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the depth of the game effect unit installation recess 30 can be increased, the depth of the rear side from the panel holder 540, that is, the back unit 510 can be increased. Accordingly, the surface forming member 1721a or the like having a large depth can be used, or the distance between the surface forming member 1721a or the like and each substrate 1741 for light emitting decoration can be increased. And it is set as the pachinko machine 1 which can make it easy to embody the more realistic light-emitting decoration body 1720 resembling a predetermined thing, can attract a player's interest strongly, and can prevent that interest falls. Can do.

  Moreover, since the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged, even if the display area of the effect image by the effect display device 115 is widened, the sphere of the game ball is suppressed from being narrowed, and the movement and effect of the game ball are reduced. Both of the images can be enjoyed together, and the game area 20 of the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged to give various movements to the flowing game balls, and large movable accessories and decorative bodies (movable The pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining by arranging a decorative body) and the like to entertain the player.

<About the position of the light-emitting decorative body and the features of the light emission mode>
Here, in the game effect unit 4, as described above, a plurality of electrical components and light emitters (specifically, the LEDs 1740 of the light ornament 1720) are arranged behind the game panel 409. As described above, by arranging an illumination member or the like on the deeper side of the game effect unit 4 and controlling its light emission mode in various ways, the following operations and effects can be achieved.

  First, in a conventional pachinko machine, a game window (glass unit) formed on the door frame is usually formed in a substantially circular shape in accordance with the game area of the game effect unit. However, in the present embodiment, the gaming window 101 (glass unit 190) formed in the door frame 5 is vertically long and has a size that greatly exceeds the gaming area 20 and includes substantially the entire gaming panel 409 in a front view. It is formed in a substantially octagonal shape. That is, the area of the gaming window 101 (glass unit 190) is extremely large compared to the conventional case. Thereby, the player can more strongly experience the depth of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, and light emitted from the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) from the back side of the game effect unit 4 is pachinko machine. 1 can be easily displayed on the front side of 1 (that is, the light emission mode is easily grasped by the player's vision).

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the depth in which the game effect unit 4 is arranged is deep, it is difficult for light to enter the game area 20 from the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, when the effect display device 115, the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740), and the like are not driven, the gaming area 20 is darker than the conventional pachinko machine. Then, the effect display device 115 and the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) are located on the back side of the game effect unit 4 that is difficult to be illuminated by light from the outside.

  From this, the situation display device 115 and the light emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) are prevented from being disturbed by the player entering the outside of the pachinko machine 1 from being visually recognized by the player. The That is, the effect display device 115 and the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) display or emit light on the back side of the game effect unit 4 kept in a relatively dark state. It is easy to visually recognize the display and the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740).

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can effectively perform light decoration on the entire periphery of the door frame 5 except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. In the conventional pachinko machine 1, the light-decorated range is mainly limited to the game area 20, while the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is light-decorated including the game area 20 and the door frame 5 when viewed from the front. The range is extremely large. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a two-dimensional spread of light decoration that could not be achieved with a conventional gaming machine.

  In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the light decoration by the light emitting decoration body 1720 (LED 1740) is performed from the back side of the game effect unit 4, thereby realizing an unprecedented depth feeling by the light decoration. . In other words, combined with the flatness and depth of light decoration, players will feel as if they are wrapped in light decoration, and they can concentrate on the game while experiencing an unprecedented interest. it can.

  Furthermore, by performing light decoration by the light emitting decoration body 1720 (LED 1740) from the back side of the game effect unit 4, the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are illuminated by the light. Thereby, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is floating. Furthermore, since the light that illuminates the game sphere is irregularly reflected on the surface of the game sphere, it is possible to give the game ball a variety of colors.

  Furthermore, the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) provided in the game effect unit 4 has the following effects, particularly in relation to the effect display device 115. That is, in this embodiment, the back unit 510 has a plurality of light emitting decorations 1720 (LEDs 1740). The light emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) is in an after-mentioned effect space 510G for accommodating the effect device behind the game panel 409, and the outer periphery of the effect display device 115 (ie, the back unit 510) in front view. The outer edges of the openings formed in the Thereby, the light emission mode of the light emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) can be grasped via the transparent game panel 409. Further, the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) is disposed on the back side of the game panel 409 in which the game area 20 is formed (it is not necessary to be disposed in the game area 20), so that the flow space of the game ball is reduced. There is no hindrance. Thereby, a plurality of or relatively large light emitting decorations 1720 (LEDs 1740) can be employed, and a large effect display device 115 can be employed as long as it is not wasted. In addition, it is possible to prevent the cost from increasing.

  By the way, if the effect display device 115 is made larger than necessary, not only a wasteful display area is increased, but also the cost is increased. In other words, since the human eye cannot gaze at all the large area screen, even if the production display device 115 is enlarged more than necessary, it is the specific area of the large area screen that is being watched during the game. This is the only area. Therefore, even if an effect or the like is performed in an area where the player can watch, the player hardly notices it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the “light emitting decorative body”, a lamp (LED 1740 of the light emitting decorative body 1720) having higher luminance than the liquid crystal display, such as a lamp or LED, is employed. Thereby, the player can display the display image of the effect display device 115 by arranging the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) on the outer periphery of the effect display device 115 in front view (that is, an area where the player cannot gaze or is difficult). While recognizing, it is also possible to grasp the light emission mode such as lighting, blinking and / or turning off of the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the light emission mode of the electrical decoration member provided in the game effect unit 4 is appropriately controlled according to the game state in the pachinko machine 1. For example, in a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a probable gaming state), the light-emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) is in an advantageous mode, and a flashy lighting effect is performed. Thereby, the player can confirm that a flashy effect is performed without gazing at the effect display device 115. In addition, this flashy production is performed in a wide production area (production space 510G) using substantially the entire area on the back side of the game panel 409, so that a three-dimensional deep aura can be created from the entire pachinko machine 1. It can suppress the decline of interest. In addition, since this light emission effect is performed around the effect display device 115 (that is, a portion where it is difficult for the player to gaze), a flashy light emission effect can be performed without adversely affecting the player's eyes. The “flashy lighting effect” refers to an effect that enhances the player's mood, such as an effect of performing illumination with each light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740). On the other hand, in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal gaming state), the light emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) is controlled to a normal mode. This normal mode is a modest mode than the advantageous mode, and corresponds to, for example, light-off or dark light-up. Thereby, the player can grasp that the gaming state is not advantageous to the player.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at the rear of the game area 20, the effect is produced in the effect space 510G as a wide three-dimensional space extending in the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, and the depth direction of the game area 20. It is the composition which can perform.

  In the wide effect space 510G, the effect display device 115 is disposed substantially at the center, and the respective light emitting decorations 1720 (LEDs 1740) are disposed around the effect display device 115. By arranging the light emitting decorations 1720 (LEDs 1740) uniformly in the left and right direction and the up and down direction of the game area 20, it is possible to produce effects in substantially the entire area of the game area 20. Note that the arrangement in the effect space 510G is not limited to the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740), and other plural types of lamps, LEDs, and the like may be arranged.

  By the way, conventionally, since it is necessary to secure a space for a game ball to flow down, a space such as an obstacle nail, it is difficult to dispose the light emitting decorative body over the entire game area. Moreover, in recent years, since the effect display device has been expanded, the space for arranging the light emitting decorative body has been eroded. For this reason, there has been a flow of production using the production display device rather than production using the light-emitting decorative body.

  However, the area that can be watched by the human eye (hereinafter referred to as “gaze area”) is a limited range, and even if the effect display device is enlarged, only the useless area that cannot be watched is increased. Further, increasing such a useless area leads to high cost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 115 is arranged in the gaze area, and the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) is arranged in the area outside the gaze area. Therefore, it is preferable that the light emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) disposed outside the gaze area is a lamp or LED having higher luminance than the liquid crystal display.

  In addition, the effect display device 115 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 20 as the gaze area, and the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) is arranged along the periphery of the effect display device 115, so that Direct information transmission and indirect information transmission can be performed.

  This point will be described in detail. Since the effect display device 115 is arranged in the gaze area, the display state of the effect display device 115 can directly inform the player of information such as the current game state. . For example, if it is an aspect in which information related to a gaming state is transmitted by displaying a character or the like on a liquid crystal, unless it is a rare case such as looking away, if you normally play the game by looking at the effect display device 115, It can be confirmed whether or not the character is displayed on the effect display device 115. In this sense, the display by the effect display device 115 is direct information transmission.

  On the other hand, when the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) arranged outside the gaze area is changed, the player may not notice the change unless the change is very large. Since each of the light emitting decorations 1720 (LED 1740) arranged outside the gaze area (specifically, on the outer peripheral side of the effect display device 115) is arranged uniformly distributed over substantially the entire game area 20, each light emission Although the light emitting mode of the decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) is easy to visually recognize, it is difficult to visually recognize the light emitting modes of all the light emitting decorative bodies 1720 (LED 1740) at a time. In other words, it is easy for the player to grasp the light emission mode of each light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) individually, but the light emission modes of all the light emission decorations 1720 (LED 1740) dispersed in a wide area. It is difficult to grasp at a time. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly transmit information to the player by changing the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) that is uniformly arranged in the entire game area 20.

  Note that examples of changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) include changing only the light emitting mode of some of the light emitting decorative bodies, and the duty ratio of the pulse wave transmitted to the light emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740). It is conceivable to give a slight change to the overall light emission mode by changing the above. Conventionally, since a small number of light-emitting decorative bodies have been arranged in the game area, when information is transmitted to a player using the light-emitting decorative bodies, it has been necessary to clearly change them. For example, it is turned off in the normal gaming state, and blinked in the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, information can be transmitted using substantially the entire game area 20, so that a fuzzy change is given to the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) (ie, a slight change is given). This makes it possible to send information indirectly to the player.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
Next, a control configuration of the main board and the peripheral board of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. 84 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main board. FIG. 85 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the peripheral substrate. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  Control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 700 (shown in FIG. 84) and a group of peripheral boards 800 (shown in FIG. 85). The group of the main board 700 controls game operations (winning detection, random number acquisition and winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 800 is a production operation (light emitting decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display). And the operation of the decorative body).

  As shown in FIG. 84, the main board 700 includes a main control board 710 and a payout control board 720. The main control board 710 includes a CPU 711 as a central processing unit, a ROM 712 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 713 as a readable / writable memory.

  The CPU 711 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 712, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 800 or the payout control board 720.

  The RAM 713 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 710.

  Note that the main board 700 is connected to the power supply board 395 so that operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395. Specifically, operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395 to the payout control board 720, and operating power is supplied to the main control board 710 via the payout control board 720. However, as described above, in this embodiment, a main drawer relay board 648 is provided between the payout control board 720 and the main control board 710, and the main control board 710 is connected to the main drawer relay board 648 (main drawer board 648). The power supply from the payout control board 720 is received via the connector 2000). Various information exchanges between the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720 are also performed via the main drawer relay board 648 (main drawer connector 2000).

  The input interface of the main control board 710 detects the winning state to the first starting port sensor 780 and the second starting port 604 for detecting the winning state to the first starting port 602 via the panel relay terminal plate 750. A second start port sensor 782 that is connected, a gate sensor 760 that detects that a game ball has passed through the passing gate 612, and a general winning port sensor 762 that detects that a game ball has been won are connected to the general winning port 614.

  Further, an opening / closing device count sensor 776 is connected to an input interface of the main control board 710 via an opening / closing device relay terminal plate 754 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 750.

  Detection signals from the sensors are input to the main control board 710.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display substrate 768 is connected to an output interface of the panel relay terminal board 750 via a symbol limiting resistor substrate 766. Thereby, the main control board 710 can output drive signals to the normal symbol display 82, the first special symbol display 84, and the second special symbol display 86.

  Also, the output interface of the switchgear relay terminal plate 754 is connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid 774 and a switchgear open / close solenoid 778. From the main control board 710, the normal electric accessory solenoid 774 and the switchgear open / close solenoid 778 are connected. A drive signal is output toward. The ordinary electric accessory solenoid 774 drives a pair of movable pieces 606 provided at the second start opening 604, and the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 is formed by the opening / closing device 500 (more specifically, the big prize opening opening / closing door). 500b).

  On the other hand, the payout control board 720 includes a CPU 722 as a central processing unit, a ROM 724 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 726 as a readable / writable memory.

  Then, the payout control board 720 processes the command signal input from the main control board 710 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 53 and the launching device 57 including the launching handle and the firing motor. Thereby, the ball payout device 53 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch device 57 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  Also connected to the input interface of the payout control board 720 are an inner frame opening switch 736 for detecting the opening state of the front frame (not shown) of the main body frame 3 and a door opening switch 738 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5. Has been.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 710 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 720 to the main control board 710.

  The payout control board 720 is also connected to a full tank switch 730 that detects that the game balls stored in the dish 360 are full. Please remove it from the office. "

  An external terminal board 753 is connected to the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720. Various information such as a winning state at each start opening 602, 604, a variation state of a normal symbol / special symbol, and a gaming state based on a lottery result are provided via a hall computer provided in the gaming facility via the external terminal board 753. Is output.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 800 includes a peripheral control substrate 810 and a display device control substrate 816 as shown in FIG. Note that communication in only one direction is performed between the output interface and the input interface between the main control board 710 and the peripheral control board 810. That is, even if a command is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810, no command is transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 to the main control board 710. Further, the operating power supplied to the peripheral board 800 is supplied via the main control board 710.

  The peripheral control board 810 also includes electronic components such as a CPU 811, ROM 812, and RAM 813, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 810 includes a ROM 819 that stores sound sources that are the basis for effect sounds and musical effects such as music, and effects such as sound effects and music that are based on the contents of the effects based on the sound sources stored in the ROM 819. A sound source IC 818 that outputs sound is provided.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 810 and the display device control board 816 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 115 is connected to the display device control board 816. The display device control board 816 processes the command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 and outputs a drive signal to the effect display device 115. Note that the display device control board 816 includes a CPU 832, a RAM 834, a ROM 836, a VDP 838, and an image ROM 839.

  The CPU 832 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 810 via the input / output interface, performs arithmetic processing based on the command, and controls the VDP 838.

  The RAM 834 provides a work area for the CPU 832 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 836 holds a program for the CPU 832 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 838 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 838, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 838, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 832 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode on the effect display device 115 can be changed variously.

  The image ROM 839 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  As described above, the peripheral board 800 (peripheral control board 810 and display device control board 816) performs effect control for an image displayed on the effect display device 115, including a variable display effect for a decorative symbol 1153 described later. It is a part to do. The variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 is synchronized with the variation display of the special symbol. As will be described later, the decorative symbol variation start condition is to receive a command including information about a variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 710 at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol.

  In addition, a first decoration control board 746, a second decoration control board 748, and a frame decoration relay terminal board 240 are connected to the peripheral control board 810.

  The unit decoration lamp 852 is connected to the output interface of the first decoration control board 746. The first decoration control board 746 controls the light emission mode of the unit decoration lamp 852 (that is, each LED 1740 of the light emitting decoration 1720). Further, the above-described effect drive unit 854 is connected to the output interface of the second decoration control board 748. The second decoration control board 748 controls the drive mode of the effect driving unit 854 (that is, the moving mechanisms 1725d, 1726b, and 1730b of the light emitting decoration 1720).

  The frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 connected to the peripheral control board 810 is connected to speakers 144 and 341 connected to the door frame 5, operation buttons 327, a frame decoration lamp 842, and the like. The frame decoration relay terminal board 240 is connected to the peripheral control board 810 via the sub drawer relay board 649 described above. The peripheral control board 810 switches the effect mode output to the effect display device 115 based on the operation state of the operation button 327, and outputs a drive signal to the speakers 144, 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, functional configurations of the main control board 710 constituting the main board 700 of the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control board 810 constituting the peripheral board 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a functional block diagram schematically showing functional configurations of the main control board and the peripheral control board.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the main control board 710 includes a gaming state control means 934, a first special symbol lottery means 900, a first special symbol display control means 702, a first special symbol hold display control means 930, First special symbol hold counter 903, second special symbol lottery means 910, second special symbol display control means 704, second special symbol hold display control means 932, second special symbol hold counter 913, hold order Storage means 940, success / failure determination random number storage area 5131, processing area 5132, jackpot game execution means 715, opening / closing operation control means 938, normal symbol lottery means 920, normal symbol display control means 716, normal symbol A hold display control means 718, a normal symbol hold means 923, a movable piece opening / closing control means 928, and a command transmission means 946 are provided. In addition, about the 1st special symbol lottery means 900 and the 2nd special symbol lottery means 910, the same lottery is used, for example using a common table as a special figure determination table (so-called determination table) for determining whether or not the acquired random number is correct One lottery means may be used in the sense of That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not a combination of a plurality of games with different game specifications, but merely a plurality of special symbols.

  First, the gaming state control means 934 determines which gaming state the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is, and controls the gaming state based on the determined gaming state. In the present embodiment, as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1, a normal gaming state in which neither the probability changing function nor the time-shortening function operates, or a special gaming state in which both the probability changing function and the time-shortening function operate (hereinafter referred to as “probability changing gaming state”). Is controlled). In the probability variation gaming state, the winning / failing determination process is performed based on a winning probability that makes it easier to win the jackpot than when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, so that the player has a high expectation for the jackpot and is advantageous to the player. In addition, since the time-shortening function also operates in the probability variation gaming state, the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is performed more frequently than when the normal gaming state is controlled. The ball is more easily received, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the time shortening function is activated, the variation time of the special symbol is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, the shortening of the variation time of the special symbol and the improvement in the frequency of accepting the game ball to the second starting port 604 are combined. The special symbol lottery is promoted. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is not controlled to the short game state when only the short time function found in a general pachinko machine is activated.

  The first special symbol lottery 900 determines whether or not a game ball is generated with a predetermined random number width (for example, 0 to 599) when the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780 based on winning of the first start port 602. One random number for determination is acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902.

  When the random number for success / failure determination is acquired by the first special symbol determination random number acquisition means 902, whether or not the acquired random number value matches the per-effect value of the special effect determination table stored in the ROM 712. Determination is performed (special effect determination means). In the present embodiment, 197, 198, 199, and 307 are stored as the per-effect value in the normal special effect determination table of the first special symbol. Note that the determination as to whether or not the acquired random number value matches the per-effect value in the special effect determination table is performed only in the normal gaming state.

  The random number acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 is stored in the randomness determination random number storage area 5131, and the number of the acquired random numbers is first stored by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) is reserved. Then, when the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 is released, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to be determined are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and the first special symbol determination unit 904 It is determined based on the winning determination table whether or not the jackpot is won.

The hit determination table is shown in Table 1.

  Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the lottery hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 may be referred to as “first special symbol start-up storage”. The lottery suspension by the second special symbol reservation counter 913 may be referred to as “second special symbol start-up storage”.

  If the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control unit 934 is a normal gaming state, the first special symbol winning / non-judgment determining unit 904 determines whether or not the random number value acquired by the first special symbol determining unit 902 This is performed based on the normal jackpot determination table in the hit determination table 906. . On the other hand, if the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means 934 is a probability variation gaming state, it is based on the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 and the high probability constant jackpot determination table 908. Done. Then, it is determined whether or not the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 matches the jackpot value stored in the jackpot determination table, and if it is a jackpot value, the jackpot game execution means 715 determines the jackpot A game is executed.

  When the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782 based on the winning at the second start port 604, the second special symbol lottery means 910 is the same as when the game ball has won the first start port 602. The second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 912 acquires one random number among the random numbers for special symbol success / failure determination generated in a predetermined random number width (for example, 0 to 599). The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 up to a second predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913 is released, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and are determined by the second special symbol determination unit 914. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won.

  The validity determination random number storage area 5131 includes the random number value acquired by the first special symbol appropriateness determination random number acquisition unit 902 and the random number value acquired by the second special symbol appropriateness determination random number acquisition unit 912. Each is stored in the order of acquisition. That is, the random number values acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 are stored in the order acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902, and the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition is obtained. The random number values acquired by the means 912 are stored in the order acquired by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquiring means 912. In other words, the prior relationship between the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 and the random number value acquired by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 is not stored. .

  Note that even when a random number is acquired by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 912, the acquired random number value is stored in the ROM 712 only when the probability variation gaming state is set. Although it may be determined whether or not it matches with the per-effect value, this determination is not performed in this embodiment.

  If the game state controlled by the gaming state control unit 934 is the normal gaming state, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol determination unit 914 determines whether or not the random number value acquired by the second special symbol determination unit random number acquisition unit 912 This is performed based on the normal jackpot determination table 906. On the other hand, if the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means 934 is a probability variation gaming state, it is based on the random number value obtained by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number obtaining means 912 and the high probability constant jackpot determination table 908. Done.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot value stored in the normal jackpot determination table 906 is the same as the jackpot value stored in the normal jackpot determination table 906. More specifically, in the normal jackpot determination table, two (for example, 7 and 307) of the random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is generated with a predetermined random number width (for example, 0 to 599) is the jackpot value. It should be made to correspond to. In this case, the jackpot probability in the normal gaming state is 1/300.

  Similarly, the jackpot value stored in the jackpot determination table 908 at the high probability constant is the same as the jackpot value stored in the jackpot determination table 908 at the high probability constant. More specifically, in the high probability constant jackpot determination table 908, seven (for example, 7, 177, 187) out of the random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is generated with a predetermined random number width (for example, 0 to 599). 197, 207, 217, 307) may correspond to the jackpot value.

  When a jackpot game is being executed, even if a game ball wins at the first start port 602, the winning / nothing determination is not performed, and the acquired random number for determining whether or not the winning ball is determined is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not the game is successful. At the same time, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is counted up. Also, the normal jackpot determination table 906 and the highly accurate constant jackpot determination table 908 are both stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 84).

  In addition, the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure stores a lottery order for each special symbol lottery means (that is, a lottery order by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and a lottery order by the second special symbol lottery means 910). However, the lottery order in which both are merged is not stored. That is, a start memory based on a winning at the first starting port 602 (so-called first special symbol holding ball) and a starting memory based on a winning at the second starting port 604 (so-called second special symbol holding ball) ), The order in which the lottery results are derived (in other words, the order in which the reserved balls are digested) is set by the lottery order determining means 940. . Therefore, based on the order determined and set by the lottery order determining unit 940, the first special symbol lottery unit 900 (specifically, the first special symbol determination unit 904) or the second special symbol lottery unit 910 (specifically, the first special symbol lottery unit 904). The two special symbol success / failure determination means 914) determines whether the acquired random number is correct or not (performs the determination of each random number).

  In the present embodiment, the lottery order determining means 940 has a lottery based on winning at the first start port 602 (starting memory of the first special symbol) and a lottery based on winning at the second starting port 604 (second special symbol). And the first special symbol lottery means 900 (specifically, the first special symbol appropriateness determination means 904) and the second special symbol lottery means 910 (in detail). Of the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914), which one of the determinations of priority is given priority is determined according to the gaming state.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol lottery means 900 (specifically, the first special symbol appropriateness determination means 904) determines whether or not the second special symbol lottery means 910 (specifically, the second special symbol lottery means 904). The lottery order is determined so as to be prioritized over the success / failure determination by the special symbol success / failure determination means 914). In this case, the determination as to whether the second special symbol lottery means 910 is successful (lottery process) is not performed as long as the first special symbol start-up memory exists, and the standby state is established.

  Further, if the game state is a probabilistic gaming state, the determination by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (specifically, the second special symbol appropriateness determination means 914) is made, and the first special symbol lottery means 900 (specifically, the first special symbol appropriateness is determined). The lottery order is determined so as to be prioritized over the determination by the determination means 904). In this case, the first special symbol lottery means 900 determines whether or not it is successful (lottery process) as long as there is a start memory of the second special symbol, and enters a standby state.

  However, the determination of the lottery order is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the gaming state, the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (specifically, the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914) is always performed. The determination may be made so that the symbol lottery means 900 (specifically, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904) is prioritized.

  By the way, when the result of the success / failure determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is determined to be a big hit, a symbol generated by a random number range of 0 to 99 by a symbol random number acquisition means (not shown). One random number is acquired from the random numbers. And if this acquired random number value is 0-79, it will determine with a long open jackpot, and if it is 80-99, it will determine with a short open jackpot. Note that, regardless of whether you win a long-open jackpot or a short-open jackpot, if you win a jackpot game (if you win a long-open jackpot, after the long-open jackpot game ends, if you win a short-open jackpot If so, the gaming state after the short open big hit game) will always be the probability variation gaming state. Then, the probability variation gaming state returns to the normal gaming state when the number of changes of the special symbol (that is, the number of lottery of the special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times). However, instead of returning to the normal gaming state after the number of times the special symbol has been changed a predetermined number of times, the game may be returned to the normal gaming state after being controlled to the probability variation gaming state for a predetermined time.

  If the determined jackpot type is a long-open jackpot, the long-open jackpot game execution means 715a displays an effect image indicating that the jackpot has been won on the display surface of the effect display device 115. Thus, a long open jackpot game (a jackpot game in which a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player) for opening and closing the opening / closing device 500 is executed.

On the other hand, if the determined type of jackpot is a short-open jackpot game, the short-open jackpot game execution means 715b causes the short-open jackpot game (a fixed amount of game balls to be paid out to the player) to open and close the opening / closing device 500. A jackpot game that is not prompted) is executed. It should be noted that the effect image indicating that the short open jackpot has been won is not displayed on the display surface of the effect display device 115.

When the long open jackpot is won, the game state after the long open jackpot game based on the long open jackpot is executed is controlled by the game state control means 934 to the probability change game state. As described above, in this probability changing game state, the probability changing function and the time saving function are operated, so that the player can easily win a big hit and can play the game without reducing the ball.

  Also, if it is determined that the result of the determination as to whether or not the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 determines that it is lost, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. The determination is made by the determining means 904 or the second special symbol winning / failing determining means 914.

  Specifically, 99, 199, 299, 399, 499, and 599 are stored as specific condition formation random numbers in the normal condition determination determination table of the first special symbol in the hit determination table 906. In addition, in the hit determination table 906, the specific condition establishment determination table at the time of high probability of the first special symbol is the same table as the specific condition establishment determination table at the normal time of the first special symbol. 99, 199, 299, 399, 499, and 599 are stored as specific condition establishment random numbers in the probability-specific condition establishment determination table.

  On the other hand, 199 and 299 are stored as specific condition establishment random numbers in the normal special condition establishment determination table of the second special symbol in the hit determination table 906. In addition, the specific condition establishment determination table at the time of high probability of the second special symbol in the hit determination table 906 is the same table as the specific condition establishment determination table at the normal time of the second special symbol. In the specific condition establishment determination table at the time of probability, 199 and 299 are stored as specific condition establishment random numbers.

  When it is determined that the acquired random number is a random number that satisfies these specific conditions, the opening / closing device operation in which the opening / closing device 500 is opened / closed by the opening / closing device operation processing means 714 to approximate the opening / closing operation of the short open big hit. Processing is executed.

  Thus, in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is always constant regardless of whether or not the probability changing function is operating. Similarly, also in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is always constant regardless of whether or not the probability changing function is operating. However, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is different from the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (first special symbol lottery). The probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the means 900 is higher than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910).

  By the way, in the probability variation gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated, for example, a longer time is used as the opening time for the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 (promotion mode). The lottery frequency by the symbol lottery means 910 is increased (the lottery opportunities for special symbols increase). In other words, the chances of winning the jackpot increase as the special symbol lottery opportunities increase as compared to the normal gaming state. Therefore, by making the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 relatively lower than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the player The frequency with which a specific condition with a small profit given to is satisfied is reduced. Thereby, the troublesomeness resulting from frequent establishment of specific conditions can be reduced, and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the normal game state in which the opening extension function is not activated, for example, a longer time is not used as the opening time for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 606, so the opening extension function is activated. There are fewer lottery opportunities for special symbols compared to the gaming state. Here, since the opening / closing device operation process and the short open jackpot game are very similar to each other, increasing the frequency with which the specific condition is satisfied gives the player a sense of expectation that the probability variation function will be activated. The frequency increases, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Thus, by making the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 relatively lower than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, In any gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as described above, whether the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the second special symbol lottery means 910 are successful or not is determined by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 being released. Based on. The release condition in the present embodiment is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but is not limited thereto. For example, when a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained is determined, the determination result may be stored until the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

  By the way, in this embodiment, according to the number of each hold in the 1st special symbol reservation counter 903 and the 2nd special symbol reservation counter 913, the 1st when a high expectation effect (what is called reach effect) mentioned later is not performed. Control is performed so that the variation times of the special symbol and the second special symbol are different. For example, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the details will be described later. In the normal gaming state where the time reduction function does not operate, the variation time of the first special symbol increases as the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol reservation counter 903 increases. While the time is controlled to be shorter, the variation time of the second special symbol is constant regardless of the number of retained balls of the second special symbol retention counter 913.

  In the probability variation gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated, the second special symbol hold counter 913 is controlled so that the variation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter as the number of retained balls increases, while the variation time of the first special symbol Is constant regardless of the number of balls held in the first special symbol holding counter 903. In the gaming state in which the short function is activated at this time, in addition to the promotion of winning of the game ball to the second starting port 604, the lottery for the first starting memory is in a standby state as long as the second starting memory exists. Therefore, the frequency with which the lottery for the first start information is performed is low. Therefore, the amount of data stored in the ROM 712 can be reduced by setting the variation time of the first special symbol to be a constant time regardless of the number of balls held in the first special symbol holding counter 903. It is possible to prevent the control load from increasing.

  The result of the determination by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 is determined by the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display control unit 704 by the first special symbol display control unit 702 or the second special symbol display control unit 704. 2 is displayed on the special symbol display 86. However, since the display is displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs, it is difficult for the player to grasp the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 or the second special symbol appropriateness determination unit 914. .

  The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 is set by the first special symbol hold display control means 930 or the second special symbol hold display control means 932, respectively. It is displayed on the display 88 or the second special symbol hold display 90.

  The jackpot game execution means 715 executes a jackpot game accompanied by the operation of the condition device based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. More specifically, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a big hit, the jackpot game execution means 715 is opened and closed by the opening / closing operation control means 938. The opening / closing solenoid 500 is operated to open / close the opening / closing device 500, and the jackpot game is executed.

  Note that the condition device operates only when the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a big hit, and changes from the normal gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state. (Transition) is a condition that the condition device is activated.

  In addition, as described above, the transition condition from the probability variation gaming state to the normal gaming state is that a special symbol change in the probability variation gaming state is performed a predetermined number of times. It should be noted that in general gaming machines, from the probability variation gaming state triggered by the decision to shift from the probability variation gaming state to the normal gaming state triggered by the jackpot game or to fall by the falling lottery performed during the probability variation gaming state In some cases, the game state may be shifted to the normal gaming state, but none of these is adopted in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

  By the way, in this embodiment, as the type of jackpot game, the maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 is relatively long (for example, 30 sec) and the maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 is relatively short (for example, 0) .6 sec) short open big hit games. If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is the above-mentioned long open big hit game, the long open big hit game execution means 715a serving as the big hit game execution means 715 is long. Perform an open jackpot game.

  Here, the long open jackpot game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed 15 rounds by the opening / closing operation control means 938. The short open big hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed two rounds by the opening / closing operation control means 938. When a game ball wins the open / close device 500, the open / close device count sensor 776 counts the number of winning balls. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls as prize balls are paid out from the ball payout device 53 to the tray by the payout control board 720. Note that, in the short-open big hit game, as described above, the maximum open time of the opening / closing device 500 is only performed twice (two rounds) as compared to the long open big hit game, and it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize. (Even if you win a prize, you will barely win 1 or 2 balls), you can hardly get the prize ball. In addition, even if a short open big hit game is executed, the player often does not notice.

  Note that the types of jackpot games are not limited to long-open jackpot games and short-open jackpot games, and the maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 is substantially the same (for example, 30 seconds), but the maximum number of opening times is relative. A large jackpot (for example, 15 rounds) and a jackpot (for example, two rounds) with a relatively small maximum number of releases may be used. Further, although the maximum number of times of opening is substantially the same (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 is relatively long (for example, 30 sec) and the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 is relatively short (for example, 15 rounds). For example, it may be 0.3 sec).

  Here, “round” is an opening / closing operation unit of the opening / closing device 500 at the time of the big hit game, and after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, the closing condition is satisfied from the opened state until the opening / closing device 500 is closed. Round. The closing condition is that a predetermined time elapses after the opening / closing device 500 is opened or that the maximum number of game balls wins the opening / closing device 500. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing device 500 is closed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the closing conditions at the time of a long open big hit game and the closing conditions at the time of a short open game are different. The closing condition in the long open jackpot game is that 30 seconds elapse after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, or that nine game balls win. On the other hand, the closing condition in the short open big hit game is that 0.6 sec elapses after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, or that three game balls win.

  The closing conditions of the opening / closing device 500 are not limited to these. However, in the long open big hit game, the closing condition is set so that the maximum number of winning game balls can be won by the opening / closing device 500 before the opening / closing device 500 is opened until a predetermined time elapses. It is preferable. On the other hand, in the short-open big hit game, it is preferable that the closing condition is set so that one or two game balls can be won by the opening / closing device 500 while the opening / closing device 500 is open.

  In this way, even if the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a big hit, a case where a long open big hit game is played and a case where a short open big hit game is executed Thus, the benefits given to the player are very different. That is, when the winning jackpot type is a long open jackpot, a large amount of game balls can win the opening / closing device 500. On the other hand, when the winning jackpot type is a short open jackpot, the game device can barely win one or two game balls.

  Next, lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 will be described.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 612 and is detected by the gate sensor 760, the normal symbol lottery means 920 obtains one random number from the normal symbol determination random numbers generated within the random number range of 0 to 249. It is acquired by the random number acquisition means 922 for determining whether or not it is correct. The acquired random number is stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by a normal symbol holding means 923 having a storage area for storing the acquired random number and a normal symbol holding counter for storing the number of the acquired random numbers as a counter value. Deferred. When the normal symbol holding means 923 cancels the hold, the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 determines whether or not the normal symbol is determined.

  In the normal gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, the normal symbol determination determination unit 924 determines whether or not the normal symbol is correct based on the random number value acquired by the normal symbol determination random number acquisition unit 922 and the normal normal symbol determination table 926. As described above, the game state control means 934 controls the game. In this embodiment, 125 to 249 are hit random numbers (that is, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is one half), and whether or not the random number value acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 is these hit random numbers. If it is a hit random number, the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the movable piece opening / closing control means 928. At this time, the variation time of the normal symbol is 15 sec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 performs an opening / closing operation once for an opening time of 2 sec (normal mode). Here, considering that the number of game balls fired toward the game area is 100 balls per minute, there is a possibility that several game balls may win the second start port 604 per minute. It will be.

  On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state in which the time-shortening function is activated, the determination of success / failure by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 924 is performed by the random number value acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 and the open extended normality determination table 927. Control is performed by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the above. In this embodiment, 1 to 249 are winning random numbers (that is, the normal symbol winning probability is 249/250), and whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are these winning random numbers. If it is a hit random number, the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the movable piece opening / closing control means 928. At this time, the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 sec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 performs the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 2 sec three times (promotion mode).

  As described above, when the game state is the probability-changing game state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start port 604 is dramatically improved as compared to the normal game state. When a game ball wins the second starting port 604, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, so that the player can enjoy the game without reducing the number of balls. Furthermore, the number of special symbol lottery opportunities increases dramatically, the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed increases, and the decline in interest is suppressed.

  Here, the normal map determination table 926 and the open extended map determination table 927 are both stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 84).

  In this embodiment, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 924 is determined to be a win even in the normal gaming state, and the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 can be executed. The hit probability may be zero when in the normal gaming state (that is, the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 may be performed only in the probability-changing gaming state).

  Further, in this embodiment, the determination of success / failure by the normal symbol success / failure determination unit 924 is the same in the probability variation gaming state and the normal gaming state, for example, and the variation time of the normal symbol in the probability variation gaming state is the same as that of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state. The winning frequency of game balls to the second start port 604 may be improved by shortening the time than the variation time. In addition, while increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol in the probability variation gaming state higher than the probability of hitting the normal symbol in the normal gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol in the probability variation gaming state and the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state are the same. By doing so, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 604 may be improved.

  The determination result by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 924 is displayed on the normal symbol display 82 by the normal symbol display control unit 716. Also, the number of holds by the normal symbol holding means 923 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 718.

  The movable piece opening / closing control means 928 operates the normal electric accessory solenoid 774 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 606 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 is winning. However, as described above, the opening / closing operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 606 is different between the case of the probability variation gaming state and the case of the normal gaming state (in the case of the probability variation gaming state, to the second start port 604). The game ball can be won more easily than in the normal gaming state).

  In the present embodiment, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is impossible to win a game ball in the second starting port 604, and the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed. Thus, winning a game ball at the second start port 604 is easier than winning a game ball at the first start port 602. However, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is not limited to a mode in which a game ball cannot be won in the second start port 604, and a game ball win in the second start port 604 is the first start. It may be more difficult than winning a game ball in the mouth 602.

  When the command transmission means 946 obtains the first special symbol success / failure random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 602, the command transmission means 946 uses the first special symbol reservation counter to store the retained ball number information. Send to. Further, when the random number for determining whether or not the second special symbol is determined based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 604, the command transmission means 946 displays the reserved ball number information by the second special symbol hold counter Transmit to the substrate 800. Thereby, it becomes possible to display the hold information (for example, the aspect which can grasp | ascertain the number of hold balls) of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol in the production | presentation display apparatus 115.

  In addition, when the lottery process by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 or the lottery process by the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 914 is performed, the command transmission unit 946 displays the results of the lottery process and information related to the lottery result. Transmit to the substrate 800. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to decorative symbol change time information and / or decorative symbol stop symbol information, etc., performed in the effect display device 115.

  Further, the command transmission unit 946 determines the result of the determination by the effect determination unit (that is, the determination result of whether or not the random value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 902 matches the above-described effect hit value). The information is transmitted to the peripheral board 800 prior to the transmission of information related to the result of the lottery process by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904. In the present embodiment, the game ball wins the first start port 602 based on the information (information on whether or not the random number acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 902 matches the per-effect value). (In more detail, the random number is acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902). It may be transmitted any time after the random number is acquired and before the first special symbol change is started. However, as will be described later, the first special symbol success / failure determination random number is taken into consideration that the effect display device 115 performs an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that the reserved first special symbol is a win. It is preferred that the command transmission unit 946 transmits the result to the peripheral substrate 800 at the earliest possible stage after the acquisition unit 902 acquires the success / failure determination random number. The determination result information by the effect determination means transmitted to the peripheral board 800 in this way is held in the peripheral board 800 until the variation of the first special symbol based on the random number value for which the effect determination is performed is completed.

  In addition, when the determination result information by the production determination unit is transmitted to the peripheral board 800 by the command transmission unit 946, the command is suspended at the start of the first special symbol variation based on the random number value for which the production determination has been performed. Production end information may be transmitted from the command transmission means 946 to the peripheral board 800 in order to terminate the production that gives the player a sense of expectation that the first special symbol is a win.

  In addition, the determination result by the effect determination unit transmitted to the peripheral board 800 by the command transmission unit 946 is transmitted only when the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 902 matches the value per effect. It may be configured to transmit information on whether or not the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 902 matches or not regardless of whether or not it matches the per-effect value. It may be.

  In addition, the determination result information by the effect determination means is transmitted to the peripheral board 800 by the command transmission means 946 regardless of the gaming state, and is changed by the peripheral board 800 (more specifically, the CPU 811 mounted on the peripheral control board 810). Only when it is determined that the game state is in effect, an effect may be provided in which the player is given a sense of expectation that the first special symbol being held is a win.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is preferable in terms of control that the transmission of the determination result information by the effect determination unit to the peripheral board 800 by the command transmission unit 946 is superimposed on the hold information by the first special symbol hold counter. Needless to say, the transmission may be performed twice.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 810 includes command receiving means 950, effect lottery means 960, and effect control means 962, as shown in FIG.

  The command receiving unit 950 is a part that receives the determination result by the first special symbol admission / rejection determination unit 904 or the second special symbol adequacy determination unit 914 transmitted from the main control board 710 and information related to the determination result.

  Further, the effect lottery means 960 provides an effect mode to be displayed on the effect display device 115 based on a command transmitted from the main control board 710, an effect sound output from the speakers 144 and 341, an effect sound such as music, and the like. Is a part for determining various aspects of the lamps and the light-emitting decorative body 1720.

  The effect control unit 962 is a part that transmits information to the display device control board 816 so that the effect mode determined by the effect lottery unit 960 is displayed on the effect display device 115. In addition, the effect sound and display are controlled via the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 so that the speakers 144 and 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842 are output. Further, light emission and driving in the light emitting decoration 1720 are also controlled via the first decoration control board 746 and the second decoration control board 748.

[Protection circuit against inrush current]
By the way, as described above, in this embodiment, the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is only stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. The unit-side main drawer connector 2000a on the game effect control unit 99 side and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b on the main body frame 3 side are electrically connected. However, in such a structure in which the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b are easily connected, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000 with the power switch turned on. A situation where the drawer connector 2000b is erroneously connected is also assumed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine, the main control board 710 is usually provided on the upstream side of the power supply line with respect to the peripheral board and various sensors including the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment. Therefore, power is supplied to other electrical components. Also, pachinko machines are equipped with various electrical components such as MPU that performs control related to effect display, actuators such as motors, etc., and these electrical components require voltage values for power supply required depending on the type and the like. Therefore, for the main control board 710 provided on the upstream side of the power supply line, a plurality of types of power supply lines such as “+ 34V”, “+ 18V”, and “+ 9V” are relatively large. It is structured to be supplied via the connector 2000. Accordingly, if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected with the power switch turned on, the terminal 2001a in the main drawer connector 2000 may be connected. When a large current (inrush current described later) flows through the contact point between the contact point 2001b and the contact point 2001b, they may be welded to supply power to the main control board 710 and electric parts downstream from the main control board 710. Such reliability is significantly reduced.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, as shown in the circuit diagram showing the hot-wire failure prevention circuit of FIG. 87, the hot-wire failure prevention that protects various electrical components below the main control board 710 from such inrush current. A circuit 2100 is provided in the main control board 710. That is, in the main control board 710, although not shown in the figure, it is determined whether or not a power failure occurs through a constant voltage circuit that generates “5 V”, which is the operating voltage of the CPU 711, or by monitoring a voltage drop in the power supply line. The internal circuit including the CPU 711 is protected from the inrush current by supplying power to the internal circuit such as a power failure monitoring circuit to be performed via the live line failure prevention circuit 2100. Further, power is supplied from the main control board 710 to the electrical components on the downstream side of the main control board 710 via the live line failure prevention circuit 2100.

  Hereinafter, such a hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the main control board 710 according to this embodiment, the three types of DC power supplies “+ 34V”, “+ 18V”, and “+ 9V” are first subjected to the hot line failure as shown in FIG. Input to the prevention circuit 2100. On the other hand, in the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100, the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100a for "+ 34V", the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for "+ 18V", and the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100c for "+ 9V". It is configured with. However, among these, in the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for "+ 18V", the voltage input as the DC power supply "+ 18V" is firstly converted into its ripple component (voltage) by the CR filter comprising the resistor R100 and the electrolytic capacitor C100. The superimposed alternating current component) is removed and smoothed. The smoothed voltage of “+ 18V” is the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100a for “+ 34V”, the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for “+ 18V”, and the hot line failure prevention circuit for “+ 9V”. It is used for on / off control in relay switch circuits RL1 to RL3 described later provided in 2100c.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of these three types of hot-wire failure prevention circuits 2100 will be described separately.

<Hot-line failure prevention circuit for “+ 34V”>
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100a for “+ 34V” includes a relay switch circuit RL1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), and a thermistor TH1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC). And an electrolytic capacitor C101 and a capacitor C102. The relay switch circuit RL1 includes a coil, an iron piece, a switch, and the like. When a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current is passed through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (turned on). The circuit between the side input pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd and 3rd pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH1, and + 34V from the payout control board 720 is electrically connected to one of these connected in parallel. The other side is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C101. By this electrolytic capacitor C101, ripples (AC components convolved with voltage) are removed and smoothed. Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C102 grounded to the ground.

  Here, when the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor in the main control board 710 is stored. C101 is already discharged. According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected in a state where the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is the thermistor TH1. And is charged by the electrolytic capacitor C101. As a result, welding due to the inrush current between the + 34V voltage supply line of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the + 34V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is suppressed, and the main control board 710, And the reliability concerning the power supply of the electrical components and the like downstream of the main control board 710 is preferably maintained.

  In addition, in a state where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are properly connected, a current flows so that the switch in the relay switch circuit RL1 is turned on to avoid the thermistor TH1. Since the circuit structure is adopted, it is possible to suitably suppress power consumption during normal use while suppressing welding due to the inrush current of the + 34V voltage supply line. The characteristics of the thermistor TH1 in this embodiment are an initial resistance value of 5 ohms (Ω), a maximum capacity current of 4A, and a residual resistance value of 0.35Ω. When a current flows through the thermistor TH1, the thermistor TH1 generates heat. The resistance value changes. As a result, even if the relay switch circuit RL1 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value decreases and the thermistor TH1 itself is prevented from generating heat, thereby preventing the thermistor TH1 from being damaged. be able to.

  Incidentally, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change is used as a protective resistance against an inrush current, for example, a cement resistance, it is necessary to use a large type of high power capable of withstanding heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose an electronic component that malfunctions under the influence of heat near the fixed resistor, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH1 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as the protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH1 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, an electronic component can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH1, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH1. Note that the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL1 in this embodiment are an on-voltage of 13.5 V and an off-voltage of 0.9 V, and the on / off time of the switch built in the relay switch circuit RL1 is the resistance R100 described above. The relay is preset from the time constant of the capacitor C100, and when the switch of the relay switch circuit RL1 is turned on, the inrush current is already lowered, and the resistance value is extremely small compared to the thermistor TH1. It flows to the switch of the switch circuit RL1.

<Hot-line failure prevention circuit for “+ 18V”>
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for “+ 18V” includes a relay switch circuit RL2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), and a thermistor TH2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC). And an electrolytic capacitor C103 and a capacitor C104. The relay switch circuit RL2 has the same configuration as the relay switch circuit RL1, and when a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current flows through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (turned on), and the switch side A circuit between input pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd and 3rd pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH2, and one of these connected in parallel is electrically connected to “+ 18V” from the dispensing control board 720. The other is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C103. The electrolytic capacitor C103 removes and smoothes ripples (alternating current component convolved with voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C104 grounded.

  Here, when the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor in the main control board 710 is stored. C103 is already discharged. According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected in a state where the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is not affected by the thermistor TH2. And is charged by the electrolytic capacitor C103. As a result, welding due to the inrush current between the + 18V voltage supply line of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the + 18V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is suppressed, and the main control board 710, And the reliability concerning the power supply of the electrical components and the like downstream of the main control board 710 is preferably maintained.

  In addition, in a state where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are properly connected, a current flows so as to avoid the thermistor TH2 by turning on the switch in the relay switch circuit RL2. Since the circuit structure is adopted, it is possible to suitably suppress power consumption during normal use while suppressing welding due to the inrush current of the + 18V voltage supply line. The characteristic of the thermistor TH2 in this embodiment is the same as the characteristic of the thermistor TH1 described above. When a current flows through the thermistor TH2, its resistance value changes as the thermistor TH2 generates heat. As a result, even when the relay switch circuit RL2 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH2, the resistance value thereof decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed, thereby preventing the thermistor TH2 from being damaged. be able to.

  Incidentally, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change is used as a protective resistance against an inrush current, for example, a cement resistance, it is necessary to use a large type of high power capable of withstanding heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose an electronic component that malfunctions under the influence of heat near the fixed resistor, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH2 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as a protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH2, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, an electronic component can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH2, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH2. Note that the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL2 in the present embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL1 described above, and the inrush current has already decreased when the switch of the relay switch circuit RL2 is turned on. Therefore, the resistance value is much smaller than that of the thermistor TH2 and flows through the switch of the relay switch circuit RL2.

<Hot-line failure prevention circuit for "+ 9V">
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100c for “+9 V” includes a relay switch circuit RL3 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), and a thermistor TH3 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC). And an electrolytic capacitor C1 and a capacitor C2. The relay switch circuit RL3 has the same configuration as the relay switch circuits RL1 and RL2, and when a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current is passed through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (ON). A circuit between switch side input pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd pin and 3rd pin as switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH3, and “+ 9V” from the dispensing control board 720 is electrically connected to this one connected in parallel. The other side is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C1. The electrolytic capacitor C1 removes and smoothes the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C2 grounded.

  Here, when the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor in the main control board 710 is stored. C1 is already discharged. According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected in a state where the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is the thermistor TH3. And is charged by the electrolytic capacitor C1. This suppresses welding due to the inrush current between the + 9V voltage supply line of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the + 9V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b, and the main control board 710, And the reliability concerning the power supply of the electrical components and the like downstream of the main control board 710 is preferably maintained.

  In addition, in a state where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are properly connected, a current flows so as to avoid the thermistor TH2 by turning on the switch in the relay switch circuit RL2. Since the circuit structure is adopted, the power consumption during normal use can be suitably suppressed while suppressing welding due to the inrush current of the + 9V voltage supply line. The characteristics of the thermistor TH3 in the present embodiment are the same as those of the thermistors TH1 and TH2, and when a current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value thereof changes as the thermistor TH3 generates heat. As a result, even when the relay switch circuit RL3 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value decreases and the thermistor TH3 itself is prevented from generating heat, thereby preventing the thermistor TH3 from being damaged. be able to.

  Incidentally, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change is used as a protective resistance against an inrush current, for example, a cement resistance, it is necessary to use a large type of high power capable of withstanding heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose an electronic component that malfunctions under the influence of heat near the fixed resistor, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH2 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as a protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH3 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, an electronic component can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH3, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 against the heat generated by the thermistor TH3. Note that the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL3 in this embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the relay switch circuits RL1 and RL2 described above, and when the switch of the relay switch circuit RL3 is turned on, the inrush current has already decreased. Thus, the resistance value is much smaller than that of the thermistor TH3 and flows through the switch of the relay switch circuit RL3.

  In the above embodiment, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b are electrically connected only by housing the game effect control unit 99 in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. The main control board 710 is provided with a hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 under the background that the power supply is supplied to the electrical components below the main control board 710. That is, in this case, the live line failure prevention circuit 2100 is provided on the power line immediately below where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected with the power switch turned on. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately ensure the reliability related to the power supply of the electrical components below the main control board 710. However, in terms of protection from the inrush current, the board (discharging control board 720) provided on the upstream side of the main control board 710 or downstream of the main control board 710 is inferior to the case of the above embodiment. A hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 may be provided on a power supply line of a substrate provided on the side.

  In the above embodiment, the thermistors TH1, TH2, and TH3 are used as the resistance for protection from the inrush current. However, an appropriate resistance may be used. That is, in this case, the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 are electrically connected in series with the resistors and the relays RL1, RL2, and RL3. When an inrush current flows, the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 flow to the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 via the resistors. . For this reason, the inrush current which flows into electrolytic capacitor C1, C101, C103 can be reduced by converting inrush current into heat with resistance. On the other hand, after the inrush current flows, current is passed through the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 through the relays RL1, RL2, and RL3 without passing through the resistors. Thereby, destruction of resistance can be prevented.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main board 700 in accordance with the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[About main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by the CPU mounted on the main control board of the main board.

  As shown in FIG. 88, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 711 (see FIG. 84) executes power-on processing (step S10). In the power-on process, first, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (see FIG. 84) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). That is, the RAM 713 (data memory) of this embodiment has a backup area in which various control data are backed up by constantly supplying power. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the processing area of the RAM 713 to the backup area, and the temporarily saved data when the power is restored. Is read out to the processing area of the RAM 713, so that a game with continuity can be executed from the time of power-off.

  Therefore, in this power-on process (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup area) is normal, the process of returning to the power supply stop state according to the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (power recovery) Time processing). On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is deleted. After that, in the RAM 713, various control data necessary for the progress of the game such as jackpot winning probability and control data indicating the current game state are written with respective initial parameters (initialization). processing). Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

  The current gaming state written in the power-on process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810, and the display on the effect display device 115 is controlled based on this command. In this way, the current gaming state at the time of a power failure is stored in the RAM 713 of the main control board 710, and the current gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 after power recovery, so that even if there is a power failure, The game state displayed on the effect display device 115 can be matched (the peripheral control board 810 does not store the game state at the time of power failure). By the way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to synchronize the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol corresponding symbol of the effect display device 115 with the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern which will be described later is started at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started. Send information about the command. Immediately after transmitting the command, a command for the current game information is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 each time. As a result, the peripheral control board 810 can always grasp the current gaming state.

  However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM erase switch that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is on. That is, even when this RAM erase switch is on, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is erased. At the same time, various control data necessary for the game progress, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current game state, are written in the processing area of the RAM 713 with respective initial parameters. Processing).

  In the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 710 (see FIG. 84) is activated when such initialization processing is executed is sent to the peripheral control board 810 (FIG. 85). The process of setting to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 810 that the main control board 710 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 713, and the power supply is started when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 711 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 395. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 710 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 710 in step S20, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S40).

  The process at the time of the power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as “recovery”). This is a process of temporarily saving data in the backup area of the RAM 713 when a power failure occurs in order to start. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power failure occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but as a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when a power failure occurs. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 711 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, the checksum in the processing area of the RAM 713 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored in the backup area of the RAM 713 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 713 before the power failure are properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 711 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 713 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 711 prohibits access to the RAM 713 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 711 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, a power interruption occurrence process is entered due to a momentary power interruption, and even when the infinite loop of FIG. 89 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 711 is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Instead of the backup area of the RAM 713, a rewritable nonvolatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 713 may be a backup area in which data is backed up by constantly supplying power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the specific area of the RAM 713 to another area when the power is shut off. In addition, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 711 mounted on the main control board 710 of the main board 700 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 711 executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, a process for monitoring detection signals of the various sensors described above (gate sensor 760, first start port sensor 780, second start port sensor 782, opening / closing device count sensor 776, etc.) is executed.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 720 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 760 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing opening / closing control of the movable piece 606 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processing from the start of the special symbol change to the start of the winning game is executed, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing device 500 as the special electric accessory is performed. Execute the process.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 810 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 711 in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, various random numbers used in the game include a random number for determination of success / failure, a random number for design, a random number for determination of reach, a random number for variation pattern, a random number for determination of success / failure of normal symbol, and the like.

  The success / failure determination random number is a success / failure determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game. The symbol random number is a random number used for determining the type of jackpot (long open jackpot, short open jackpot) when it is determined that a jackpot game will be generated. The reach determination random number is a random number that is used for determining whether or not to perform a highly anticipated effect such as a reach effect without winning a jackpot (that is, losing) in the success / failure determination. The variation pattern random number is a random number used to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86. The normal symbol determination random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be in an open state.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern of the decorative design that is displayed and controlled by the effect display device 115 may be determined by a random number for variation pattern, and is applied to the CPU 811 or the display device control board 816 mounted on the peripheral control board 810 of the peripheral board 800. It may be determined by the CPU 832 to be mounted (both refer to FIG. 85). Further, the random number for the variation pattern is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the random number for reach determination.

  Of these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, the random number for determining whether or not to win the jackpot game, the design random number, and whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 606 in an open state in which a game ball can be easily received. The random number for determining whether or not the symbol is correct is updated. Here, the random numbers used for determining whether or not the big hit game is generated and whether or not the pair of movable pieces 606 are controlled to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing this, the probability (probability determined to generate a jackpot game, probability determined to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number is made constant (that is, aiming) And the like can be prevented from being biased, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are updated regardless of the occurrence of the winning game and the display result of the normal symbol. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 710 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update processing, when the counter for updating the random number for determination of the success / failure makes one round, the determination is made for the next determination. The initial value determination random number or the like for determining the initial value of the random number is also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for acquiring the random number for determination of success / failure, there are provided two means: a first special symbol determination / random determination acquisition means 902 and a second special symbol determination / random determination acquisition means 912. However, only one of these may be provided.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 602 or the second start port 604, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is confirmed (step S120 to step S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120), the fluctuation occurs. A start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether or not to start the big hit game, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 is determined, and the variation pattern is set to the variation pattern. A correspondingly set fluctuation time (the time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86) is set in the timer. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, the process selection flag is updated to “3” if it is determined to be a big hit in the change start process (step S130), and the process selection flag is set to “0” if it is not determined to be a big hit. Update. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the jackpot type is determined, the number of rounds for controlling the opening / closing operation of the switchgear 500 according to the jackpot type, the opening time and the game ball winning limit number are set, and the processing flag is set to “ Update to "4". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S230). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S230), the special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, the opening / closing operation of the switchgear 500 is controlled based on the number of rounds, the opening time and the number of game balls to be won set in the jackpot game start process (step S200), and the jackpot game ends. In this case, a process for updating whether or not to activate the probability changing function and the time reduction function and updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S240 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[About the 1st and 2nd starting prize winning process]
Next, the first / second start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the first / second start opening winning process.

  In the first and second start opening winning processes, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 604 (step S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of game ball detection by the second start port sensor 782 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 604 (YES in step S1101). If no game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782, it is determined that no game ball has won the second start port 604 (NO in step S1101).

  When it is determined in step S1102 that the game ball has won the second starting port 604, various data (random determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type acquired by the second special symbol determination random number acquisition means 912) are stored. get. Then, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102).

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the CPU 711 performs a second hold storage process (step S1103), and then proceeds to step S1104. move on. In the second on-hold storage process, a process for storing various data (win / fail determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the second start opening 604 in the random number determination random storage area 5131; A lottery process (hereinafter referred to as “special effect lottery process”) for determining whether or not to execute a special effect performed using the random number for determining whether or not the data is obtained, and a counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 The process of adding 1 to is mainly performed. The random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to win has a random number storage area for determining whether or not to win, a design random number storage area, and a special symbol type storage area, and various types of game balls acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 604. Data is stored in each storage area.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S1101 that a game ball has not won the second starting port 604 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is an upper limit value of 4. When it is determined that the value has reached (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the CPU 711 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 602 (step S1104). Specifically, the presence / absence of game ball detection by the first start port sensor 780 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 602 (YES in step S1104). If no game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that no game ball has been won in the first start port 602 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that the game ball has won the first starting port 602, various random numbers (random determination random numbers, symbol random numbers, special symbol types acquired by the first special symbol determination random number acquisition means 902) are displayed. It is acquired and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105).

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the CPU 711 performs a first hold storage process (step S1106), and the first and second The start opening winning process is terminated. In the first on-hold storage process, a process for storing various data (win / fail determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the first starting port 602 in the random number determination random storage area 5131; The special effect lottery process that is performed using the random number for determining whether or not the acquired various data is performed, and the process of adding 1 to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 are mainly performed. Similar to the various data acquired by winning the game ball in the second starting port 604, the various data acquired by winning the game ball in the first starting port 602 is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity. It is stored in each storage area.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S1104 that a game ball has not won the first start port 602 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is an upper limit value of 4. When it is determined that the number has reached (NO in step S1105), the first and second start opening winning processes are both terminated.

  In step S1102, if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the second start port 604, the various data acquired in step S1101 are discarded. Similarly, in step S1105, when the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the first start port 602, the various data acquired in step S1104 are discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won at the second starting port 604, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1101, but step S1101 to step S1101. What is necessary is just to perform between S1103. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1101, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1103 You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has won at the first start port 602, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1104; What is necessary is just to perform between step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit value in step S1105, You may make it acquire by a 1st pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Thus, in this embodiment, after performing the winning process (steps S1101 to S1103) to the second starting port 604, the winning process (steps S1104 to 1106) to the first starting port 602 is performed. Yes. However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first start port 602 is executed, the winning process for the second start port 604 may be executed.

  Next, the special effect lottery process will be described. The special effect lottery process is performed when a random number for determination of success / failure is acquired based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at the first starting port 600 in the normal gaming state. Then, the result information of the special effect lottery process is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 together with the hold number information.

  It should be noted that the command transmission about the result information of the special effect lottery process from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 is performed immediately after the special effect lottery process is performed (that is, the target of the special effect lottery process). This is performed before the determination process for the determination random number is performed).

  In the special effect lottery process, when one random number among random numbers for determination of success / failure generated with a random number range of 0 to 599 based on winning of the game ball at the first start port 600 is acquired, the acquired first The determination is based on a random number for determining whether or not one special symbol is appropriate and a special effect determination table for the first special symbol. Specifically, 197, 198, 199, and 307 are stored as per-effect values in the normal special effect determination table for the first special symbol.

The special effect determination table 908 described above is shown in Table 2.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 711 first sets the number of random numbers (starting storage number) stored in the random number storage area 5131 for validity determination to be zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1301). If the starting storage number stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is 0, it means that the counter values of the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 are both 0. .

  If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), a shift process of the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is performed (step S1302). This shift process is a process for shifting the order in which the determination of whether or not the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game balls to the respective start ports 602 and 604 are made is performed. That is, in principle, whether or not the special symbol is successful is determined in the order in which the game balls are won in the respective start ports 602 and 604, and therefore the order is shifted as the change starts. The random number acquired earliest among the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game balls at the start ports 602 and 604 is transferred to the processing area 5132. However, in the present embodiment, the random number acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 604 is acquired after the random number acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 602. Even so, it is preferentially moved to the processing area 5132 by a random number based on a winning at the first start port 602. If the start memory number is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the variation start process is terminated.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 711 determines the type (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol) stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1303). If the type is the second special symbol type (YES in step S1303), the second special symbol flag is turned on (step S1303), and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is decremented by one. (Step S1305), the process proceeds to step S1308. On the other hand, if the type is the first special symbol type (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1306) and the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is decremented by one. (Step S1307), the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the gaming state in which the probability changing function is operating (that is, the probability changing gaming state) (step S1308). Here, if the gaming state is that the probability changing function is operating (YES in step S1308), the high-probability regular big hit determination table 908 is selected from the hit determination tables (step S1309). Specifically, a common high-probability jackpot determination table is selected when the first special symbol flag is ON and when the second special symbol flag is ON.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation function is not activated in step S1308 (NO in step S1308), the normal jackpot determination table 906 is selected from the hit determination tables (step S1310). The common normal jackpot determination table 906 is selected when the first special symbol flag is in the ON state and when the second special symbol flag is in the ON state.

  Then, the determination is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1311).

  Note that the jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the first special symbol determination unit 904 if the first special symbol flag is ON, and the second special symbol determination unit if the second special symbol flag is ON. 914.

  If it is determined in step S1311 that the game is a big hit (YES in step S1311), the type of jackpot is determined based on the acquired symbol random number (step S1312). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned on (step S1313). Specifically, the long open jackpot flag is turned ON if it is a long open jackpot, and the short open jackpot flag is turned ON if it is a short open jackpot. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “1” (step S1316), and the variation start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1311 that the winning / non-winning determination is not a big hit (NO in step S1311), it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (step S1314). If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied (YES in step S1314), the specific condition flag is turned on (step S1315), the process proceeds to step S1316, the processing flag is updated to “1”, The variation start process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1314 that the specific condition is not satisfied (NO in step S1314), the process proceeds to step S1316, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, after the shift process is performed in step S1302, whether or not the determination is correct is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132. Although it is performed (step S1311), it is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not the determination is successful based on the determination table and the random number stored first in the determination random number storage area 5131, and the shift process may be performed. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the validity determination random number storage area 5131 can be referred to only when the change starts.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  The variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation pattern according to the determination result. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1510). That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation is based on a winning / not-determining random number extracted based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 780. If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1510), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag for the first special symbol is ON (step S1520). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is derived based on the variation of the first special symbol this time, based on whether or not the flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the jackpot type is ON in step S1313. Here, if the jackpot flag for the first special symbol is ON (YES in step S1520), the variation pattern table setting process for the first special symbol is performed (step S1530), and then the variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1580). ). On the other hand, if the jackpot flag of the first special symbol is not ON (NO in step S1520), a first special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1540), and then a variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1580). .

  If the first special symbol flag is not ON in step S1510 (NO in step S1510), the second special symbol flag is ON, and this variation is detected by the second start-up sensor 782. It is determined that the result is based on the randomness determination random number extracted based on the fact. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag for the second special symbol is ON (step S1550). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is derived based on the current variation of the second special symbol. Here, if the jackpot flag for the second special symbol is ON (YES in step S1550), the variation pattern table setting process for the second special symbol is performed (step S1560), and then the variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1580). ). On the other hand, if the jackpot flag of the first special symbol is not ON (NO in step S1550), a second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1570), and then a variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1580). .

  In the variation pattern determination process in step S1580, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in each variation pattern table setting process (steps S1530, 1540, 1560, 1570). Next, when the variation pattern is determined in step S1580, the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1590), and the variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1600). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1610), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  In addition, based on the variation pattern set in this variation pattern setting process, it is displayed by a lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86.

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). Here, if any one of the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86 is changing, it is determined that it is changing. If the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If the variation time has not elapsed, the process waits until the variation time has elapsed (NO in step S1802). When the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 is derived and displayed on the changing display of the first special symbol indicator 84 or the second special symbol indicator 86.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not any jackpot game is started. If any of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If none of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (NO in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game start process. In this jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability changing function is in operation (step S2001). As described above, since the probability variation function does not operate when the jackpot game is being executed, the probability variation function is stopped when the probability variation function is activated (step S2002). In the present embodiment, since the time reduction function is always operating as long as the probability changing function is in operation, the operation of the time reduction function is stopped thereafter (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. If it is determined in step S2001 that the probability variation function is not operating (NO in step S2001), step S2002 and step S2004 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is accompanied by a long open jackpot game. Specifically, if the long open jackpot flag is ON, it is determined that the jackpot is accompanied by a long open jackpot game (YES in step S2005), and the number of rounds during the long open jackpot game (for example, 15 rounds), 1 The maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) and the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 balls) of the opening / closing device 500 per round are set (step S2006). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2008, the processing flag is updated to “4”, and the jackpot game start processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S2005, if the short open jackpot flag is ON, it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot with a long open jackpot game but a short jackpot game with a short open jackpot game (NO in step S2005). The number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds), the maximum opening time (for example, 0.6 sec) and the maximum number of winnings (for example, 3 balls) of the switching device 500 per round are set, and the process proceeds to step S2008.

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, it is first determined whether or not the opening / closing device 500 is open (step S2401). If the opening / closing device 500 is open (YES in step S2401), it is determined whether a preset maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has elapsed (step S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in step S2006 or step S2007 has elapsed. If it is determined that the maximum opening time of switchgear 500 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), switchgear 500 is closed (step S2404), and the process proceeds to step S2405.

  If the opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has not elapsed in step S2402 (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether or not a game ball having a preset maximum number of winnings has been received by the opening / closing device 500 (step S2403). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the count value by the opening / closing device count sensor 776 has reached the maximum number of winnings set in step S2006 or step S2007. If it is determined that the maximum number of winning game balls has been received by the switchgear 500 (YES in step S2403), the process proceeds to step S2404, and the switchgear 500 is closed. On the other hand, if the maximum number of winning balls has not been accepted by the opening / closing device 500, the process returns to step S2402.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether a preset number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in step S2006 or step S2007 has been reached. If the number of rounds set in advance is reached (YES in step S2405), the process proceeds to step S2407, and the jackpot flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the preset round number has not been reached (NO in step S2405), the opening / closing device 500 is opened (step S2406), and the process returns to step S2402.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the opening / closing device 500 is not open (NO in step S2401), the process proceeds to step S2405.

  After turning off the jackpot flag in step S2407, the probability variation function operation processing is always performed (step S2409) and the time-shortening function operation processing is performed (step S2411). In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407, both the probability changing function and the time shortening function are always activated. Note that the operation of the probability changing function and the operation of the time reduction function set here are canceled (the operation is stopped) on condition that the special symbol has been changed a predetermined number of times as described above. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), and the special electric utility jackpot control processing is terminated.

[About game content]
Next, game contents in each game state will be described with reference to FIG. 98 and FIG. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the normal gaming state. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the probability variation gaming state.

  When a game ball wins one of the start ports 602 and 604, a special symbol lottery is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910. The lottery result is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and is displayed on the effect display device 115 by a combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1153.

  As shown in FIG. 98 or 99, the effect display device 115 displays a decorative symbol 1153 in the center area, a first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, a second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002, and a hold display. And a region 1150. The decorative symbol 1153 is composed of three symbol columns, the left symbol column 1153a displayed on the left side when viewed from the player, the middle symbol column 1153b displayed in the middle when viewed from the player, and the right symbol column when viewed from the player. The right symbol row 1153c to be displayed is composed of three symbol rows. In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbols 1 to 8 are sequentially arranged and displayed in the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153.

  The hold display area 1150 is arranged in the left edge area of the effect display device 115 and displays information related to the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 913. The display mode in the hold display area 1150 will be described later in detail.

  When winning a long open jackpot in the lottery process (hereinafter simply referred to as “special symbol lottery process”) by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910, each symbol row 1153a of the decorative symbol 1153 is won. ˜1153c is scrolled in the vertical direction, and then stopped and displayed, for example, at a doublet (three symbol rows 1153a to 1153c become the same symbol).

  The result of the special symbol lottery process is displayed not only on the decorative symbol 1153 but also on the upper left of the image displayed on the effect display device 115 as the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Here, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is displayed as the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is displayed as the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 98 is controlled as the standard gaming state. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is a long open jackpot, the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) are stopped and displayed, for example, at a doublet or a chance eye to be described later, and thereafter, the long symbol based on the long open jackpot is displayed. An open jackpot game is executed. The gaming state after the long open jackpot game is over is a probability-changing gaming state in which the time-shortening function and the probability function are operated as shown in FIG. 99 until the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process.

  In addition, the above-mentioned chance eyes are the symbol aspects which show the winning of the jackpot other than the decoration symbol 1153 becoming a doublet. The chance of the present embodiment is that the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed in such a sequence that the left symbol column 1153a is “3”, the middle symbol column 1153b is “5”, and the right symbol column 1153c is “7”. . Specifically, this chance item can be displayed on the effect display device 115 when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 910 in the normal gaming state is a long open jackpot.

[About the display mode in the hold display area]
Here, the display mode in the hold display area 1150 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining a mode in which the hold of the first special symbol is accumulated in the hold display area (a), and (b) the start memory of the second special symbol is accumulated in the hold display area. It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect which is. 101 (a) is another diagram for explaining a mode in which the start memory of the first special symbol is accumulated in the hold display area, and FIG. 101 (b) is the start memory of the second special symbol in the hold display area. It is another figure for demonstrating the aspect which accumulate | stores. FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining a mode in which the start memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in the hold display area.

  As shown in FIG. 98 or 99, the hold display area 1150 has a plurality of hold storage display sections arranged in a line in the vertical direction. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the first hold storage display unit 1150 a, the second hold storage display unit 1150 b, and the third hold storage display from the bottom to the top in the hold display area 1150. Unit 1150c, fourth reserved storage display unit 1150d, fifth reserved storage display unit 1150e, sixth reserved storage display unit 1150f, seventh reserved storage display unit 1150g, and eighth reserved storage display unit 1150h It consists of eight on-hold storage display units.

  In addition, each of the storage storage display units 1150a to 1150h in the holding display area 1150 is an area in which a lottery hold by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or a lottery hold by the second special symbol lottery means 910 can be displayed one by one. is there. The hold display area 1150 displays the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 913 in a manner that can be easily grasped visually. Therefore, by referring to the hold display area 1150, the player can check the current total number of reserved special symbols (total number of start memories).

  In the following description, the random number held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 (the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900) may be referred to as the starting storage of the first special symbol. Also, the random number held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 (the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910) may be referred to as the start memory of the second special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value (first predetermined number) for holding by the first special symbol holding counter 903 and the upper limit value (second predetermined number) for holding by the second special symbol holding counter 913 are the same. Specifically, the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number are both “4” based on the pre-suspended digestion (“3” based on the post-suspended digestion). Therefore, the hold display area 1150 also has eight hold storage display sections 1150a to 1150h in order to be able to display the maximum holdable number (here, eight) including both special symbol hold counters 903 and 913. ing.

  The reserved storage display units 1150a to 1150h are regularly arranged in this order in the vertical direction, and the lottery result is derived in the area where the decorative symbols 1153 are displayed (common symbol display region) according to this arrangement order. Derived. That is, the lottery hold corresponding to each hold storage display unit from the first hold (hold corresponding to the first hold storage display unit 1150a) to the end hold (for example, the eighth hold storage display unit 1150h) in order. It will be derived in the order of the hold. Thereby, the player can clearly grasp the order in which the lottery results are derived in the common symbol display area.

  Each hold storage display unit 1150a to 1150h is held by the first special symbol hold image 1151 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 which are display modes indicating that the hold is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Is displayed in any one of the second special figure hold image 1152, the first special symbol hold counter 903, and the second special symbol hold counter 913 that is not held. Is done.

  The display mode in the hold display area 1150 will be described. For example, in FIG. 98 or FIG. 99, the second special figure hold image 1152 is displayed on each of the first hold storage display unit 1150a and the second hold storage display unit 1150b. The first special figure hold image 1151 is displayed on each of the third hold storage display unit 1150c to the fifth hold storage display unit 1150e. As a result, the total number of reserved special symbols (total number of start memories) in FIG. 98 or 99 is five, that is, three start memories for the first special symbol and two start memories for the second special symbol. Can be visually grasped. The other on-hold storage display units 1150f to 1150h are not displayed, and the background image is displayed as it is on the display unit.

  In the present embodiment, an image imitating an acorn is displayed as the second special figure holding image 1152. On the other hand, as the first special figure reservation image 1151, an image showing a mode in which the acorns indicating the second special figure reservation image 1152 are confined in a rectangular ice block is displayed. In this way, the display mode that means being held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the display mode that means being held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 are different from each other. Can be clearly distinguished.

  Further, as described later, in the probability variation gaming state, the start memory of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the start memory of the first special symbol. In other words, even if the start memory of the first special symbol exists, the lottery for the start memory of the first special symbol is kept waiting as long as the start memory of the second special symbol exists (that is, the first special symbol). It is difficult to digest the start-up memory of the special design). Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, the image of the acorn shown in the first special figure hold image 1151 is displayed as an image of the acorn image shown in the second special figure hold image 1152 being frozen. In addition, it is possible to grasp that the start memory of the first special symbol is harder to digest than the start memory of the second special symbol.

  Next, the accumulation mode of the start memory of each special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 100 and FIG. In FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, a portion where a start memory hold display is added is displayed with a bold line.

  First, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), when both the number of holds held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the number of holds held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 are zero, the hold All display areas 1150 (holding storage display portions 1150a to 1150h) are not displayed.

  In such a state, when a game ball wins at the first start opening 602 and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 (specifically, the command receiving means 950 “has won the first start opening 602”). When the command for specifying the image is received from the main control board 710), the first hold storage display unit 1150a located at the lowermost end of the hold display area 1150 performs display control from the non-display mode to the first special figure hold image 1151. Is done. Thereby, it can be recognized that the number of holdings in the first special symbol holding counter 903 is “1”.

  Further, when the game ball continuously wins at the first start port 602 and is sequentially held by the first special symbol hold counter 903, the second hold storage display unit 1150b and the third hold storage display unit in the hold display area 1150 1150c and the fourth hold storage display unit 1150d are sequentially displayed on the first special figure hold image 1151 from the non-display mode.

  In this manner, the start memory of the first special symbol is accumulated and displayed so as to be sequentially added to the end (upward in the drawing) in the hold display area 1150. Then, when the number of reservations by the first special symbol reservation counter 903 becomes N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than the first predetermined number), it corresponds to the start memory number of the first special symbol in the hold display area 1150 The first special figure reservation image 1151 is displayed adjacent to N (up to four) in a row.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), as described above, in the state where the hold display area 1150 (hold storage display portions 1150 a to 1150 h) is all in the non-display state, a game ball is won at the second start port 604. When it is held by the second special symbol holding counter 913 (specifically, when the command receiving means 950 receives a command from the main control board 710 for specifying “winning the second starting port 604”). ), The first hold storage display unit 1150a located at the lowermost end of the hold display area 1150 is controlled to be displayed on the second special figure hold image 1152 from the non-display mode. Thereby, it can be recognized that the number of holdings in the second special symbol holding counter 903 is “1”.

  Further, when the game ball wins at the second start opening 604 and is held by the second special symbol hold counter 913, the second special figure hold image 1152 shown in the first hold storage display portion 1150a in the hold display area 1150 is displayed. Is shifted and displayed on the second reserved storage display portion 1150b (that is, backward). Then, a new second special figure hold image 1152 is added to the first hold memory display unit 1150a instead of the second special figure hold image 1152 that is shifted and displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1150b. Is displayed.

  Here, “backward shift display” means that the display mode of the one hold storage display unit moves to the next hold storage display unit when the one hold storage display unit is used as a reference. It is displayed as a display mode in the display unit. Specifically, in the above example, the second special figure hold image 1152 displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1150a is moved to the second hold storage display unit 1150b, and the second hold is displayed. The second special figure holding image 1152 is displayed on the memory display unit 1150b.

  Further, when a game ball wins at the second start port 604 in a state where the start memory of the second special symbol is “2”, it is displayed on the first hold memory display portion 1150a and the second hold memory display portion 1150b, respectively. The second special figure hold image 1152 is shifted and displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1150b and the third hold storage display unit 1150c, respectively, and a new second special figure hold is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1150a. An image 1152 is displayed to be added. Similarly, when a game ball wins the second starting opening 604 with the second special symbol holding ball being “3”, the first holding memory display unit 1150a, the second holding memory display unit 1150b, and the third The second special figure hold image 1152 respectively displayed on the hold storage display unit 1150c is shifted and displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1150b, the third hold storage display unit 1150c, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1150d. In addition, a new second special figure holding image 1152 is displayed to be added to the first holding storage display unit 1150a.

  In this way, the start memory of the second special symbol is accumulated and displayed so as to be sequentially added to the head (downward in the figure) in the hold display area 1150. Then, when the number of reservations by the second special symbol reservation counter 913 becomes N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than the first predetermined number), it corresponds to the start memory number of the second special symbol in the hold display area 1150 The second special figure reservation images 1152 are displayed adjacent to N (up to 4) in a row.

  By the way, when the start memory of the second special symbol is held in the hold display area 1150, the hold mode of the start memory of the first special symbol is as follows. For example, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the start memory of the second special symbol is “4” reserved (the first special memory display unit 1150a to the fourth special memory display unit 1150d have a second special memory). It is assumed that a game ball has won a prize at the first start port 602 in a state where the figure hold image 1152 is displayed. At this time, the start memory (first special figure hold image 1151) of the first special symbol is accumulated sequentially from the next hold storage display section (here, the fifth hold storage display section 1150e) which is in the non-display state. Is displayed. In this case as well, in the same manner as described above, the fifth on-hold storage display is performed in such a manner that the game balls are sequentially added to the end (upper in the figure) in the on-hold display area 1150 in accordance with the winning of the game ball at the first start port 602. The first special figure hold image 1151 is accumulated and displayed in the order of the part 1150e to the eighth hold storage display part 1150h.

  Further, when the start memory of the first special symbol is held in the hold display area 1150, the hold mode of the start memory of the second special symbol is as follows. For example, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the start memory of the first special symbol is “4” reserved (the first special memory display part 1150a to the fourth special memory display part 1150d have the first special memory). Assume that a game ball has won a prize at the second start port 604 in a state where the figure holding image 1151 is displayed. At this time, the start memory (second special figure hold image 1152) of the second special symbol is additionally displayed sequentially on the first hold storage display section (here, the first hold storage display section 1150a) in the hold display area 1150. The Also in this case, in the same manner as described above, the second special figure holding image 1152 is sequentially added to the head (downward in the figure) in the holding display area 1150 in accordance with the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 604. Is accumulated and displayed, the display mode of the previous hold storage display unit is sequentially shifted backward in the other hold storage display units. More specifically, when the start memory of the second special symbol is held “4” in the state shown in FIG. 101 (b), each of the first hold memory display unit 1150 a to the seventh hold memory display unit 1150 g The display mode is shifted and displayed backward on each of the second hold storage display unit 1150b to the eighth hold storage display unit 1150h, and a second special figure hold image 1152 is newly displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1150a. Added.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in the hold display area 1150, the start memory of the first special symbol is sequentially added to the end of the hold display area 1150 (upward in the drawing), while the start memory of the second special symbol is displayed on hold. The area 1150 is added sequentially from the top (downward in the figure). Therefore, in a state where the first special figure reservation image 1151 and the second special figure reservation image 1152 are displayed in the hold display area 1150, the second special figure reservation image 1152 is always before the first special figure reservation image 1151. Displayed on the hold storage display section.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, as will be described below, in the probability variation gaming state, the lottery result is derived preferentially in the start memory of the second special symbol over the start memory of the first special symbol (so-called digested). ) Therefore, when both the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol exist due to the display control of the hold display area 1150 as described above, the start memory of the second special symbol is the first. The player can clearly grasp that the special symbol is digested before the start memory.

  Next, the digestion mode of the start memory of each special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 102, the start memory hold display is deleted (digested) with a thick line. That is, as apparent from FIG. 102, in this embodiment, the start-up memory corresponding to the display mode of the first on-hold storage display unit (first on-hold storage display unit 1150a) in the on-hold display area 1150 is deleted (digested). The

  As shown in FIG. 102, for example, when there are “four” start memories of the first special symbol and “four” start memories of the second special symbol, the first hold memory display in the hold display area 1150 The second special figure hold image 1152 is displayed on the part 1150a to the fourth hold storage display part 1150d, and the first special figure hold image 1151 is displayed on the fifth hold storage display part 1150e to the fourth hold storage display part 1150h. Is displayed. In this state, when the derivation of the lottery result is started based on the start memory of the first special symbol (here, the start memory of the second special symbol), the second special figure hold of the first hold storage display unit 1150a is started. The image 1152 is deleted. Along with this, the display mode of the other reserved memory display units (second reserved memory display unit 1150b to eighth reserved memory display unit 1150h) is changed to the previous reserved memory display unit (first reserved memory display unit 1150a to 1150a). The seventh hold storage display unit 1150g) is shifted and displayed. In addition, as the display mode of each hold memory display unit is shifted forward, the display mode of the last hold memory display unit (eighth hold memory display unit 1150h) becomes a non-display mode.

  Here, “forward shift display” means that the display mode of the one hold storage display unit moves to the previous hold storage display unit when the one hold storage display unit is used as a reference, It is displayed as a display mode in the display unit. Specifically, in the above example, as the second special figure hold image 1152 of the first hold storage display unit 1150a is deleted, the fifth hold storage display unit 1150e to the eighth hold storage display. The first special figure hold image 1151 displayed on the part 1150h moves to the fourth hold storage display part 1150d to the seventh hold storage display part 1150g, respectively, so that the fourth hold storage display part 1150d ~ The first special figure hold image 1151 is displayed on the seventh hold storage display unit 1150g, and the eighth hold storage display unit 1150h is not displayed. Also, the second special figure hold image 1152 displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1150b to the fourth hold storage display unit 1150d is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1150a to the third hold storage display unit 1150c. The second special figure hold image 1152 is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1150a to the third hold storage display unit 1150c so as to move.

  In the same manner, in the hold display area 1150, the display mode of the head hold storage display unit (first hold storage display unit 1150a) is deleted in accordance with the digestion of the special symbol start-up memory, and another hold is made. A forward display of the display mode in the storage display unit is performed. As a result, the number of holdings (starting memory number) has decreased according to the digestion of the starting memory of the special symbol, and whether the symbol variation based on the starting memory of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been performed, The player can grasp visually.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, even if the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913 is performed before the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903, the first special symbol start-up storage is performed. 2 It is digested preferentially over the starting memory of special symbols. In other words, as long as there is a hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903, the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913 is not released. Therefore, the start memory of the second special symbol is not digested until all the start memories of the first special symbol are digested, and only the start memory of the first special symbol continues to be digested.

  Further, in the probability variation gaming state, even if the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 is performed before the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913, the start storage of the second special symbol is started. Digested preferentially over memory. In other words, as long as there is a hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913, the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 is not released. Therefore, the start memory of the first special symbol is not digested until only the start memory of the second special symbol is digested, and only the start memory of the second special symbol continues to be digested.

  When winning the second start port 604, the second special figure hold image 1152 is additionally displayed on the first hold storage display section (first hold storage display section 1150a) in the hold display area 1150. On the other hand, the start-up memory of the special symbol corresponding to the display mode of the first reserved memory display unit (first reserved memory display unit 1150a) in the reserved display area 1150 is digested. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, when there are start memories of a plurality of second special symbols, it seems that the latest start memory held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 is digested first. . However, the hold order of the second special symbol hold image 1152 displayed in the hold display area 1150 does not necessarily coincide with the derivation order of the start memory of the second special symbol, and is the hold order by the second special symbol hold counter 913 to the last. It is digested (that is, in order from the previously stored start-up memory).

[Special effects processing]
Next, the special effect displayed on the effect display device 115 when the result of the special effect lottery process is included in the command transmitted from the main control board 71 to the peripheral control board 810 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, only when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the result information of the special effect lottery process for the random value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 is the first start port. The game ball is transmitted to the peripheral board 800 (more specifically, the peripheral control board 810 mounted on the peripheral board 800) at the timing when the game ball is won in 602. The result information transmitted in this manner is further sent to the display device control board 800, and the effect control is performed in such a manner that the player can grasp the winning information about the start memory of the first special symbol that is still in the hold state. The means 962 can display on the effect display device 115. In other words, the special special effect display 84 or the effect display device 115 performs the special effect prior to the determination of the winning for the winning determination random number acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 600. The result information of the lottery can be suggested to the player.

  For example, the first special figure hold image 1151 displayed on the fifth hold storage display unit 1150e in FIG. 99 is so-called blinking that repeats turning on and off, and this is the fifth hold storage display unit 1150e. It is shown that the result of the special effect lottery process for the first special figure reservation image 1151 (and thus the start memory of the first special symbol) displayed in FIG. Furthermore, regarding the first special figure hold image 1151 displayed on the fifth hold memory display unit 1150e indicating that the result of the special effect lottery process is a win, the image displayed on the other hold memory display unit 1150 and It is more preferable that the colors are different or the shapes are different so that they can be clearly distinguished.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the normal gaming state is controlled, the priority of the order in which the winning determination process is performed among the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol is relative. Special effect only for the start memory of the first special symbol on the side having a relatively high priority in the order of the winning determination process without performing the special effect lottery for the start memory of the second special symbol on the lower side A lottery is held. Then, the result information of the special effect lottery performed in this way is displayed prior to the winning determination process (that is, the start of fluctuation) for the start memory of the first special symbol. Here, since the special effect determination table includes the same value as a part of the plurality of jackpot values included in the normal jackpot determination table in the hit determination table, the winning determination process If the fact that the special effect lottery has been won is informed prior to the game, the player has a sense of expectation for the jackpot, and the decrease in interest is suppressed. Moreover, in the normal gaming state, the priority of the order in which the winning determination process is performed without performing the special effect lottery for the start memory of the second special symbol on the side where the priority of the order in which the winning determination process is performed is relatively low Since the special performance lottery is performed only for the start memory of the first special symbol on the relatively higher rank side, there is no room for technical intervention that works favorably for the player, and a new one related to the jackpot It is possible to perform the production. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the fall of interest, reducing the possibility of working favorably for a player.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect lottery is not performed when the probability variation gaming state is controlled. However, even in the probability variation gaming state, the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol. Among them, a special effect lottery may be performed for the start memory of the second special symbol on the side where the priority of the order in which the winning determination process is performed is relatively high. However, in order to eliminate the room for technical intervention by the player, in the probability variation gaming state, the priority of the order in which the winning determination process is performed among the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol is determined. The special effect lottery for starting memory of the first special symbol on the relatively lower side should not be performed.

  In this manner, when the result information of the special effect lottery is clearly indicated by the image in the hold storage display unit 1150, the indication is continued until the hold is released.

[Another example 1 of special effect processing]
Another example 1 of the special effects described below is when a command transmitted from the main control board 71 to the peripheral control board 810 includes information that the result of the special effect lottery process is successful. It is an effect that is always performed, and can be performed over a plurality of variable displays. However, even if the command transmitted from the main control board 71 to the peripheral control board 810 includes information that the result of the special effect lottery process is successful, the special effect is not always executed. Whether or not to execute may be selectively determined. At this time, the relationship between the below-mentioned advantage effect and the disadvantage effect is relaxed (because the special effect may not be performed even if the value of the random number for success / failure determination is 307 described later).

  Further, as described above, the special effect lottery process is performed prior to the success / failure determination process performed based on the winning when the game ball wins one of the first starting port 600 and the second starting port 602. It is a lottery process. By performing the special effect lottery process, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the jackpot game even though the success / failure determination unit has not yet been performed.

  For example, the decorative display variable display is performed on the effect display device 115, the first special symbol start memory is stored in the first reserved memory display portion 1151a, and the first special symbol start memory is stored in the second reserved memory display portion 1151b. The case where the start memory of the second special symbol is displayed on the third reserved memory display portion 1151c and the start memory of the first special symbol is displayed on the fourth hold memory display portion 1151d will be described as a specific example.

  In such a state, for example, when a command including the result information of the special effect lottery process for the first special symbol is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the peripheral control board 810, first, the fifth reserved memory is stored. The start memory of the first special symbol is displayed on the display unit 1151e.

  When the command includes information indicating that the result of the special effect lottery process for the first special symbol is a win, the effect display device 115 executes the special effect. This special effect is obtained by starting the first special symbol displayed on the fifth reserved memory display unit 1151e from the variable display related to the start memory of the first special symbol displayed on the first reserved memory display unit 1151a. The process is executed across a plurality of symbol variations until the variation display for storage. However, as long as the start memory for which the result of the special effect lottery process was a win can be specified, the result of the special effect lottery is not necessarily the start memory for winning (the fifth reserved memory display unit 1151e has the first special symbol. It is not necessary to perform a special effect with the variable display related to the start memory.

  Here, the fluctuation display concerning the start memory displayed on the first hold memory display section 1151a is the first fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display concerning the start memory displayed on the second hold memory display section 1151b is the second. Fluctuation display, variation display for start memory displayed on third hold memory display portion 1151c is third variation display, change display for start memory displayed on fourth hold memory display portion 1151d is fourth display The variation display related to the start-up storage of the first special symbol on which the result of the variation display and special effect lottery processing is a win is referred to as a fifth variation display.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when winning in a special effect lottery performed using a random number for determination of success / failure obtained based on winning of a game ball in the first start port 600, Slipping effect (effect that slides when the fluctuating symbol stops).

  Therefore, when a command including information indicating that the result of the special effect lottery process for the first special symbol is a win is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the peripheral control board 810, the first fluctuation, the second fluctuation, A slip effect is performed across the third variation and the fourth variation.

  Note that when a big hit game is displayed in any change and a big hit game is executed, all the information regarding the special effects grasped by the peripheral control board 710 at this time is cleared. For example, if a jackpot game is executed when the big change is displayed in the second variation, the special effect should be performed even after the third variation if the jackpot game is not executed, but the jackpot game is executed When the third and subsequent changes are made after this, special effects are not performed. As a result, it is possible to avoid an effect that enthuses the player's joyful feeling as if the on-hold consecutive change is performed.

  Thus, as can be seen by comparing the jackpot determination table shown in Table 1 with the special effect determination table shown in Table 2, the effect hit value stored in the special effect determination table is stored in the jackpot determination table. It is not unrelated to the jackpot value. Therefore, even if the special effect as described above is performed before the success / failure determination process is performed, the player's interest in the special effect is not impaired. In addition, when a slide effect is performed as a special effect, the result of the success / failure determination process for the first special symbol that triggered the special effect becomes a big hit with a very high degree of expectation. Can be given.

  The variation pattern of the decorative design is set in the variation pattern setting process (step S150), but when the special effect is performed, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process) and the special effect are superimposed. Done. For example, when “normal variation” of variation number 1 in FIG. 71 is set in the variation pattern setting process and the slip effect is performed as a special effect, the left symbol column 1153a, the right symbol column 1153c, and the middle symbol column 1153b. When the decorative symbols stop in this order, a slip effect is performed when each symbol row stops. In addition, for example, when the variation number 20 “D music reach undeveloped” in FIG. 71 is set in the variation pattern setting process, and the slide effect is performed as a special effect, the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c. When the music stops, a slide effect is performed, and thereafter, “D music reach development failure” is displayed.

  Further, as can be understood from the jackpot determination table shown in Table 1 and the special performance determination table shown in Table 2, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has an advantageous effect of reaching the jackpot game through the special effects. There are an advantageous mode in which the effect is performed, and a disadvantageous mode in which a disadvantaged effect that leads to a big hit game without undergoing a special effect is performed. In the following, advantageous effects and disadvantageous effects including processing on the peripheral control board 810 side will be described.

  As a command transmitted from the main control board 71 to the peripheral control board 810, for example, a special effect lottery process for a random number for determination of success / failure acquired based on winning of a game ball at the first start port 600 is performed. There are a command including the result information and a result of the validity determination process for the appropriateness determination random number. Here, as described above, the success / failure determination random number is also used for determining whether or not the special effect lottery process is successful. However, when a random number for success / failure determination is acquired based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 600, the result of the special effect lottery process is used as a command prior to the success / failure determination process for the random number for success / failure determination. It is transmitted toward the control board 810. Here, when the result information of the special effect lottery process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810, the number of start memories (that is, the number of holds) is also transmitted. And it is memorize | stored about the special symbol used as the object to which the said command transmission is performed prior to a decision | availability determination process whether an advantageous effect or a disadvantageous effect is performed.

  For example, when the effect display device 115 displays the variation of the decorative symbol and the starting memory number is 0, the special display lottery processing result for the first special symbol includes information indicating that the result is a loss. When the command is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the peripheral control board 810, the fact that the start-up storage is performed is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1151a. At this time, in the processing on the peripheral control board 810 side, it is stored that the disadvantageous effect is continuously executed until the variable display related to the start-up storage of the first reserved storage display unit 1151a is performed.

  In such a holding state, when a command including information indicating that the result of the special effect lottery process for the first special symbol is a loss is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the peripheral control board 810, the second The on-hold storage display unit 1151b displays that it has been started and stored. At this time, in the processing on the peripheral control board 810 side, it is stored that the disadvantageous effect is continuously executed until the variation display related to the start-up storage of the second reserved storage display unit 1151b is performed.

  Further, when a command including information indicating that the result of the special effect lottery process for the first special symbol is winning in such a holding state is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the peripheral control board 810, the third Is displayed on the on-hold storage display portion 1151c. However, in this case, as the processing on the peripheral control board 810 side, when the advantageous effect is continuously executed until the variation display related to the start-up storage of the third reserved storage display unit 1151c is performed, the above-described second operation is performed. Until the variable display related to the start-up storage of the on-hold storage display unit 1151b is performed, it conflicts with the storage that the disadvantageous effect is continuously executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fact that the advantage effect is executed is stored for the start-up memory displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1151a and the second hold storage display unit 1151b. As a result, the advantageous effect is continuously executed in preference to the disadvantageous effect until the fluctuating display related to the start-up memory displayed on the third reserved storage display unit 1151c is performed.

  Further, when a command including information indicating that the result of the special effect lottery process for the first special symbol is a loss is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the peripheral control board 810, the fourth reserved storage display unit 1151d. Is displayed, and the start memory displayed on the fourth on-hold storage display unit 1151d is stored as a processing on the side of the peripheral control board 810 to execute a disadvantageous effect. .

  Then, when the effect display device 115 is actually variably displayed, it is determined whether the advantage effect or the disadvantage effect should be executed, and either the advantage effect or the disadvantage effect is executed. It becomes.

  By the way, as to which of the effect effect and the disadvantage effect is to be performed, the random number for success / failure determination obtained based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 600 is determined by the low-accuracy effect group and the high effect effect. It is determined depending on which of the certain effect groups is classified.

  Specifically, the per-effect values (197, 198, 199, 307) shown in Table 2 are high-definition effect groups, and the per-effect values (197, 198, 199, 307) are excluded from 0 to 599. The value is a low probability production group. That is, in the high-precision production group, the values included in the high-precision production group include a part of the lost value (197, 198, 199) in the random number range of 0 to 599 and the random number range of 0 to 599. Among them, only a part (307) of the plurality of jackpot values (7, 307) that result in the jackpot determination process is a jackpot.

  In this high-definition effect group, with respect to three per-effect values (197, 198, 199) corresponding to the loss value at which the result of the success / failure determination process is lost, the result is determined to be a jackpot value at which the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot. One corresponding per-effect value (307) is set. Further, in the low-definition effect group, 595 effect values (values excluding 7, 197, 198, 199, and 307 out of 0 to 599) corresponding to the loss value at which the result of the success / failure determination process is lost are obtained. On the other hand, one effect value (7) corresponding to the jackpot value at which the result of the determination process is a jackpot is set.

  For example, when the random number for determination of success / failure obtained based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 600 is “307”, the advantage effect is always executed. If the start memory is held when the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the advantage effect is also executed when the variation display related to the start memory is performed. Thereby, prior to the success / failure determination process for the randomness for determination of success / failure acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 600, it is possible to execute an advantageous effect as a special effect.

  In the advantageous mode in which the advantageous effect is executed as described above, the jackpot game is executed with a probability of a quarter as grasped from Table 2, so that the obtained random number for determination of success / failure is “307”. In the case of "", a game related to symbol variation is performed under a mode that is highly advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, in the case where the random number for success / failure determination acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 600 is “7”, the jackpot game is executed without passing through a special effect. In other words, when the jackpot game is executed without passing through the special effects, the probability that the jackpot game is executed is 1/596 as understood from Tables 1 and 2, which is very advantageous for the player. A game related to symbol variation will be played under a disadvantageous mode with low.

  In this way, by performing a special effect prior to the success / failure determination process, the lottery process (specifically, the determination process) is performed with a high probability even though the lottery process (specifically, the determination process) is performed. An advantageous mode in which an effect that gives an impression as if processing is being executed is executed, and a disadvantageous effect that gives an impression as if a lottery process is being executed is executed with a low probability It is possible to create a disadvantage mode. Therefore, as in the prior art, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a game with no sharpness being played under a gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated.

  In addition, by providing the special effect determination table as shown in Table 2, it is possible to realize the new gameability as described above without much design load.

  Note that the one lottery probability in the success / failure determination process is determined by the ratio between the number of jackpot values for which the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot and the number of lost values for which the result of the determination process is lost. In the present embodiment, as shown in the jackpot determination table of Table 1, among the random number ranges of 0 to 599, there are two jackpot values (7, 307) that result in the jackpot determination processing result. On the other hand, the number of losing values that result in losing as a result of the determination process is 598 (a value in which 7 and 307 are excluded from the random number range of 0 to 599). Therefore, the lottery probability is 1/300.

  Note that the special effects described above are different from the continuous effects as seen in conventional gaming machines (effects that appear as if multiple variable displays were performed while being a single variable display). The higher the number of consecutive times, the higher the expectation. That is, the special effect of this embodiment is stored when a command including information indicating that the result of the special effect lottery process for the special symbol is a win is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the peripheral control board 810. It differs from a continuous effect such as that found in conventional gaming machines in that the number of variable displays in which a special effect is performed differs depending on the number of start memories stored (the number of holds).

[Another example 2 of special effect processing]
Hereinafter, another example 2 of the special effect process will be described. In the special effect processing described above, when the winning / no-going determination random number acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 600 is “7”, the expectation for the jackpot is low at the expense of this. A disadvantageous effect (an effect in which the jackpot lottery probability is pseudo-changed to “1/596”, which is lower than a predetermined winning probability) is performed, and if this is “307”, the jackpot It is possible to execute an advantageous effect (an effect in which the jackpot lottery probability is pseudo-changed to “1/4” higher than a predetermined winning probability). However, in addition to this, an intermediate effect in which the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is located between the advantageous effect and the disadvantageous effect may be further executed.

  For example, by providing an advantage effect table, an intermediate effect table, and a disadvantageous effect table as the special effect determination table, the intermediate effect can be further executed.

  Specifically, the random number range of the random number for determination of success / failure is set to 0 to 899, and among these, “7”, “307”, and “707” are set as jackpot values. Then, “307” and three values that do not include “7” and “707” among 0 to 899 are set in the advantage presentation table. Thereby, in the advantageous mode in which the advantageous effect is performed, a big hit game is generated with a probability of one quarter.

  Also, “7” and 595 values not including “307” and “707” out of 0 to 899 are set in the disadvantageous effect table. Thereby, in the disadvantageous mode in which the disadvantageous effect is performed, a jackpot game is generated with a probability of 1/596.

  Further, “707” and 299 values not including “7” and “307” among 0 to 899 are set in the intermediate effect table. As a result, in the intermediate mode in which the intermediate effect is performed, a big hit game is generated with a probability (1/300) equivalent to a predetermined winning probability.

  In this example, it is suggested whether the mode is the advantageous mode, the disadvantageous mode, or the intermediate mode depending on the color of the background image projected behind the decorative design. For example, in the advantageous mode, the background image is red, in the disadvantaged mode, the background image is blue, and in the intermediate mode, yellow, it is possible to indicate to the player the degree of expectation that a big hit game will occur. However, in a situation where these background processes compete with each other due to the hold state, the yellow background image used in the intermediate mode is displayed with priority over the blue background image used in the disadvantage mode. Furthermore, the red background image used in the advantageous mode is displayed with priority over the yellow background image used in the intermediate mode. Thus, if a random number value corresponding to the advantageous mode is stored in any of the plurality of holding numbers, a red background image used in the advantageous mode appears before the holding is digested. As a result, the player can be expected over a plurality of symbol variations. Further, if a random number value corresponding to the intermediate mode is stored in any of the plurality of holding numbers, a yellow background image used in the intermediate mode appears before the holding is digested. Thus, the player can have an expectation level equivalent to a predetermined lottery probability over a plurality of symbol variations.

  As described above, in both the above-described special effect processing example and the above-described special effect process, the player is given a sense of expectation for jackpot by performing the special effect across a plurality of variable displays. I can't. For example, it is good also as an aspect which can grasp | ascertain clearly that the display about the start memory whose result of the special effect lottery process was successful is different from other display aspects. For example, in the state where the start storage display is performed on the first hold storage display unit 1151a and the second hold storage display unit 1151b, a command including information indicating that the result of the special effect lottery process is winning is a main control. The display mode of the start memory displayed on the third hold memory display unit 1151c when transmitted from the board 71 to the peripheral control board 810 is the first hold memory display unit 1151a and the second hold memory display. By making the display mode clearly different from the part 1151b, the fact that the start memory displayed on the third reserved memory display part 1151c is won in the special effect lottery process may be notified.

[Regarding normal gaming state]
Next, details of the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 98, in the normal gaming state, an image that represents the ice age is displayed as a background image displayed on the effect display device 115.

  By the way, in this embodiment, there are long open jackpots and short open jackpots as types of jackpots, both of which are associated with the operation of the probability variation function (that is, when winning the jackpot, it enters a 100% probability fluctuation). . Then, the probability variation gaming state generated in this way shifts to the normal gaming state when the number of changes of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times. This normal gaming state will be described below.

  First, in the normal game state, the time-shortening function is not activated, so that the operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 606 is the above-described normal mode, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start port 604 is suppressed. Therefore, in the normal game state, the game ball tends to win only at the first start port 602, and generally, only the start memory of the first special symbol is accumulated and derived. As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, the winning determination result for the start memory of the first special symbol is derived with priority over the winning determination result for the start memory of the second special symbol. Even if the game ball to the second starting port 604 is won by the opening / closing operation of 606, the winning determination result for the starting memory of the first special symbol based on the winning is the winning determination result for the starting memory of the second special symbol. It will be derived immediately before it.

  By the way, in the normal gaming state, since it is a game mode in which the accumulation and derivation of the start memory of the first special symbol is repeated, when the high expectation effect (so-called reach effect) is not performed, The control is performed so that the symbol variation time is shortened as the number of start memories (the number of holdings) increases. On the other hand, since the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 604 in the normal gaming state is low, the symbol variation time of the second special symbol is substantially constant regardless of the starting memory number (holding number). As a result, the amount of data stored in the ROM 712 can be reduced, and the control load on the CPU 711 can be suppressed from increasing. The variation time of the special symbol will be described later.

  And, when the long open jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process, as described above, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a doublet and it is derived that the long open jackpot has been won, and the big win An effect image indicating that the item has been won is displayed on the effect display device 115. Then, a long open jackpot game based on the long open jackpot is executed, and a lot of game balls as prize balls are paid out to the player. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is controlled to the probability variation gaming state.

  By the way, in the normal gaming state, although the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 604 is suppressed, the pair of movable pieces 606 are rarely opened by winning the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920. In some cases, the second start port 604 can win a prize. At this time, if a game ball wins the second start opening 604 in a timely manner, the second special symbol is started and stored while being in the normal gaming state, and may be won based on the start memory of the second special symbol. As described above, when the winning is a long open jackpot as a result of winning in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 rarely in the normal gaming state, the start of the first special symbol described above is started. In the same manner as the long open jackpot based on memory, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a doublet and it is derived that the long open jackpot has been won, and an effect image indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed. Displayed on device 115. Then, a long open jackpot game based on the long open jackpot is executed, and a lot of game balls as prize balls are paid out to the player. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is controlled to the probability variation gaming state.

  Further, in the probability variation gaming state, not only the winning frequency of game balls to the second starting port 604 is increased, but the lottery processing by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is all performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910. Although it will be in a standby state until it is performed (until the second special symbol is no longer held), a lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 may be performed in rare cases. As a result of winning in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a doublet even when the winner is a winner of a long open jackpot. As a result, an effect image indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the effect display device 115. Then, a long open jackpot game based on the long open jackpot is executed, and a lot of game balls as prize balls are paid out to the player. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is controlled to the probability variation gaming state.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that, when winning a jackpot without probability fluctuation in the normal gaming state, the player is disappointed because a so-called jackpot ream can not be expected, and the interest is lowered. However, according to this pachinko machine 1, since all jackpots are jackpots with probability fluctuations regardless of the gaming state, jackpot villas with probability fluctuations can be expected, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. it can.

[Probability game state]
Next, details of the probability variation gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 99, in the probability variation gaming state, an image representing the volcanic group during the eruption activity is displayed as a background image displayed on the effect display device 115, and a notation clearly indicating the probability variation gaming state. (“MAGMA ZONE” in the upper right of the screen) is displayed. In this probability variation gaming state, both the probability variation function and the time shortening function are activated.

  First, in the probability-changing gaming state, the time-shortening function operates, so that the operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 606 becomes the above-described promotion mode, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 604 is improved. Therefore, in the probability-changing gaming state, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second starting port 604 than the first starting port 602, and the game mode is such that the starting memory of the second special symbol is generally accumulated and derived. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the start memory of the second special symbol is preferentially derived over the start memory of the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, it is difficult to derive the start memory of the first special symbol in combination with the promotion of winning of the game ball to the second start port 604. In other words, as long as the game ball continues to win the second start port 604 without losing the start memory of the second special symbol, the start memory of the second special symbol is not derived without deriving the start memory of the first special symbol. Continue to be derived.

  By the way, in the probability variation gaming state, since the game mode in which the accumulation and derivation of the start memory of the second special symbol is almost repeated is repeated, when the high expectation effect (so-called reach effect) is not performed, Is controlled so that the symbol variation time becomes shorter as the starting memory number (holding number) increases. On the other hand, since the winning frequency of the game ball to the first starting port 602 is lower than the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 604, the first special symbol is a symbol regardless of the start memory number (holding number). The variation time becomes substantially constant. Details of the special symbol change time will be described later.

  Then, when the long open jackpot is won based on the start memory of the second special symbol, as described above, the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) are stopped and displayed with, for example, a doublet, and the jackpot is won. It was derived. Here, when the decorative design 1153 is stopped and displayed with a doublet, an effect image indicating that the long open jackpot has been won is displayed on the effect display device 115. Then, the long open jackpot game based on the jackpot is executed, and a lot of game balls as prize balls are paid out to the player. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is controlled to the probability variation gaming state (that is, the probability variation function is activated).

  On the other hand, when the short opening jackpot is won based on the start memory of the second special symbol, the short opening jackpot that makes it difficult to win a game ball without the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c being stopped and displayed in the middle of each other. A game is performed. In this case, the gaming state after the short open big hit game is executed is controlled to the probability changing gaming state.

  In this way, when a big win (long open big hit or short open big hit) is won based on the start memory of the second special symbol, after the jackpot game based on the win is completed, the game is always controlled to the probability change game state.

  By the way, in the probability variation gaming state, although the winning frequency of game balls to the second starting port 604 is promoted, there is no starting memory of the second special symbol (in other words, all the starting memory of the second special symbol is digested). In this state, a lottery result based on the start memory of the first special symbol is derived. And a long open jackpot may be won based on the starting memory of this first special symbol. In this case, the jackpot control is executed in the same manner as the long open jackpot based on the start memory of the second special symbol described above. That is, the long open big hit game or the short open big hit game is executed after it is derived that each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a doublet and the big win is won. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is always controlled to the probability variation gaming state.

[About high-expected lottery]
Here, the details of the high-expected effect lottery in each variation pattern table setting process executed when the lottery result is lost in the above-described variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 94) will be described.

  Judgment on whether or not to perform high-expected production (reach fluctuation) is determined to perform high-expected production if you win the high-expected production lottery, and high-expected production if you win the high-expected production lottery It is judged not to do. In the high-expected production lottery, the above reach determination random number is acquired when winning at each of the start ports 602 and 604, and when the winning / failing determination random number is lost, This is done by determining whether the random number for determination is successful.

  Specifically, one of the random numbers for reach determination from 0 to 240 is acquired, and if the acquired random number for reach determination corresponds to a predetermined reach determination value, the winning lottery for high expectation is won. Judge that Here, the probability of winning the high-expected production lottery is whether or not the time-shortening function or the probability changing function is activated, whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed, and each special symbol hold counter 903,913. The probability of winning the highly anticipated lottery varies depending on the counter value (the so-called number of holds).

  More specifically, the high expectation effect lottery for the first special symbol is executed as follows. First, in the normal gaming state where the time-shortening function and the probability changing function do not operate, the probability of winning a high-expected effect (reach effect) lottery is, for example, 15/241. In the probability variation gaming state in which the time reduction function and the probability variation function are activated, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is 5/241.

  On the other hand, the high expectation effect lottery for the second special symbol is executed as follows. First, in the normal gaming state in which the time-shortening function and the probability changing function are not activated, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is, for example, 1/241. Further, in the probability variation gaming state in which the time-shortening function and the probability variation function are activated, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is, for example, 2/241.

  In this way, by changing the probability of winning the high-expected production lottery depending on the symbol variation based on the first special symbol and the symbol variation based on the second special symbol, the derivation mode of the lottery result based on each special symbol is different. Can be provided, and the production accompanying the derivation of the lottery result can be varied.

  Specifically, since the time-shortening function does not operate in the normal gaming state, it is difficult for the game ball to win the second starting port 604. Therefore, if there is no winning at the first starting port 602, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is used. It is easy for a situation that no holding ball exists. Therefore, the first special symbol is made easy to win the high expectation effect lottery (15/241), so that the variation time of the first special symbol is lengthened. As a result, a game ball is won at each start opening 602 and 604 during a period when a high expectation effect (reach fluctuation) is performed, and a special design reserve ball is generated, so that a special design reserve ball exists. It can suppress that the state which does not do occurs.

  In the normal gaming state, since it is difficult to win a game ball at the second starting port 604, it is rare that the symbol variation based on the second special symbol is performed. Therefore, for the second special symbol, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is made extremely low (1/241) so that the high expectation effect is difficult to be performed. By the way, in this embodiment, the probability that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are won is equal regardless of the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery. Therefore, in a normal gaming state, if a high expectation effect is performed for the second special symbol, it means that there is a very high possibility that the player wins a big hit than when a high expectation effect is performed for the first special symbol. In this way, in the normal gaming state, the high expectation effect for the second special symbol is an effect with a very high degree of expectation from which the jackpot is derived (so-called hot effect), and the first special symbol is differentiated from the high expectation effect. Can improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state, the time shortening function operates, so that the game ball is likely to win the second starting port 604. Therefore, even if there is no winning at the first starting port 602, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is used. It is difficult to generate a state where there is no reservation ball. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, it is more difficult to win the high-expected production lottery than the symbol variation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state (for example, 7/241 in the probability variation gaming state), and the variation time of each special symbol is I tried to shorten it. Thereby, since the derivation of the start memory of each special symbol is promoted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of game balls (so-called invalid balls) that are not held despite winning the respective start ports 602, 604.

[Variation time of special symbols]
By the way, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have different variation times depending on whether or not the time reduction function is activated. In addition, when the time reduction function is not activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high-expected effect is not performed depends on the counter value (so-called first reserved number) by the first special symbol hold counter 903. On the other hand, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the variation time of the second special symbol is constant regardless of the counter value (so-called second reserved number) by the second special symbol hold counter 913. Similarly, when the time reduction function is activated, the variation time of the second special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed depends on the counter value (so-called second reserved number) by the second special symbol hold counter 913. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is constant regardless of the counter value (the so-called first reserved number) by the first special symbol reservation counter 903.

  First, the variation time of the first special symbol is the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, that is, the counter value by the first special symbol retention counter 903 at the start of variation (the counter value is subtracted as the variation starts). If the counter value after this is 0, it is 12800 ms. Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1, it is 12800 ms. Further, if the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2, it is 6200 ms. If the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3, it is 2100 ms.

  To summarize the above, in the normal gaming state, the variation time of the first special symbol when the lottery result is lost and the high expectation effect is not performed is about 2100 msec if the number of reserved balls is 3, and the number of reserved balls is If it is 2, it is about 6200 msec, and if the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, it is about 12800 msec.

  On the other hand, the variation time of the second special symbol is the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, that is, the counter value by the second special symbol retention counter 913 at the start of the variation (the counter value is subtracted as the variation starts). Even if the counter value is 0-3, it is 12800 ms.

  As a result, in the normal gaming state where the time-shortening function does not operate, the variation time of the second special symbol when the lottery result is lost and no high-expected performance is performed is substantially constant regardless of the number of reserved balls (about 12800 msec) It is.

  From the above, in the normal gaming state, the game mode is such that the start memory of the first special symbol is repeatedly held and derived, but when the number of the start memory of the first special symbol is large, the start memory is stored in the start memory. Based on the lottery result, it is quickly derived. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of start memory (so-called invalid ball) that is not held despite winning the first start port 602. On the other hand, when the number of reserved start memories for the first special symbol is small, the lottery result based on the start memory is derived with a relatively long variation time, so that it is easy to win the high expectation effect lottery as described above. In combination with the above, occurrence of a state in which there is no start memory for each special symbol is suppressed.

  In the normal gaming state, it is difficult for the game ball to win the second start opening 604. As described above, it is difficult to win the high expectation effect lottery, but the start memory of the second special symbol is relatively long. It is derived with the fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which there is no reserved ball of each special symbol by winning a game ball at each of the start ports 602 and 604 during a period in which the symbol variation of the second special symbol is performed. Can do. In particular, in the normal gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, since the start memory of the second special symbol is rare, the derivation can be suppressed by increasing the variation time, and the start memory of the second special symbol exists. It can be maintained as long as possible.

  Further, in the probability variation gaming state in which the time-shortening function is activated, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the lottery result is lost and the high expectation effect is not performed is determined as follows.

  First, the variation time of the first special symbol is 6000 ms regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol between 0 and 3.

  As a result, in the probability variation gaming state in which the short-time function is activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the lottery result is lost and no high expectation effect is performed is substantially constant regardless of the number of reserved balls (about 6000 msec). It is.

  On the other hand, the variation time of the second special symbol is 12200 ms if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero. If the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 to 3, it is 1800 ms.

  In summary, in the probability variation gaming state in which the short-time function is activated, the variation time of the second special symbol in the case where the lottery result is lost and the high expectation effect is not performed is, if the number of reserved balls is 1 to 3 If the number of reserved balls is 0, it is about 12200 msec.

  From the above, in the probability-changing gaming state, the game mode is such that the start memory of the second special symbol is mainly held and derived repeatedly. If the number of the start memories of the second special symbol is large, the start memory is stored. Based on the lottery result, it is quickly derived. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of start memory (so-called invalid ball) that is not held despite winning the second start port 604. On the other hand, when the number of holdings of the start memory of the second special symbol is small, the lottery result based on the start memory is derived with a relatively long fluctuation time, so that it is difficult to win the high expectation effect lottery as described above. Thus, the occurrence of a state in which there is no start memory for each special symbol is suppressed.

  And in the probability variation gaming state, the game ball is likely to win the second starting port 604 rather than the first starting port 602, and the first special symbol is easy to win the high-expected production lottery as described above. In combination, the start memory of the first special symbol is derived with a relatively long variation time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which there is no reserved ball of each special symbol by winning a game ball at each of the start ports 602 and 604 during a period when the symbol variation of the first special symbol is performed. Can do. In particular, in the probability variation gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated, the start memory of the first special symbol is relatively rare. Therefore, the derivation can be suppressed by increasing the variation time, and the start memory of the first special symbol. Can be maintained for as long as possible.

  Note that the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the case where the high expectation effect is performed is not affected by the number of reserved balls of each special symbol, and the variation time depends on the mode (type) of the high expectation effect. Is determined.

  The variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, 1002 corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the decorative symbol 1153, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, 1002, and the variation of the special symbol. Time is almost the same time.

  By the way, the following technical idea can be grasped from the gaming machine of the present embodiment described above. The following technical ideas are provided alone or in appropriate combination. In addition, since the following technical ideas express the present embodiment as the technical idea, the terms described in the present embodiment are expressed in terms of higher-level concepts.

[Technology 1]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 is
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball;
A second start port in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first start port;
Entry that acquires predetermined information based on a game ball entering either the first start port or the second start port, and stores the acquired predetermined information separately from the input start port Processing means;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, one of the predetermined information stored separately for the entered starting port is compared with a jackpot determination value including a plurality of lost values and a plurality of jackpot values. In comparison, the predetermined information acquired based on the winning at one of the starting ports is compared with the predetermined information acquired based on the winning at the other starting port. , A jackpot judging means for performing a judgment process of winning for the jackpot,
A display effect control means for performing a display effect in a predetermined display area in which a result of the determination process by the jackpot determination means is displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition;
Prior to the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, predetermined information acquired based on a winning to the one starting port having a relatively high priority in the determination process of winning for the jackpot, and the plurality of lost values Special effect determination means that can perform a determination process of winning for a special effect by comparing a part and a special effect determination value including a part of the plurality of jackpot values;
Based on being determined to be a win in the determination process related to the special effect, the opportunity arrival suggesting means that can suggest the possibility of the jackpot prior to the establishment of the start condition,
Regarding the predetermined information acquired based on the winning to the other starting port, which has a relatively low priority in the determination process of winning the jackpot, the suggestion by the opportunity arrival suggesting means is suppressed. Features.

  In the gaming machine described in the above technical idea 1, a winning determination process for a big hit is performed based on the fact that a predetermined start condition is established, for example, when a symbol variation start condition is satisfied. The winning determination process for the jackpot includes predetermined information (a winning determination random number) and a jackpot determination value (based on the fact that a game ball has entered one of the first starting port 600 and the second starting port 602). This is performed by comparing with a determination value stored in the jackpot determination table. In the determination process for the jackpot, the predetermined information acquired based on winning in one of the first starting port and the second starting port is acquired based on winning in the other starting port. In addition, the winning judgment for the jackpot is performed in preference to the predetermined information. The result of the winning determination relating to the jackpot is displayed in a predetermined display area (effect display device 115) based on the fact that a predetermined start condition is established. The ball entry processing means of the above technical idea corresponds to the first / second start opening winning process in step S110 of the present embodiment.

  In such a gaming machine, the above technical idea 1 is to perform the expected effect on the jackpot by a new method. More specifically, prior to the establishment of the predetermined start condition, predetermined information (a winning determination random number) acquired based on a game ball having entered one of the first start port 600 and the second start port 602. ) Is used to determine the special effect. In this determination process, the predetermined information is compared with the special effect determination value (the determination value stored in the special effect determination table) to determine whether or not the player is successful. The special effect determination value is a part (199, 198, 199) of a plurality of losing values (values in which 199, 198, 199 are excluded from 0 to 599) that are jackpot determination values, and also a jackpot determination value. A part (307) of a plurality of jackpot values (7, 307) is included.

  If the result of the determination process related to the special effect is a win, the possibility of a big hit is suggested prior to the establishment of the start condition. Here, the ratio (1/4) of the jackpot value (397) to the loss value (199, 198, 199) included in the special effect determination value is the loss value (7 out of 0 to 599) included in the jackpot determination value. , 307 is excluded) and the ratio of the jackpot value (7,307) (1/300) is larger. Thereby, when a special effect is performed, the expectation for the jackpot is enhanced during this period.

  As described above, the special effect determination value does not include all (7, 307) of the plurality of jackpot values, but includes only a part (307). Therefore, when the acquired predetermined information is any one of the special effect determination values (197, 198, 199, 307), the big win probability is felt high, and the acquired predetermined information is not the special effect determination value. It seems that the probability of winning the jackpot is low. As a result, while the winning determination process for the jackpot is performed with one probability, the game can be performed as if the winning determination for the jackpot is performed with a plurality of lottery probabilities, with a single probability. It is possible to reduce the monotony of the game as in the case where the winning determination for the big hit is performed.

  In addition, in the above means, the chance that the big hit by the opportunity arrival suggesting means may arrive for the predetermined information acquired based on the winning to the other starting port, which has a relatively low priority in the determination process of winning for the jackpot I tried to suppress the suggestion. Thereby, the technical intervention by the player can be eliminated, and the bias of the sense of value to the player can be suppressed. This is because if the result of the winning judgment regarding the special effect on the predetermined information obtained based on the winning to the other starting port, the priority of the winning judgment process for the big hit is relatively low, Is retained based on the winning combination of one start-up port with a relatively high priority in the determination process of winning for the jackpot (that is, the winning determination process for the jackpot is not easily performed). This is because a situation in which the winning determination process for the information is performed can be caused by the intervention of the technique by the player.

  It should be noted that the suppression of the suggestion by the opportunity arrival suggesting means includes an aspect in which even the determination process related to the special effect by the special effect determination means is not performed, and the determination process related to the special effect by the special effect determination means is performed, but the opportunity arrival suggestion means is performed. In other words, the embodiment does not make any suggestion. As described above, according to the above technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress a bias in the sense of value for the player by performing the expected effect on the jackpot by a new method.

  In addition, although this invention is described in said preferable embodiment, this invention is not restrict | limited only to it. Various embodiments are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which obstruct | occluded the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. BB sectional view (A) in FIG. 8, CC sectional view (B) in FIG. 10 (A), DD sectional view (C) in FIG. 10 (A), E-in FIG. It is E sectional drawing (D). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game production unit. It is a front view of a game production unit. It is a rear view of a game production unit. It is a front view of the main body frame which attached the game production unit. It is a side view of the main body frame before attaching components. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame which attached components from the front side. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back side. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a ball dispensing device, and a ball supply passage. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a ball dispensing device, and a ball supply passage. It is front sectional drawing of a ball path unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the ball dispensing apparatus. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a perspective view which shows the flow of the game ball in a ball supply path. It is a top view for demonstrating the effect | action of a full tank rocking | fluctuation plate. It is a front enlarged view centering on the junction part of a main part frame and a game production unit, (A) is a figure showing the injection mode of a game ball in a ball guide passage, and (B) is a figure of a game ball in a ball guide passage. It is a figure which shows a backflow aspect. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is a figure which shows the structure of the main drawer connector and the sub drawer connector. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the 1st surrounding wall and 2nd surrounding wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding frame for the door frame and the sliding frame for the body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding frame for door frames, and the sliding frame for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is a front view of the dish unit provided in the front of a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. It is a front view of a door frame at the time of removing the member irradiated to LED among the members which constitute a speaker cover and a decoration member. It is a front view of the dish unit provided in the front of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the plate unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back surface of the plate unit. It is a plane sectional view of a pachinko machine. It is a top sectional view of a pachinko machine, and is a figure where a main part frame opened to an outer frame, and a door frame opened to a main part frame. It is side surface sectional drawing of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game production unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the exploded view of FIG. 54 from the back surface. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected and shown in the vertical direction in the state which assembled the front structural member, game panel, and panel holder in a game production | presentation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise a game production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 57 viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center character. It is the perspective view which looked at the center actor from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally upper front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally upper rear. It is a front view of a back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally upward. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back diagonally upward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every member and was seen from back diagonally upward. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the upper left light emission decoration body in a back unit for every member, and shows it from the front diagonal upper direction, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the diffused lens member in (A) from back diagonally upward. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower left light emission decoration body in the back unit for every member, and was seen from front diagonally upward. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper right light emission decoration body in a back unit for every member, and was seen from diagonally forward, and (B) disassembled the lower right light emission decoration body in a back unit for each member. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower right corner light emission decoration body in the back unit for every member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the right middle movable light emission decoration body from diagonally forward. (A) is a left side view showing a state in which a pair of first surface forming members in the middle right movable light emitting decorative body is opened, and (B) is a left side view showing a state in which a pair of first surface forming members are closed. It is. FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the upper left movable light emitting decorative body as seen obliquely from the upper front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left movable light emission decoration body from the diagonally upper front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the moving mechanism in a left upper movable light emission decoration body. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the moving body assembly in an upper left movable light emission decoration body. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left movable light emission decoration body from the diagonally upper front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the moving mechanism in a lower left movable light emission decoration body. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the moving body assembly in a lower left movable light emission decoration body. It is a front view of a left middle upper light emitting decorative body. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a left middle upper light emission decoration body. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a left lower left light-emitting decorative body. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of a main control board and a periphery control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a hot wire failure prevention circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st and 2nd start opening winning process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the effect display apparatus 115 in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the effect display apparatus 115 in a probability change game state. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the aspect in which the hold | maintenance of a 1st special symbol is accumulate | stored in a hold display area, (b) demonstrates the aspect in which the start memory of a 2nd special symbol is accumulate | stored in a hold | maintenance display area. It is a figure for doing. (A) is another figure for demonstrating the aspect in which the start memory of a 1st special symbol is accumulate | stored in a hold display area, (b) is the start memory of a 2nd special symbol being accumulated in a hold display area. It is another figure for demonstrating an aspect. It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect in which the starting memory of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol is digested in a holding | maintenance display area.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game production | presentation unit 5 Door frame 6 Lower decoration board 6a Decoration cover board 6C Fixing protrusion 6D Fixing hole 6E Fixing screw 6F Guide board 7 Upper support metal fitting 7E Hanging piece part 8 Lower support Metal fitting 8C Mounting hole 10 Upper frame plate 10B Engagement notch 10C Insertion hole 11 Lower frame plate 11B Engagement notch 11C Insertion hole 12 Side frame plate 12a Outer wall portion 12b Thickness portion 12A Outer frame inner space 12B Installation hole 12C Installation hole 12D Mounting hole 12E Mounting hole 12F Groove portion 12G Space portion 12H Recess 13 Side frame plate 13a Outer wall portion 13b Thickness portion 13A Outer frame space 13B Mounting hole 13C Mounting hole 13D Mounting hole 13F Groove portion 13G Space portion 13H Recess 14 Connecting member 15 Connecting hole 15B Connecting screw 16 Connecting hole 16B Connecting screw 17 Mounting screw 18 Mounting screw 19 Support protruding piece 19A Support slot 20 Game area 21 Support Projection 22 Closing projection 22B Mounting screw 23 Closing projection 23B Mounting screw 24 Peripheral control board box 25 Main control board box 28 Ball slot 29 Launch guide path 30 Game effect unit installation recess 30a Front receiving slot 32 Plate part 33 Upper security Heavy groove 34 Side security groove 35 Security recess 37 Protrusion 38 Launch ball 39 Prize ball paying stopper mechanism 40 Launcher mounting portion 40a Handle connection window 41 Fastening hole 42, 43 Engagement groove 44 Rail connection member 44a Upper surface 46 Game effect unit Fixture 47 Upper shaft support bracket 48 Lower shaft support bracket 49 Shaft support side 50 Prize ball tank 51 Tank rail member 51a Sequence supply device 52 Ball passage unit 53 Ball delivery device 53a Seal 54 Substrate unit 55 Delivery control board box 56 Terminal board Box 57 Launching device 57a Hitting ball 58 Back cover 59 Ball supply Road 60 Locking device 62 Power supply board box 64 Board tray 68 Door relay board 70 Rear opening 78 Guide rail 80 LED display area 82 Normal symbol display 84 First special symbol indicator 86 Second special symbol indicator 88 First special symbol hold Display 90 Second special symbol hold indicator 92 Normal symbol hold indicator 99 Game effect control unit 100 Door frame main body 101 Game window 102 Speaker opening 103 Prize ball passing port 104 Opening 105 Cover opening 106 Lock hole 107 Slide unit installed Recess 108 Lever 110 Mounting opening 111 Engagement protrusion 112 Door frame protrusion 115 Production display device 115a Fixed piece 116 Attachment / detachment protrusion 119 Display device control board box 120 Door lens unit 121 Lens base body 122 Upper reflector 123 Cathode Tube support piece 125 Electrode support portion 127 Polar cover 128a, 128b Speaker through hole 130a, 130b Side reflector 131a, 131b Electrode support 132 Upper cold cathode tube 133 Rubber sleeve 134a, 134b Side cold cathode tube 135a, 135b Rubber sleeve 136 Inverter board 137 LED board 138a , 138b LED substrate 140 Lens cover 141 Upper lens cover part 141c Front lens part 142a, 142b Side lens cover part 142c Front lens part 143a, 143b Speaker mounting holes 144a, 144b Speaker 145a Speaker cones 146a, 146b Speaker covers 147a, 147b -Shaped covers 148a, 148b decorative member mounting areas 149a, 149b decorative member 150 red lens portion 151 cover base plate 152 LED substrate 154 speaker frame 1 5 decorative base plate 156 LED substrate 158 decorative frame 159a, 159b decorative plate 160 reinforcing sheet metal 161 upper reinforcing sheet metal 162 pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 163 open side reinforcing sheet metal 164 lower reinforcing sheet metal 165 upper bent protrusion 166 lower bent protrusion 167 Characteristic bent protrusion 172 Shaft support side short bent protrusion 173 Open side outer bent protrusion 174 Open side inner bent protrusion 175 Engagement opening 176 Hook cover 177 Prize ball passing port covering portion 178 Projection piece 179 Upper folding projection piece 180 Vertical folding projection piece 190 Glass unit 191 Unit frame 194 Stopping piece 195 Hooking projection piece 199 Crimping projection plate part 200 Engaging groove 201 Glass plate 202 Tank mounting groove 203 Rail locking groove 204 Passage unit mounting boss 205 Sphere dispensing device installation area 206 Sphere supply passage installation portion 207 Mounting hole 208 Launching device mounting boss 210 Security cover -211 Abutting recess 212 Anti-crime protrusion 213 Mounting elastic piece 214 Anti-crime protrusion 215 Anti-crime end protrusion 220 Mounting base 221 Prize ball passage opening 222 Unit mounting recess 223 Lid opening 224 Standing wall 226 Unit 227 Ball Flying guide surface 230 Slide unit 231 Slide engagement / disengagement piece 240 Frame decoration relay terminal plate 241 Relay board cover 280 Back cover support cylinder 290 First peripheral wall 290a Insertion hole 291 Second peripheral wall 292 Third peripheral wall 293 Fourth Peripheral wall 294 Open side rear wall 295 Upper rear wall 296 Pivot side rear wall 300 Dish unit 301 Unit frame 302 Top cover 302a Vertical cover 303 Front cover 304 Front decorative plate 305 Dish top opening 306 For operation button unit Recessed space portion 307 Decorative space portion 310 Space portion forming member 310a Connector 3 10b Wiring storage opening 313 First ball removal button 313a First ball removal button opening 314 Sliding support members 315a and 315b Speaker openings 316a and 316b Speaker cover 317 Handle mounting hole 318 Handle unit 318a Rotation operation member 319 Engagement cam 320 Second ball extraction button opening 322 Ball discharge port 323 Ball rental button unit opening 324 Ball rental unit 325 Fastener insertion hole 326 Operation button unit 327 Operation button 330 Lower speaker unit 331 Speaker box main body 337 Ball extraction passage front bar 338 Guide rod 341a, 341b Speaker 350 Lock mounting hole 351 Lock locking hole 352 Door hook hole 353 Lock mounting hole 354 Cylinder lock through hole 360 Dish body 361 Storage section 362 Guide passage section 364 Ball extraction path section 365 Slide valve 366 Rotation Element 67 Rotating shaft 369 Spring 375 Ball extraction valve 383 Side opening lid 388 Ball extraction opening 395 Power supply board 400 Second ball extraction link unit 401 Second ball extraction button 409 Game panel 409a Fitting hole 409b Long hole 409c Engagement step 409d Inside Rail fixing hole 409e Opening portion 409f Lower hole 410 Obstacle nail 414 First link 415 Ball removal connection passage 419 Second link 430 Dish cover body 431 Prize ball contact rod 432 Opening lid attachment window 433 Ball removal passage rear rod 434 Upper guide rod 435 Lower guide rod 436 Guide hole 462 Inner rail 463 Backflow prevention member 464 Rail security groove 465 Security projection 466 Positioning recess 467 Game production unit stop 468 Speaker cutout 469 Fastening portion 471 Out port 472 Outer rail 472a Rail surface 472b Lower end 473 Communication port 473a Foul ball taxiway 4 6 Stopping portion 477 Connection passage portion 477a Upper surface 477b Stop wall portion 478 Passage notch 482 Guide rail 489 Foul port 491 Winning space forming cover body 500 Opening / closing device 500a Grand winning port 500b Large winning port opening / closing door 504 Panel back plate 504a Screw Hole 504b Positioning hole 504c Locking claw 504d Recessed portion 504e Opening 505 Substrate holder 505a Game ball outlet 505b Bottom plate 505e Fixed boss 505f Through hole 505g Opening receiving portion 508 Lamp drive board box 510 Back unit 510G Production space 514 Back box 514a Rear wall 514b Opening portion 514c Outer tube portion 514d Fixing portion 514e Fixing hole 514f Projection 514g Panel relay terminal board fixing portion 514h First decoration control board box fixing portion 514i Second decoration control board box fixing portion 514j Liquid crystal fixing portion 528 Switch storage space 540 Panel holder 540a Fitting step (holding step)
540b Through-hole 540c Projection pin 540d Engagement claw 540e Engagement piece 540f Boss insertion hole 540g Mounting support part 540h Housing recess 540i Locking part 540j Mounting hole 540k Positioning hole 540l Flank part 540m Positioning part 540n Opening 540o Communication hole 600 Attacker unit 600a Casing 600b Flange portion 602 First start port 604 Second start port 606 Movable piece 612 Pass gate 614 General winning port 620 Center accessory 620a Flange-shaped portion 620b Insertion portion 625 Unit relay substrate 641 Substrate cover 642 Wiring opening 643 Mounting piece 644 Wiring latching piece 645 Out ball passage 646 Fitting hole 648 Main drawer relay board 649 Sub drawer relay board 670 Winning port member 680 Front component 680a Positioning boss 680b Positioning protrusion 683 Slot Flop 685 U-shaped base 685a side 685b side 690 guide member 691 slopes 700 main substrate 702 first special symbol display control section 704 second special symbol display control means 710 main control board 711 CPU
712 ROM
713 RAM
714 Opening / closing device operation processing means 715 Big hit game execution means 715a Long open big hit game execution means 715b Short open big hit game execution means 716 Normal symbol display control means 718 Normal symbol hold display control means 720 Discharge control board 722 CPU
724 ROM
726 RAM
730 Full switch 736 Inner frame opening switch 738 Door opening switch 746 First decoration control board 748 Second decoration control board 750 Panel relay terminal board 751 Fitting protrusion 753 External terminal board 754 Switchgear relay terminal board 760 Gate sensor 762 General prize Oral sensor 768 Normal symbol / special symbol display board 774 Ordinary electric accessory solenoid 776 Opening / closing device count sensor 778 Opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 780 First starting port sensor 782 Second starting port sensor 800 Peripheral substrate 810 Peripheral control substrate 811 CPU
812 ROM
813 RAM
816 Display Device Control Board 818 Sound Source IC
819 ROM
832 CPU
834 RAM
836 ROM
838 VDP
839 Image ROM
842 Frame decoration lamp 852 Unit decoration lamp 854 Production drive part 860 Hook through opening 861 Screw stop part 862 Locking protrusion 863 Insertion hole 864 Rivet 865 Fraud prevention notch 866 Lock attachment piece 867 Lock insertion hole 868 Cylinder lock 869 Lock attachment board 870 screw 871 mounting hole 872 lock shaft 873 engagement cam 874 engagement protrusion 875 engagement protrusion 876 screw 877 insertion vertical opening 878 insertion vertical opening 879 spring locking piece 880 horizontal hole 882 first fraud prevention member 882a inclined portion 883 Moving shaft hole 884 Protrusion piece insertion hole 885 Stopper piece portion 886 Guide pin 887 Pin hole 888 Connection hole 889 Restriction protrusion 890 Second fraud prevention member 892 Connection hole 893 Connection pin 894 Spring 896 Spring locking hole 897 Contact portion 898 Screw Stop hole 900 1st special symbol lottery means 902 1st Random number obtaining means 903 for determining whether or not another symbol is determined. First special symbol holding counter 904 First special symbol determining / determining means 906 Hit determination table 908 Special effect determining table 910 Second special symbol lottery means 912 Second special symbol determination random number acquiring means 913 Second special symbol hold counter 914 Second special symbol success / failure determination means 920 Normal symbol lottery means 922 Normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 923 Normal symbol hold means 924 Normal symbol success / failure determination means 926 Normal normal figure determination table 927 Open extended normal Figure determination table 928 Movable piece opening / closing control means 930 First special symbol hold display control means 932 Second special symbol hold display control means 934 Game state control means 938 Opening / closing operation control means 940 Hold order storage means 946 Command transmission means 950 Command reception means 960 Production lottery means 962 Production control means 971 Door frame sliding rod 973 Door frame hook 974 Rivet slot 976 Guide protrusion 978 Play hole 979 Lifting engagement hole 980 Spring hook 981 Abutting elastic piece 982 Spring 983 Notch 984 Main body frame Sliding rod 985 Upper hook member 986 Lower hook member 987 Connecting wire rod 988 Hook portion 989 Rivet long hole 991 Projection piece moving hole 993 Spring hook portion 994 Connecting hole 995 Connecting hole 996 Rivet long hole 997 Lowering engagement hole 998 Play hole 999 Projection piece moving hole 1000 First special symbol corresponding symbol 1002 Second special symbol corresponding symbol 1014 Hook part 1015 Abutting part 1016 Abutting part 1017 Engaging notch part 1150 Reservation display area 1151 First special figure retaining image 1152 2 Special figure hold image 1153 Decorative design 1153a Left design row 1153 Middle symbol row 1153c Right symbol row 1404 Discharge port 1412 Passage 1413 Ball leveling member 1414 Ball presser plate 1415 Gear cover 1416 Alignment gear 1417 Shaft pin 1421 Bent passage wall 1422a Ball fall passage 1422b Left and right bent passage 1422c Vertical Passage portion 1423 Notch portion 1424 Detection piece 1425 Spindle 1426 Ball cut switch 1427 Actuator 1428 Stopper projection 1429 Ball clogging insertion groove 1451 Unit base body 1452 Bent passage wall 1453 Bent passage 1455 Distribution space 1456 Bearing cylinder 1457 Sprocket 1458 Rotating shaft 1459 Passage partition wall 1460 Prize ball passage 1461 Ball extraction passage 1462 Discharge ball detection sensor 1464 Motor storage space 1465 Discharge motor 1468 Motor shaft 1469 Guide protrusion 1 72 Detachable button 1475 Unit sub-plate 1476 Relay board area 1480 Relay board 1481 Connector 1485 Board cover 1488 Button opening 1490 Connection opening 1490 Gear area 1491 Aluminum heat sink 1493 First gear 1494 Second gear 1495 Shaft 1497 Third gear 1498 Shaft 1500 Detection disk 1501 Detection notch 1502 Gear portion 1504 Sensor board 1505 Sensor 1507 Board mounting portion 1510 Gear cover 1521 Box main body 1522 Side guide passage 1523 Side guide receiving portion 1524 Buffer member 1525 Reverse side guide passage 1526 Partition wall 1527 Inclined side wall 1528 Switch Storage space 1529 Spindle pin 1530 Shaft spring 1531 Full swing plate 1532 Detection piece 1534 Stopper piece 1535 Front guide passage 1536 Ball outlet 15 7 Foul sphere passage 1538 Foul sphere entrance 1541 Lid 1542 Prize ball entrance 1543 Switch mounting portion 1547 Wire drawing recess 1549 Spring locking pin 1601 Chucker inlet 1602 Chucker outlet 1605 Warp inlet 1606 Warp passage 1607 Stage 1607a First stage 1607b Second stage 1608 Decorative body for production 1609 Guide shelf 1610 Guide shelf 1611 Right edge guide path 1612 Rib 1641 Guide rod 1642 Mounting hole 1643 Projection 1671 Body portion 1672 Flange portion 1673 Guide rod 1673 Mounting hole 1713 First decoration control board box 1715 Second decoration Control board box 1716 Slide piece 1720 Light emitting decorative body 1721 Upper left light emitting decorative body 1721a First surface forming member 1721b Second surface forming member 1721c Diffuser Member 1721d First ridge 1721e Second ridge 1722 Upper right light emitting decorative body 1722a Substrate fixing portion 1722b Surface forming member 1722c Decoration auxiliary member 1722d Through hole 1722e Wall-shaped side surface 1723 Left lower light emitting decorative body 1723a First surface forming member 1723b Second surface Forming member 1723c Diffusing lens member 1723d First convex strip 1724 Lower right light emitting decorative body 1724a Surface forming member 1724b Decoration auxiliary member 1724c Through portion 1724d Notch portion 1724e Insertion portion 1724f Wall-shaped side surface 1725 Right middle movable light emitting decorative body 1725a First surface Forming member 1725b Second surface forming member 1725c Right middle substrate 1725d Moving mechanism 1725e Rotating shaft 1725f Motor 1725g Pinion gear 1725h Rack gear 1725i Slide member 1725j Detection piece 1725 Slide position sensor 1725l Base member 1725m Transmission pin 1725n Long hole 1725o Ling member 1726 Upper left movable light emitting decorative body 1726a Moving body assembly 1726b Moving mechanism 1726c Opening 1726d Outer shell member 1726e Front surface forming member 1726f Diffuse lens member 1726g Holding member 1726h Upper left substrate 1726i Base Member 1726j Extension portion 1726k Rotating shaft 1726l Motor 1726m Pinion gear 1726n Rack gear 1726o Slide member 1726p Detection piece 1726q Slide position sensor 1726r Base member 1726s Slit 1726t Support member 1726u Connection pin 1726v Slit 1726w Projection pin 1726x Slide support member 1726y Fixed bush 1726 Left middle upper luminous decoration Body 1727a First surface forming member 1727b Opening 1727c Outer shell member 1727d Diffusing lens member 1727e Holding member 1727f Second surface forming member 1727g Conducting path 1727h Wall side surface 1728 Left middle light emitting decorative body 1728a Convex strip 1728b Wall side surface 1729 Left middle lower Light emitting decorative body 1729a First surface forming member 1729b Opening 1729c Outer shell member 1729d Diffusing lens member 1729e Holding member 1729f Second surface forming member 1729g Wall side surface 1730 Lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730a Moving body assembly 1730b Moving mechanism 1730c Opening 1730d Outer shell Member 1730e Front surface forming member 1730f Diffusing lens member 1730g Holding member 1730h Lower left substrate 1730i Base member 1730j Extension portion 1730k Rotating shaft 1730l Motor 1730m Nion gear 1730n Rack gear 1730o Slide member 1730p Detection piece 1730q Slide position sensor 1730r Slide member 1730s Slit 1730t Support member 1730u Connection pin 1730v Slit 1730w Projection pin 1730y Fixed bushing 1730x Slide support member 1730z Bracket 1731 Right lower corner light emitting decoration 1731a Surface forming member 1731b Lens member 1731c Groove 1731d First protrusion 1731e Wall side surface 1732 Upper left corner decoration member 1733 Lower left corner decoration member 1735 Support base 1735a Mounting boss 1741 Upper left board 1742 Lower left board 1743 Upper right front board 1744 Upper right rear board 1745 Lower middle board 1746 Lower right board 1747 Right lower board 1748 Left middle board 1760 Ball guiding unit 2 000 Main drawer connector 2000a Unit side main drawer connector 2000b Frame side main drawer connector 2001a Terminal 2001b Contact 2002 Sub drawer connector 2002a Unit side sub drawer connector 2002b Frame side sub drawer connector 2003a Terminal 2003b Contact 2010 Delivery control board connector 2012 For door frame Connector 2100 Hot wire failure prevention circuit 2100a Hot wire failure prevention circuit 2100b Hot wire failure prevention circuit 2100c Hot wire failure prevention circuit 5131 Random number storage area 5132 for pass / fail judgment Processing area

Claims (1)

A first starting port capable of entering a game ball;
A second start port in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first start port;
Entry that acquires predetermined information based on a game ball entering either the first start port or the second start port, and stores the acquired predetermined information separately from the input start port Processing means;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, one of the predetermined information stored separately for the entered starting port is compared with a jackpot determination value including a plurality of lost values and a plurality of jackpot values. In comparison, the predetermined information acquired based on the winning at one of the starting ports is compared with the predetermined information acquired based on the winning at the other starting port. , A jackpot judging means for performing a judgment process of winning for the jackpot,
A display effect control means for performing a display effect in a predetermined display area in which a result of the determination process by the jackpot determination means is displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition;
Prior to the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, predetermined information acquired based on a winning to the one starting port having a relatively high priority in the determination process of winning for the jackpot, and the plurality of lost values Special effect determination means that can perform a determination process of winning for a special effect by comparing a part and a special effect determination value including a part of the plurality of jackpot values;
Based on being determined to be a win in the determination process related to the special effect, the opportunity arrival suggesting means that can suggest the possibility of the jackpot prior to the establishment of the start condition,
Regarding the predetermined information acquired based on the winning to the other starting port, which has a relatively low priority in the determination process of winning the jackpot, the suggestion by the opportunity arrival suggesting means is suppressed. A featured gaming machine.